This last compound has no Vitamin C activity at all and is irreversible. However, normal cooking usually doesn’t affect Vitamin C levels that much and in the experiment it would not be subjected to extend heating. Since the longer it cooks, the higher the temperature being used and therefore the more oxidation. The high heat used in canning would seem to pose a real threat. However, the high heat used, kills the enzyme ascorbic acid oxidase, found in fruits and vegetables, efore much Vitamin C is oxidized.
Since this enzyme catalyzes the oxidation process, this is actually serves to protect the vitamin. Also in the experiment DCPIP will be added until the blue colour disappears and the volume of DCPIP used will be noted. This volume will be equivalent to the amount of ascorbic acid present in the extract, so the concentration of ascorbic acid in the broccoli can be calculated. SOURCES OF ERROR: 1 . It is very important that heat not be generated during the masticating process, heat comes with speed, therefore the faster the machine, the more heat will be enerated.
If that occurs, heat will destroy nutrients on contact. 2. Human error or parallax error in measuring both samples of broccoli. LIMITATIONS: 1 . Will not attain 100% concentration of vitamin C from the uncooked broccoli. 2. The samples used are not totally identical although they are the same weight/ mass PRECAUTIONS: 1 . A Masticating Juicer is used since it produces a higher quality of Vitamin C because they don’t produce as much oxidation. 2. Make sure that the broccoli obtained is not damaged. 3. Use clean broccoli. 4. Wash the broccoli before the experiment.
A thermometer is used to ensure water remains at a constant temperature, since heat is responsible in increasing oxidation. 6. An electronic balance is used to ensure similar weight of the broccoli being used. 7. A funnel will be used to avoid spillage of DCPIP and liquefied broccoli. 8. Cold water is used for both samples to reduce (nullify) the heating effect from the Juicer. 9. Ensure samples of the Juiced broccoli are removed from the Juicer. CONCLUSION: the broccoli that is uncooked will have a higher volume of vitamin C than cooked broccoli. Therefore heat causes oxidation to occur.
Davidic covenant free essay help online: free essay help online
This shows that God is promising the throne of Israel to David and his family forever. It has been given even more evidence that this is an unconditional covenant when David doesn’t go to battle with his own army. He decides to stay at home and not only has sexual relations with a married woman, but gets her pregnant. After doing this, he attempts to hide that the baby is his by trying to get the husband to have relations with the wife but that ends up not working. David finally has the husband go on a suicide mission as a last resort.
After all the ad things David does, God still must forgive him and let him keep his throne. The Davidic Covenant doesn’t have a specific covenant, however, if there were any sort of symbol for it, it would be the throne. An example of this might come from when Solomon, son of David, king a second time. Chronicles 29, verse 22 says “and they anointed him as ruler for the Lord and Zadok as priest. Then, Solomon sat on the throne of the Lord. ” This shows the possibility of the throne being a potential sign. The words of God for this covenant also went through the prophet Nathan.
Nathan poke for God numerous times about the everlasting covenant. “Now then, tell my servant David, This is what the Lord Almighty says: I took you from the pasture, from tending the flock, and appointed you ruler over my people Israel. I have been with you wherever you have gone, and I have cut off all your enemies from before you. Now I will make your name great, like the names of the greatest men on earth. And I will provide a place for my people Israel and will plant them so that they can have a home of their own and no longer be disturbed.
Wicked people will not oppress them nymore, as they did at the beginning and have done ever since the time I appointed leaders over my people Israel. I will also give you rest from all your enemies” (2Sam. 7:8-11). This shows an example of what God has told Nathan to tell David the covenant. Kings was another part of the bible where the Davidic covenant was mentioned. This passage really shows how David’s brothers will always be in control over Israel. “Then King David said, “Call in Bathsheba. ” So she came into the kings presence and stood betore him.
The king then took an oath’ “As surely as the Lord lives, who nas elivered me out of every trouble, I will surely carry out this very day what I swore to you by the Lord, the God of Israel: Solomon your son shall be king after me, and he will sit on my throne in my place. ” Then Bathsheba bowed down with her face to the ground, prostrating herself before the king, and said, “May my lord King David live forever” (1 Kings 1:28-31) It shows the covenant as being unconditional. In (1 Kings 1 1:1-11) it talks about the sins king Solomon has done throughout part of his reign and how he was severely punished.
Even with the harsh punishments Solomon ommitted, God didn’t let go of his loving kindness for Solomon because of his relation to David. This is where God continues to fulfill his covenant by continuing David’s bloodline as the king of the territory God has given them. He has no choice because David and his family have nothing required to do to keep the throne. This also fulfills the calling of the covenant because technically David and his disciples did not have anything required to do for this covenant. “In that day I will restore the fallen house of David. I will repair its damaged walls.
From the ruins I will rebuild it nd restore its former glory’ (Amos 9:1 1) Along with; “My servant David will be their king, and they will have only one shepherd. They will obey my regulations and be careful to keep my decrees” (Ezek. 37:24) show ways of how God and David can and will keep fulfilling the Davidic covenant. The Davidic Covenant portrays Jesus as being related to David in a way and therefor the continuation of the covenant and the rightful heir to the throne. He then has takes over all the promises God gave David including his house, the throne, and the kingdom, The New Testament also fulfills the
Davidic Covenant when the angel Gabriel told the Virgin Mary, “And behold, thou shalt conceive in thy womb, and bring forth a son, and shalt call his name Jesus. He shall be great, and shall be called the Son of the Most High, and the Lord God shall give unto him the throne of his father David. He will reign over the house of Jacob forever, and of his kingdom there shall be no end” (Luke 1:31-33). If we take this literally, some scholars think that Christ fulfills the promise by His return and righteous reign on earth during the millennium. This is God fulfilling His duty by making Jesus the heir of the throne of David.
Romeo and Juliet – Emotion essay help service: essay help service
Love. An intense, vivid emotion that is powerfully portrayed in William Shakespeare’s exceptionally riveting drama “Romeo and Juliet. ” Illustrated throughout the play in many forms, most importantly in the courtly romance of main characters Romeo and Juliet, the heartening emotion is evoked strongly in Act Two Scene Two. Using effective techniques such as dialogue, plot, imagery and contrast, Shakespeare reveals the couples’ love and its effect on the entire play.
Firstly, it is clear the intensity and wealth of the love in this scene through the haracters’ dialogue as they proclaim their feelings with heartened enthusiasm: “My bounty is as boundless as the sea, my love as deep. ‘ The more I give to thee, the more I have, for both are infinite. ” Juliet states her love for Romeo is endless and “infinite”, she compares the vast extent of her emotions to the limitless “sea” – here her desire is clear and strong.
Furthermore it is notable that Shakespeare uses the plot and contrast in his play to highlight the significance of the passion in this scene. In the opening scene, Romeo declares his apparent love for another woman, Rosaline: O brawling love/ O loving hate! O anything of nothing first create! ” The oxymorons convey his frustration and confusion over this unrequited ‘love’, proving it is superficial. The Juxtaposition on this false, one sided love against the later intense, true love with Juliet highlights how concentrated and deep his new love shown in Act Two Scene Two is.
The plot in “Romeo and Juliet” is particularly violent and hostile. Key scenes such as the opening scene and the vicious fght in Act Three Scene One between Romeo and Tybalt depict a savage feud between Romeo and Juliet’s families. This brawling, conflicting situation suggests anything but affection could occur between members of the Capulets and Montagues. The existence of the love conveyed in the balcony scene is emphasised in strength in its ability to withstand the families’ hatred: “Deny thy father and refuse thy name! The admirable force of Juliet’s love is illustrated in her willingness to reject her family and ignore the feud in order to be with Romeo.
Bermuda triangle cheap essay help: cheap essay help
The Bermuda Triangle, also known as the Devil’s triangle is said to be one of the most dangerous and mysterious areas of the ocean known to man. It has been held responsible for the disappearances of over 2000 vessels, 75 airplanes and many innocent lives in the past 3 centuries. But the question is how? What really happened in this deadly body of water? There are many theories about what is going on in the Bermuda Triangle. From human error, to the lost city of Atlantis all the way to paranormal activity and Extra Terrestrials.
Today I will be talking to you about the mysteries of the Bermuda Triangle. The Bermuda Triangle is located between three main points in the Atlantic Ocean, San Juan, Puerto Rico, Miami, Florida and the Island of Bermuda. The triangle is formed by connecting an imaginary line between these three points with an area of the about 500,000 to 1,000,000 square miles. Flight 19 is said to be one of the first known flights to go down in the Bermuda triangle. The aircraft was filled with US naw avenger bombers on a training mission.
When the plane went down, it was said that the flight leader was heard saying “We are entering white water, nothing seems to be right. We don’t know where we are, the water is reen, no white. ” This raised suspicion about what’s really going on in the so called Devils Triangle. It is very possible that the plane had Just run into some bad weather, but some believe weather is not the cause of these vanishing planes. I’m not saying I have come up with the answer to what is going on in the Bermuda triangle, but here are some reasonable answers I have come across; 1.
Bad weather. The part of the Atlantic in which the Triangle is located is very close to the Caribbean Sea which tends to get many tropical storms. This could be the cause to all of these strange disappearances. Intense storms may be causing ships to sink or planes to crash. But bad weather is only one of the many theories people have come up with. 2. Human error and amateur sailors. The coast guards are said to get over 8000 distress calls a year, that’s more than 20 a day! But most of the time, the issue is minor, running into a rough patch of water or a shortage of gas. . Traffic. There are many planes and boats that go through the Bermuda triangle every day. Because it’s so busy, vessels and planes could be crashing into each other and falling into the ocean below. 4. Underwater earthquakes. In shallow water, underwater earthquakes can cause sunamis in the far east of the triangle. (and) 5. The gas bubble theory. Scientists say that a high concentration of gas hydrates have been found in the Bermuda area which causes the water to become less dense in small patches.
This could cause ships to sink quickly without and trace. Believe it or not,some think the tragedies are caused by the lost city of Atlantis. Some even say that government is behind it. The government supposedly runs an underwater base called A. U. T. E. C. It stands for Atlantic Undersea test and evaluation center. It is located in the middle of the triangle where the naw tests new ubmarines, weapons and sonar. Some people think the government has been working with extraterrestrials and that A.
U. T. E. C. is actually used for testing reverse engineered alien technology. Some also say the mythical lost city of Atlantis is causing these mysterious disappearances because ot a stone trail called Bimini road. It’s supposedly part of the lost city and possesses advanced technology that is interfering with radio signals in vessels and aircrafts. These theories are more farfetched than earthquakes and amateurs but some think this could be the reason to the mysteries in the triangle.
Corrections History and Institutions college essay help nyc: college essay help nyc
Corrections History and Institutions CJA/234 Incarceration began in the United States as a more acceptable and humane way to manage criminal behavior than physical punishment, workhouses, or exile. The earliest places of incarceration were first known as lock-ups or Jails and were under local authoritys control. According to Axia Course Materials (2011) these housing facilities were under the maintenance of each county and state by local officials, such as the local sheriff.
Jails were lock-ups for offenders in which criminal activity for an ffense was pending from small non-threatening infractions, such as loitering to housing other offenders for serious crimes, such as murder. They were also for housing criminals with sentences with less than one year in which misdemeanors were the charges. State or federal authorities managing the prisons, were providing confinement for the offenders with sentences greater than one-year periods (Axia Course Materials, 2011). Prisons, both the state level and federal level, incarcerate convicted offenders, which are serving long-term sentences.
According to Ortmeier 2006) some believe Newgate Prison in Simsbury, Connecticut, in 1773, was the first established prison but most historians continue to cite the Walnut Street Jail in Philadelphia, as the first American established prison. According to Schmalleger (2010) prisons in the United States progressed through nine stages of development; each emphasizing a different correctional philosophy. These stages include: Penitentiary Era (1790-1825). The modeling of 30 prisons after the prison in Auburn, New York, promoting congregate labor, rehabilitation for inmates, and deterrence (Schmalleger, 2010).
Mass Prison Era (1825-1876). Construction of 35 additional prisons with the emphasis on punishment, incapacitation, and deterrence were in this era. This period also includes the opening of New York State’s Sing- Sing Prison in 1825 and California’s San Quentin in 1852. 1niatially the modeling of the Pennsylvania’s Eastern State penitentiary was from the Quaker principles but was converted to the Auburn style during this period (Schmalleger, 2010). Reformatory Era (1876-1890). The first young men’s reformatory opened in Elmira, New York, in 1876, and the first reformatory for women was in Indianapolis, Indiana.
The first women’s prison was established in Ossining, New York (Schmalleger, 2010). Industrial Era (1890-1935). This era includes the inmates working in the prison industries, working on public works, and leased to private businesses. After labor unions were viewing this as unfair competition and pressured Congress to pass the laws in which the interstate shipping of goods produced by prison labor were restricted (Schmalleger, 2010). Punitive Era ( ) During this era the emphasis was on strict punishment, custody, and retribution.
The famous super-secure federal prison n Alcatraz Island in the San Francisco Bay was open in1934 but was closed in the early 1960s and was considered an expensive failure (Schmalleger, 2010). Treatment Era (1945-1967). Poor prison conditions led to rioting and public support was generated for treatment and rehabilitation of the inmates (Schmalleger, 2010). Community -Based Era (1967-1980). This is the era that the community was the source of most offenders’ problems and reintegration of the offenders focused on the use of community resources.
These included probation programs, work release programs, community correction centers, and half-way houses. This community- based approach did not reduce the populations in the prisons or lower the crime rates (Schmalleger, 2010). Warehousing Era (1980-1995). This era was promoting incapacitation rather than rehabilitation, replacing indeterminate sentencing by determinate sentencing, and the discretion of the parole boards were restricted. Overcrowding of the prisons were flourishing and access to the rehabilitation programs was limited (Schmalleger, 2010).
Just-Deserts Era (1995- present). This era focuses on the retribution and punishment of offenders and supports the ware- ousing of the prisoners. There is little concern for rehabilitation and emphasis is on the determinate and mandatory sentencing, three strikes laws, and the death penalty (Schmalleger, 2010). Classification of secure facilities are minimum, medium, maximum, or super maximum and the inmates within the prisons are assigned to the selective facilities depending on his or her level of dangerousness and escape risk.
An institution may have various security levels within the prison and special housing units for the inmates who violate the prisons rules, pose a threat to other inmates, or eed special protection from other inmates (Ortmeier, 2006). Jails are regional, county, or city facilities of confinement in which a custodial supervision of the offenders are detained. According to Axia (2011) Jails would have these things: Sentencings of the offenders generally have been less than one year. Not all detainees are criminals, some detainees may be held for non-punishment reasons, such as protective custody, charges of contempt, or pending arraignment.
Limiting the provision of minimal services and programs to Jail inmates because of the transient nature of the inmates. Home detention or work-release programs may be available or other community-based programs. The detainees in a Jail may include different types of inmates, such as Juveniles, women, men, hardened criminals, sick people or first time offender’s Just needing protection. This ever-changing mixture in jails makes the management a challenge (Axia Course Materials, 2011). Prisons are state or federal facilities that have custodial authority over adults, which have been sentence of confinement.
According to Axia (2011) prisons would have these things: The offenders in prisons are sentenced to at least a year. The time spent in confinement is for punishment for a criminal act. Release of inmates can be only after the required time is served. Programs, such as education, mental health care, and drug abuse treatments are usually available. Community programs, such as work-release programs are not available. Specialization of prisons may depend on the security rating, gender of inmate, and criminal type. Specialized typing would include white-collar criminals, the mentally ill or geriatric inmates Course Materials, 2011).
Statistics show that the numbers of prisoners ncarcerated are increasing each year and with this increase the sentences are also growing longer. With the greater number of inmates in the prison systems the expenses are also increasing for the maintenance within the prisons. This creates housing, safety, budget, and other serious problems. Factors influencing growth in jails, state prisons, and federal prisons may include: The high recidivism rate. The high percentage of release offenders returning to prison for violating supervision. New criminal activities War on Drugs with harsher penalties for certain types of offenses.
The increasing role f the victims and victim advocacy concurring in the court-room and in the parole process (What is Causing Prison Overcrowding, 2013). These factors, which influence the correctional facilities population growth, may also lead the inmates into serving longer portions of his or her sentences in prison and also add into the fusion the aggressive approach of becoming tougher of crime by legislature and the criminal Justice system. This approach allows the system to narrow its use of discretion and take a more conservative approach to punishment of the offender (What is Causing Prison Overcrowding, 2013).
Royal Bodies college essay help service: college essay help service
Evidence from history proves that the Ancient Greek civilization was obsessed with Idols. From their superhuman strength to their unparallel beauty, mere mortals have gravitated towards images greater than they are. This holds as much truth today as it did four thousand years ago. In todays culture, instead of praying to false Idols, we are obsessed with the idea of celebrity due to the impact that the media holds. The media, to be specific is obsessed with celebrity and vice versa; due to the power that each holds.
When a magazine puts someone famous on its cover, people are more nticed to buy it. Hilary Mantel dares to make the rather obvious point that the royal body is public property. She describes the Duchess as “becoming a Jointed doll on which certain rags are hung… , a shop-window mannequin, with no personality of her own. ” Mantel states that it is important that the Duchess of Cambridge is young, pretty and now demonstrably fertile.
She contrasts Kate’s all-important reliability to the tragically unstable egos of Marie Antoinette and Diana, Princess of Wales, writing that the Duchess “seems to have been selected for her role of princess because she was rreproachable: as painfully thin as anyone could wish, without quirks, without oddities, without the risk of the emergence of character. ” Living in a technological era, we have access to the tabloids more than ever before. There are television sets, magazine covers, Internet blogs, and movies screaming to be read and watched, and they are plastered with images of these tacky celebrities.
Now, in an age where we have more contact with celebrity gossip than we have ever had, we are faced with a question: what are the effects that superstars have on our youth? Celebrities influence fans to be destructively thin, put harmful substances in heir bodies, and many parents are concerned with the overall content these celebrities are putting on television, in movies, and over the Internet. Pop culture idols need to think twice before making a poor decision or practicing awful morals because of their influence on their young fans and other people who may look up to them.
Even reality television plays a factor into the media’s obsession with celebrity. MTV has a show called “l Want a Famous Face” which highlights ordinary people who undergo several thousands of dollars worth of plastic surgery to achieve a look of a celebrity that they admire. We as a society are intrigued with lives far greater than our own. We look up to these undependable Idols to motivate us. Their beauty and status gives people something to strive for and imagine being a part of. The media as a whole feeds this obsession and is showing no sign of stopping anytime soon.
Their effect is especially evident in their appearance and attitudes. With celebrities creating impossible standards of beauty, more and more young adults are feeling ‘less confident, more angry, and more dissatisfied’ with their looks (National Institute on Media and the Family). Now, this cannot all be blamed on the media, but with celebrities becoming thinner and thinner, much selt-contldence is lost and images ot television stars or models have been connected to body displeasure (National Institute on Media and the Family).
With television shows today including sexual content, violence, and adult language, children are exposed to unsuitable matter for their ages. Since many parents work and are not always at home, kids have access to shows, movies, and the internet blogs that can tell them things that should be left for parents to explain. Stars need to be more aware of their images because some are llowing younger fans content that many parents do not want their child seeing. Celebrities have glamorized smoking in the media and are setting an example for supporters everywhere that it is acceptable to smoke.
Pop culture icons need to support a drug free program instead of using harmful substances. In the past, people learned how to live through religion and fear. Now, with fewer and fewer people attending Church, celebrity culture fulfills a certain spiritual value that is otherwise lost. Mantel said Kate had gone from being a ‘Jointed doll on which certain rags are hung to a woman whose ‘only point and purpose’ was to give birth. She continued to say Kate ‘appeared to have been designed by a committee and built by craftsmen, with a perfect plastic smile and the spindles of her limbs hand-turned and gloss-varnished’.
What bothers me is that someone can Judge the duchess from the outside with never having experience within the Royal family or even being a celebrity. Hearing these things about the Royal family is like a chapter out of the bible for how to live like a royal. People get so obsessed with hearing trash talk about people who ” live better lives” than themselves. In the media’s rush to take snippets ut of context and highlight the piece as royal-bashing the Duchess of Cambridge, they are completely missing the speculative insight of a royal’s physicality.
In the face of both royalty and celebrity, we are all too quick to forego one’s humanity. Celebrities need to change the way they act and how they are viewed. Their actions have more of an effect on us then many people believe they have. Thin, addicted celebrities are changing the way many young fans think and act. Celebrities need to change these horrible habits now and realize that they need to be more concerned with themselves and with their portrayal in the media.
Comparative analysis of two international companies college essay help near me: college essay help near me
Comparative Analysis of Two International Companies Trident University International Accounting for Decision Making – ACC501 April 22, 2013 Caribou Coffee Company, Inc. is a leading coffee company in the United States that boasts the second largest premium coffee operation in the U. S. (“Caribou,” n. d. ). The Frazer Group is an international food services company, based in Finland, that seeks to grow with an optimistic view on it’s already firm grasp on the food service industry (“Frazer,” n. d. ). This paper will discuss the accounting standards, external auditing tandards, and annual reports of the Caribou Company and Frazier Group.
A brief comparative analysis will be conducted between select data from the financial statements of these two companies, including profitability and financial position. Accounting Standards. For Caribou Coffee, Financial Accounting (FASB) standards, Generally Accepted Accounting Standards (GAAP), are used for financial reporting. Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (PCAOB) standards are employed for internal auditing measures, which is required by the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) for all ublicly traded companies.
Caribou Coffee uses some non-GAAP measures, such as Earnings Before Interest, Taxes, Depreciation, and Amortization (EBITDA), as a management and investment tool for comparing the company’s profitability against other companies in the premium coffee industry (“Caribou,” n. d. ). The Frazer Group adheres to the accounting standards required by Finland and the Finnish Accounting Board’s (FAB) guidelines (“Frazer,” n. d. ). Interestingly, as a member of the European Union (ELI), Finnish companies adopt most of the standards set forth by the
International Accounting Standards Board (IASB). The EIJ reviews and adopts nearly all International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS), but because of the length of time required for the review, there is always a lag from the date and IFRS is published to the date when the ELI, including Finland, accepts the standard (“IFRS,” 2013). Auditing. According to the Caribou Cottee Company, Inc. Annual Report tor the year ending January 2, 2012, and external audit, conducted by Ernst and Young, LLC. , used PCAOB standards when evaluating the financial reports presented by the company.
Ernst and Young, LLC. reported that there were not irregularities in Caribou Coffee’s financial reports according to these standards (“Caribou,” n. d. ). The Frazer Group does not specify standards for external auditing, nor does it cite external audit results in its annual report. It does, however, state that the Chartered Accountants, Pricewaterhouse-coopers Oy (PwC) had been chosen as auditors for the company (“Frazer,” n. d. ). According to PW’C, IFRS is employed when conducting external audits for Finnish Companies (“PwC,” 2013). Differences in Annual Reports.
The annual report provided by the Caribou Coffee Company, Inc. is an SEC Form 10-K. The statement is very structured, professional, and lacks superfluous graphics or commentary. The financial statements contained in the report are presented well and are easy to follow. The Caribou Coffee Company clearly explains a wide variety of risk factors to their business operations, which could cause a negative impact tot eh company’s profitability. The outlook is presented as a realistic, if not pessimistic, view of the potential for future growth in the premium coffee industry (“Caribou,” n. ). The Frazer Group’s annual report, unlike an SEC form, contains many graphics and visual representations of the company’s performance in a newsletter-type format. The report includes detailed financial statements as well as reports on new products and future projects designed to continue the company’s relevance in the market place and future success. In contrast to the Caribou Coffee annual report, the Frazer Group concentrates on the company’s past performance and current operations with an optimistic vision for continued success . (“Frazer,” n. d. ).
When comparing the two annual reports, the differences in formatting and commentary are apparent. The financial statements, however, are very similar in content. Many terms used in the reports vary, but the principle use of the data remains constant. Profitability. Which of these two companies is more profitable? Examining select data from the two sets of financial statements, and calculating simple ratios and percentages can easily answer that question (Table 1). Using the net profit on sales, one can determine how much profit results from the amount of revenue the company enerates from sales.
This is expressed as a percentage, and a higher number means less operating expenses. The current liquidity ratio determines a company’s ability to meet near term financial obligations. Again, a higher number is better for the company and represents the company’s financial position in near term operations. A debt to equity ratio measures the amount of debt a company owes in relation to the amount of total equity in the company. Any fgure below 1. 00 is good, and a lower number is better for the company’s overall health (Principles of Accounting, n. ). After comparing the financial data of these two companies, Caribou Coffee seems to be more profitable. Caribou Coffee’s net profit on sales grew from 3. 3% to 9. 9% from 2011 to 2012. Frazer’s net profit on sales grew as well, but only from 1. 4% to 2. 1%. This also illustrates Caribou’s growth of revenues versus income over time as having a greater effect on the company’s bottom line (Table 1). The difference in profitability is not easily explained by simply examining the annual reports separately.
Caribou may simply have a more effective method to restrain perating costs, but the most obvious tgures indicate that Caribou’s tax strategy is superior to that of Frazer’s and the current tax structure in the United States may be more friendly to businesses than in Finland. EBIT or EBITDA may show that Frazer’s profitability would be much higher in a different tax structure, but the difference in profitability between the two companies would still tile in Caribou Coffee’s favor. Conclusion. This paper discussed the accounting standards, external auditing standards, and annual reports of the Caribou Company and Frazier Group.
A brief comparative analysis was conducted between select data from the financial statements of these two companies, including profitability and financial position. Even though the revenue generated by the sales of the Frazer Group was much more than that of Caribou Coffee, the net profits, particularly in 2012, were very similar. The ratios and percentages presented in the financial statement analysis proved that Caribou Coffee has greater profitability and financial position than the Frazer Group. References Audit and assurance services. (2013).
Michael Graves admission college essay help: admission college essay help
Art Appreciation Michael Graves Michael Graves is a post-modern architect born in Indianapolis, Indiana on July 9th 1934. He graduated from Broad Ripple High School; he then attended and got his bachelor degree at the University of Cincinnati. After getting his bachelors, he went to Harvard where he got his masters in Interior design. After college he started career as an architect, it was in 1968 when he designed and built the Hanselmann House in Fort Wayne, Indiana. He built houses for about 10 years until he started building all kinds of buildings. He built anything from the Dolphin Resort at Disney world from the Denver Public Library.
Graves has been designing buildings of all types since 1968 very rapidly, some years designing four or more buildings a year. One of Graves’s most famous buildings is the Portland building in Oregon. This building was made in 1980 and is unique because of how he surprised everyone with the exterior design. He used a pair of classical columns that have no structural function. He made these columns stand out by setting them in a reflecting pool. The Portland public says the building is both formal and playful, governor Ivancie says that most big city building were beginning to be built to simple with Just glass outsides.
He says the Portland building doesn’t lack design features like other big city buildings. Some did criticize the design but most were thrilled by the uniqueness of the new building. People say there is type of humor to his designs and buildings. “Graves has become an opponent of modern works who uses humor as an integral part of his architecture” (1). Graves uses designs from the past and puts his own twist on them. “Graves re-interpreted the rational style that had been introduced by Le Corbusier in the 1920s into a neoclassical style” (1). Michael Graves has many building that are very famous, but his design on the
Humana Building in Louisville, Kentucky is maybe his best design he’s had. His design on this building got him in the time magazine. “TIME Magazine listed it as one of the 10 best buildings of the decade” (2). The building looks different from every side. Many say it is one of the most unique and distinctive skyscrapers in America. Critics say it is a textbook example of Postmodernism. Grave’s Humana building is said to have its fair share of flaws but the brilliant design more than counteracts the flaws. “While the building has undeniable flaws, they are easily outweighed by its attributes, hich have only grown stronger with time”(3).
Malthus essy college essay help online free: college essay help online free
The Malthus Essay Was Malthus correct in his prediction? In 1798, British economist Malthus predicted that the population growth is going to increase geometrically while the food production is going to increase arithmetically. l As a result, there won’t be enough food to feed the massive population and at the end, people will die out because of the starvation. l Therefore, he said that we have to restraint the population growth. I think Malthus predicted this way since human has a strong sexual desire that they can’t restraint the population growth. However for the food, there is a limited land and technology to produce them.
Many people were afraid of the Malthus’s prediction. However, the destruction that Malthus predicted hasn’t come true. The prediction was wrong because the data he gathered about the population gr owtn was overrated. H idn’t distinguish t immigrants. He Just subtracted the death rate to the birth rate. Also, when he published the population theory, it was during the industrial revolution. 2 The world was completely different between before the industrial revolution and after the industrial revolution. For example during the 18th century in Britain, as the maternal and infant mortality decreased, the population grew rapidly.
Also, because of the spinning and weaving machinery through the steam engine, unskilled laborers could work as well. Which made, industrialized cities require a lot of workers, and made the massive population to be focused on industrialized cities. As a result, before the 17th century, 80 percent of the population was working with the agriculture, but in 1840, only 25 percent of the population was working with agriculture. People might think that we avoided Malthus’s prediction because of the big increase in agricultural productivity during the mid 1700 to mid 1800. The agricultural productivity increased twice more.
However, the population grew 3 times more. Of course, if the world population grew rapidly like Britain at the same time, there might have been a destruction that Malthus predicted. However, the only country where the population grew rapidly was only Britain and U. S. Also, because of the founding of the fixation of atmospheric nitrogen by Fritz Haber, a revolution called chemical fertilizer could occur. 5 After, there has been a huge increase in agricultural productivity. As a result, the destruction isn’t coming. However, there are some parts of the world where there are many people dying out f starvation.
For example in some parts of Africa, due to the weather conditions they are having trouble with growing crops. Having trouble with growing crops leads to lack of resources. Even worse, the population growth in these poor countries is growing. Since they have not enough food for the massive population, people are dying of starvation. Therefore, we can’t say that the Malthus’s prediction was 100 percent wrong since there are some parts of the world where the Malthus’s prediction was correct. By looking at the graph, I can see that the food production and the population are both growing.
For the food production rate, the graph is same as the Malthus’s prediction but the population growth rate is different. As I see, population is going to grow because ot the low death rate. Nowadays, people live very long due to the technological development. The health caring system is getting developed rapidly as we can see on the graph below. 5 Malthus’s prediction was wrong, but I can’t say that it was completely wrong since there are some parts of the world where his prediction was right. Also, the world now has a massive increase in population and the food production is growing as well but e don’t know when resources will run out.
Is Still Deviant online essay help: online essay help
Sexuality freedom is the new civil rights we are fighting for this decade. The practice of BDSM has become a hot topic in our society lately since the book Fifty Shades of Grey went public in 2011. BDSM is an acronym for bondage/discipline, dominance/ submission, and sadism [masochism. The term BDSM is defined as a variety of erotic practices involving power play. Now because this term does not cover everyone in the kink community, known as an umbrella term, people are now starting to use the term WIIWD, which stands for “What it is we do”.
I will be using symbolic interaction theory to describe why BDSM is not deviant in our society today. Our society is always flowing and changing with the environment around us. We have fraught for rights of Jew, blacks, women, animals, Hispanics and many more but this decade we are on to a new type of rights. The right to be free sexually is such a different fght because it is now a private issue that we feel the need to control and label deviant. BDSM can be misunderstood if someone is naive to what actually happens behind the scenes of BDSM community.
So for a simple run down of the basics. The main thing needed in a BDSM relationship is trust, without it the role play will not work. Everything is consensual and hard and soft limits are set up before any thing remotely dangerous. Now of course Just like in the vanilla community there are deviants that do not abide by the rules set in place for our protection. Yes people have gotton hurt during the more dangerous scenes but this is from not following the roles and not trusting your partner..
But this does not mean that Kinksters are all the same. Misinformed people like Melissa Farley, a known anti-kink [porn clinical psychologist who believes that no woman actually willingly participants in kink or porn. She says ” “In this economy, this is something women would rather not do, but they feel they have to,” she said. “This is a form of economic coercion. But people would rather not think of it that way. People think of it as a matter of rights, rather than ask the question, ‘Should people have a right not to do this? ” (Smith,2009). Even though alternative sex has only recently been in the limelight, this does not ean that it has not been practiced quietly. There is evidence of alternative sex dating back to the medieval times but estimated to date back much further. In the eighteenth century there were reports ofa french philosopher named ,Marquis de Sade who was imprisoned for thirty-two years for his violent erotic writings. That is where the term sadism came from. (Weiss,2013).
Thirty-two years in prison because of the way he liked to spend his private time and what he wrote down. But thanks to our modern day of freedom to write what we want, society now has books that come ut like Fifty Shades of Grey. Since the 18th century we have gone back and forth about how we express our sexuality. Twenty-five years ago there was a study in Canada in which they tried to tie alternative sexto people in need of psychiatric help by using 12 participants in a person perception task. Their studies found that there was a correlation(Tilby, P. J. , & Kahn ).
But Just earlier this year The huffpost covered a story on a study of over a thousand participants about the mental health ot the BDSM community Their results were that people that ngaged in alternative sex were actually healthier and more comfortable with themselves than vanilla people. There are countless more studies Just like this over the last few decades, the results always reflect the attitudes towards expressing sexuality in society at the time of the study. Today, people are not frequently Jailed or housed in mental hospitals For their private views.
Unless their actual practices break local laws by violating anothers informed consent or causing harm to the point of death, sexual practices are mostly left to the realm of live-and-let-live. The US is till a recently religiously, and therefore sexually puritanical society, But the fact that our generations motto is “l can do whatever I want”, plus the large community of BDSM lets me believe that the world of vanilla people are actually the deviant ones in our society today. Almost all human behavior has symbolic value to it, including sexual behavior.
Biologically , we are driven to reproduce, but this does not dictate who, when, where, what and how by which we choose to do so;(Arany, 2013) social interaction is the driving force behind this. These characteristics are then etermined by what we have learned through our culture. BDSM community might stem from mutual sexual fantasies but really its our first non-exclusionary group. When outside the bedroom most of these kinksers would blend in with the rest of society. emphasizes that although reality is constructed by our social interactions, our perceived reality, including those of a sexual nature are not the same for everyone.
It is critical that a situation is defined by the establishment of relevant identities of those involved in the interaction. It is this construction that involves egotiation and role–taking as well as role-making behaviors. This is where Goffman’s research style and staging details come into play, showing how the presentations of self are manifested deep in our everyday lives. One could view the discreet sexual practices of homosexuality as one of these staging details by which individuals avoid injuring their “identity’- the way they perceive themselves as being viewed by others.
As a result of differences in how individuals are exposed to sexual culture, multiple connotations are associated with sexual terms, which vary by ender, social class, and other social characteristics. These connotations often come into play in how an individual presents themselves. Symbolic Interactionism, broadly, is the way individuals influence social meanings through their interactions with others. In analyzing a plethora of ideologies presented by popular scholars, we can ascertain that the perspective symbolic interactionism brings to the table, is one that allows us to understand ourselves much more intensely than we otherwise might.
Furthermore, this insight also allows us to derive an accurate impression of how our ehavior both influences and is influenced by those around us. According to Sandstrom, Martin, and Fine, “interactionism helps you remember that your choices and actions are not strictly dictated by cultural expectations or the reactions of others (p. 14). ” I could go on to discuss how much I agree with this, however, it would not teach you a thing. Instead, I would prefer to discuss social interaction’s influence upon sexuality. You may be saying to yourself, “But that was not the question, it asked how it is relevant to you.
As a homosapien, the characteristics that make me human, do not relive me from the fact that as such, I still have primitive motives. Therefore, I insist that sexuality is very important to all of us thus worth further investigation. All human behavior nas a ce rtain symbolic value to it, sexual behavior being not different. Human sexual behavior has several components of which activities have many different meanings. Each of these meanings has a profound impact upon the way we feel about ourselves, and how others feel about us.
Biologically, we are driven o reproduce, however it does not dictate who, what, when, where, and how by which we choose to do so; social interaction is the driving force behind that. These characteristics are thus determined by what we have learned from our culture. In respect to sex research, Blumer’s symbolic interactionist ideologies have become dominant. His approach emphasizes that although reality is constructed by our social interactions, our perceived reality, including those of a sexual nature are not the same for everyone.
It is critical that a situation is defined by the establishment of elevant identities of those involved in the interaction. It is this construction that involves negotiation and role–taking as well as role-making behaviors. This is where into play in how an individual presents themselves. ln conclusion, symbolic interactionism has made an incredible influence on human behavior, even the often underscored realm of human sexuality, as I have discussed. It has enhanced research in human sexuality by way of its adequacy in terms of predictability and parsimony in addition to the fact that it is generally devoid of moral Judgments.
Although our behavior is guided by social influence, the text reinforces the fact that “our choices and actions are not strictly dictated by cultural expectations or the reactions of others (p. 14). “We are all affected by sexuality and by the way others present themselves, the way we present ourselves and how the reactions of both feed upon the other. We are dependent upon these things. The symbolic interactionist viewpoint has further enhanced my understanding and how I perceive those around me, as well as how I perceive myself. That is how it is relevant to me.
Hiduism vs Budhism essay help online free: essay help online free
Vedic Hinduism Mahayana Buddhism Religion has been the driving force behind society throughout history. It is human beings best and worst creation. It is these beliefs that has provided us with peace and brought about war. Religion has provided people something higher to answer too when they lay there heads down at the end of a long day and question their purpose. To understand the similarities and differences between religions provides us a greater understanding of the people that follow them.
To understand these characteristics helps us as a western culture educate ourselves objectively away from ur Christian dominated culture and understand the world that surrounds us. Gandhi helped India gain its independence from British rule in 1947 as a practicing Hindu. The Dalai Lama continues to be one of our generation’s greatest leaders as a practicing Buddhist. These two religions share many similar beliefs but also differ in equally as many ways The Vedic Tradition or Hinduism is more than a religion, but a way of life, it is a complete philosophy and it’s based on universal spiritual truths which can be applied to anyone at anytime.
Vedic Hinduism is also called Sanatana- Dharma, the eternal nature of the soul. It does not limit itself to any one philosophy and it includes various schools of thought and ways of understanding spiritual truths. The Vedic tradition recognizes that the individual soul is eternal, beyond the limitations of the body, and that one soul is no different than another. The soul undergoes its own karma, the law of cause and effect, by which each person creates his own destiny based on his thought, words and deeds. The soul undergoes this karma in the rounds of reincarnation.
The soul incarnates through different forms (called samsara or reincarnation) until it reaches liberation (moksha) from the epetition of birth and death. No one individual founded Vedic culture, and there is no single prophet, holy book or way of worship. The Vedic culture has a collection of four texts know as The Vedas, the earliest sacred books of Hinduism, to help explain the nature of these truths and the reasons for the traditions. The Vedas, which originally were preserved only in oral form but were eventually written down.
The name Veda means “knowledge” or “sacred lore,” which translated means vision and knowledge. (Molloy) The four collections of the Vedas are The Rig Veda, The Yajur Veda, the Sama Veda, and the Artharva Veda. Ascetic traditions also play a huge role in Vedic Hinduism. The English term asceticism derives from the Greek askesis, originally meaning “to train” or “to exercise,” specifically in the sense ot the training and self-denial that an athlete undergoes to attain physical skill and mastery over the body.
The Stoics adapted the word to refer to the moral discipline of the sage who learns, through self-mastery, how to act freely”how to choose or refuse a desired object or an act of physical pleasure at will and how to control the emotions with eason. While asceticism is a feature of virtually every religion, it plays an especially prominent role in Indian religions such as Hinduism. (http://science. ]rank. org/pages/ 7504/Asceticism-Hindu-Buddhist-Asceticism. html) Another system connected to Vedic Hinduism is the caste system which is a division in society based on occupation and family lineage.
There are four distinct divisions based on certain criteria; The Brahmins, who were the priestly class and were considered the middle men between Gods and men, the Kshatriyas, who were the warriors and were by tradition ommanded to protect the people, the Vaishyas, who were considered the merchants and peasant class, and the Shudras, who were the laborers, and their duty was to serve the other three castes. The lowest of the caste system was the Chandalas also know as the Untouchables. (V) Mahayana Buddhism, also known as the Great Vehicle, is the form of Buddhism prominent in North Asia.
Arising out of divisions”about both doctrine and monastic rules”within Indian Buddhism in the first century C. E. , the Great Vehicle considers itself a more authentic version of the Buddha’s teachings. Instead of regarding Buddha as a divine being, the Mahayana believes that Buddha was a manifestation of a divine being. They believe that Buddha takes on three entities: essence, godlike form, and body. Essence is the collection of his spiritual qualities that make him Buddha. In his godlike form, he is seen meditating and revealing himself to his people.
In his body form, he is shown as a mortal that walked the earth like his believers. They believe that the Tipitaka is an important resource, but they also use other sutras, or written records of Buddha’s experiences, as forms f teachings to live by. (Oracle; Think Quest) The Mahayana doctrine of the Trikaya says that each Buddha has three bodies. These are called the dharmakaya, sambogakaya and nirmanakaya. Very simply, dharmakaya is the body of absolute truth, sambogakaya is the body that experiences the bliss of enlightenment, and nirmanakaya is the body that manifests in the world.
Another way to understand the Trikaya is to think of the dharmakaya as the absolute nature of all beings, sambogakaya as the blissful experience of enlightenment, and nirmanakaya as the embodiment of dharmakaya in human form. Barbara O’Brien) Mahayana emphasizes that nirvana can be reached not only by monks, but it can be reached by anyone including women. The most distinctive teaching of the Mahayana is that of the great compassion that is an inherent component of enlightenment is manifest in bodhisattvas or enlightenment beings.
These beings postpone nirvana or final enlightenment in order to assist and guide those beings still suffering in the cycle of rebirths. The amazing amount of tolerance of Mahayana Buddhism is in consonance with its metaphysical views. It is asserted that all religions are revelation of the same Dharmakaya and bring out some aspects of truth. [Footnote: Radhakrishnan, op. cit. , p. 597. ] Dharma is the all-pervading spiritual force, the ultimate and the supreme principle of life. It is interesting to note that there is an attempt to personify dharma in the conception of Buddha.
He is considered the first cause, the eternal God, superior to all things the supreme and first ot all Buddha’s. He is the devatideva, the paramount God of gods. He is the creator of all bodhisattvas. All beings are his children. “The tathagata, having left the conflagration of the three worlds, is dwelling n peace in the tranquility of his forest abode, saying to himself all three worlds are my possession, all living beings are my children, the world is full of intense tribulation, but I myself will work out their salvation. “To all who believe me I do good, while friends are they to me who seek refuge in me. “[Footnote: Quoted in Radakrishnan, op. cit. , p. 600. ] However there is more than one Buddha. There are a number of Buddha’s endowed with the highest intelligence and love. They too are working constantly to save the world. There have been an infinite number of these Buddha’s in the past, and there will be an infinite number in the future. All of these Buddha’s are transitory manifestations of the one eternal being. “The Chief Characteristics and Doctrines of Mahayana Buddhism”) Bodhisattva vow: However innumerable the sentient beings, I vow to save them all. However inexhaustible the passions (klesas), I vow to extinguish them all. However immeasurable the dharmas, I vow to master them all. However incomparable the truth of the Buddha, I vow to attain it. (Major Characteristics of Mahayana Buddhism) Hinduism and Buddhism share equal similarities as well as differences because both nfluenced the Indian culture but Buddhism came much later than Hinduism.
Both Hinduism and Buddhism practice the belief of reincarnation after death. Buddhism believes in the process of reincarnation based on deeds of the present life. Hinduism also believes that everyone is a part of an impersonal world and therefore, one’s soul reincarnates into another body of any being, based on the deeds of the present life. These religions are both cyclic and do not believe in a beginning or an end. In Buddhism one has to work for salvation oneself and therefore, cannot blame others or the same. The salvation depends on the good deeds of a person.
In Hinduism also, one attains salvation as per one’s own fate and deeds. Buddhism and Hinduism both believe that there are many paths to attain enlightenment such as overcoming through your feelings and desires and controlling over the six conscious senses. Many of these core beliefs are so similar because Buddhism came from a Hindu influenced environment. Both believe that excessive attachment to things and people in the physical world causes pain and suffering. Therefore, we must free ourselves rom the illusions of ‘Maya’ or worldly desires.
Both of them give an emphasis on the practice of meditation and other forms of yoga, which not only helps one to concentrate on the truth of life, but also facilitates the path of enlightenment and liberation. As similar as these two religions are they are also equally different. One of the major differences between these Hinduism and Buddhism is the practice of the caste system. While Hinduism is based on this practice, Buddhism is not. There are four major practices of Buddhism and none follow this belief. Buddhism placed equality on all people.
On the contrary, there are a number of castes and sub-castes in Hinduism, and the Hindus follow them rigidly. These beliefs lead to why Buddhism does not believe in the stages of life. People can Join any of the stages any time depending upon their spiritual preparedness. The Hindus believe in the four stages ot lite, also known as the ‘ashrams’ – Branamacnarya Ashram or Student lite, Grihastha Ashram or family life, Vanprastha Ashram or the age at which a person leaves all the worldly desire and home, and Sanyasa Ashram – when a person meditates and awaits for the ultimate truth, death.
Asceticism is the doctrine that through renunciation of worldly pleasures it is possible to achieve a high spiritual or intellectual state. As the middle way, Buddhism rejects extreme asceticism as well as great wealth. Most of the Hindus believe in extreme asceticism, which leads to the importance of the caste system and how no one steps out their caste, unless blessed in the next life. These two religions are very similar in their core beliefs but the major differences come out in their practices of these beliefs.
Migration essay help free: essay help free
Migration BY dennts2405 . Reasons of Migration It would never be an easy decision for a person to leave his country of birth and look for his fortune elsewhere. There are a number of reasons why migrants leave their countries.
These so-called push factors exist in the poorer or conflict-weary regions of the world and some of them are defined as: dissolution and disintegration of multicultural states, accompanied by religious and ethnic conflicts; increase in natural disasters, the progressive destruction of major ecosystems and the associated global warming as a result of the industrial economic system environmental refugees); discrimination on various grounds; political instability and wars, continuing armed conflicts (including civil wars); economic situation; uncontrollable population growth; vast differences in population and economic growth; impoverishment, as a result of failing social welfare systems (EUROPOL, 2004).
In turn, there are accompanying pull factors that make some countries target for migrants: shortage of manpower; comprehensive social security; positive economic situation; democratic systems of government, political and social stability; historical links; Ђ common languages; existing communities; expectations (EUROPOL, 2004). There are a number of reasons of migration. For instance Castles defines migration taking place due to environmental degradation and explores links between environment, conflict and displacement (Castles, 2002). However when the push factors are examined, it can be seen that they can be grouped crudely under two categories, that are, political and economic reasons of migration. Reasons of migration have come to. This distinction came to clarify various categories of migrants and responsibilities of the host states towards these migrants.
When it comes to economic migrants, it can be argued that the individual host states have had a higher leverage in the face of international community in terms of deciding when and to what extend open their borders to economic migrants. The guest worker program that was adopted by some West European states in the 1960s and the 1970s are a good indication of this. When the guest worker program served its purposes, host states could terminate the program single handedly. On the other hand, in the case of migrants fleeing their countries for political reasons an international onsensus emerged that constrained state actions. Migration is a global phenomenon.
It is seen in all geographies, among all societies and throughout all ages. Throughout history, people migrated from one place to another for various reasons: either for economical reasons (famine, floods, merchandising, etc. ), political reasons (wars, conquers, deportations, etc. ) and other reasons (diseases, ecological changes, earthquakes, etc. ) Thus, it can be argued that people have many motivations to migrate. However, when we talk about immigration it is much more of a complex issue. Immigration is related to borders, border ontrols, political sovereignty over people’s movements. Immigration occurs when people migrates from one country to another. This migration is not always voluntary.
Sometimes, people feel the need to immigrate or cannot return to their homelands due to reasons imposed on them. Millions of people are forced to leave their home countries because of persecutions and fear of persecution which is caused by wars, armed conflicts, regime changes and etc. Those people seek asylum for a better life in other countries. The European Union, which sets a model and standards for many countries on their ay to democratic development, is also an important model for the development of asylum and immigration policies. The Union is trying to create a common asylum and immigration policy area for the whole member states to adopt and apply for the sake of security.
However, the issue is related to border control and territorial sovereignty and therefore, member states are unwilling to share their area of sovereignty and powers with the other entities. Thus, it might be assumed that the Union is engaged in a difficult task. In this perspective, Turkey, being a candidate country for the EIJ membership, is seen as an important ally for the Union. Turkey’s borders with the Middle Eastern countries and the Union constitute important problems for the Union. There are expectations from Turkey for cooperation in the field of asylum and immigration. It is really important for Turkey to adopt and apply the Acquis.
Since Turkey does not have special regulations for the asylum seekers in its legal documents and laws, adopting and applying the Acquis is highly critical and necessary for Turkey. However, there are also certain risks Turkey faces while taking steps mentioned in the progress reports. For example, Turkey’s geographical imitations for accepting refugees in accordance with the 1951 Convention is highly criticized by the Union but Turkey’s concerns are also important stakes at that point. The aim of this study is to get a clear vision on the European Union’s political agenda for a common asylum and immigration policy and the Europeanization of Turkey in that field.
The issue of asylum and immigration is closely linked to territorial security and border controls and the neighboring countries or the member states whose borders coincide with the Union’s external borders are in a position of deeper responsibility and higher risk of immigration flows. Since Turkey is a candidate country and is expected to have borders with the non-EU states of the Middle East, Turkey will also have higher responsibility and greater risk of dealing with the immigration flows, when she Joins the Union. The word immigration comes from the word migration. Migration means “to move from one place to another”. The term is mostly defined in terms of movement of animals, however since the thesis is dealing with human migration, the definition used here focuses on human migration.
With a focus on humans, migration is defined as “the movement of persons from one country or locality to another”2. However, this definition does not conceptualize the term sufficiently. Migration is linked to movement and space. The change of localities the key factor. This locality change can be cross borders or within a country. Migration can be defined by the orientation of the movement; if one leaves his/her country, then it is called emigration from somewhere and if one moves to a country then it is called immigration to somewhere3 . People who immigrate are then called immigrants. Types and reasons for immigration are different from each other.
People might have different reasons, different intentions to immigrate. Reasons of immigration might differ. Economic, ecological, political, social reasons can be listed as the important ones. In other words, people might immigrate for various reasons, but the important aspect is that people tend to migrate and migration is the point of human dynamism; without dynamism societies, social groups die. Thus, immigration provides a kind of dynamism that is necessary for the human societies to develop6 . Also this dynamism can be by force; deportations, relocations are also types of immigration. The necessity this time, is imposed on people through fear, difficulties, political reasons and/or violence .
Reasons of immigration can be seen as push factors. If political, economic and social conditions of the country of origin lead persons to consider immigration then these conditions become the push factors. However, the political, economic and social conditions are the pull factors; these factors usually tend to differ from country to country and can be seen as reasons to choose a country over another. 1. 2. Trends in Migration to Europe and Basic Definitions Early twentieth century witnessed a number of large-scale conflicts such as the Balkan wars (1912-1913), world war I (1914-1918) and the Russian Revolution (1917), hich produced massive human movements.
According to Lavenex, these movements signified that national borders could not be closed indefinitely and some sort of legal status had to be given to these persons in order to allow them to move, stay or return to their homes, legally (1999: 5). However, during the World War II borders of West European states were closed to a great numbers of Jews fleeing Nazi persecution (Gibney, 2005: 2). After the end of the War, the most formidable border of all times that is, the Iron Curtain was erected. The Iron Curtain represented two ifferent political systems that perceived each other in ethical terms as good or evil. With memories of Jewish extermination still alive, West European states felt obliged to accept people fleeing political persecution in the Soviet block.
In the aftermath of World War II as the allied powers were putting in the foundations ot a new international world order wit e n te Nations ( N) at its core, differences between the two sides of the Curtain came to dominate discussions on virtually every topic. The UN recognized the international scope and nature of the refugee problem and led to the creation of an International Refugee Organization IRO) in 1946 (Lavenex, 1999: 7). During the drafting of IRO charter controversies were centered on definition of a refugee and repatriation. The Eastern block opposed the ideas that refusal of a refugee and fear of persecution at home country would be accepted as valid causes for prevention of repatriation (Lavenex, 1999: 7) . With termination of the IRO’s mandate, UN General Assembly decided to establish the Office of the United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees (UNHCR) in 1949.
Since its inception, the UNHCR has been the main venue for conducting international discussions and policy making on migration issue. Migration indroduction The increased movement of people all over the world and migration are inevitable results of globalization. Migration, as the human face of globalization, has immense impacts on the demography, culture, economy, and politics of the states. People are leaving their countries of origin and migrating to others for various reasons and no country can isolate itself from the challenges posed by the migration phenomenon. Today, 196 countries around the world have been affected either that way or another from migration issues, as immigration (destination), emigration or transit country.
Molar Mass Determination by Depression compare and contrast essay help: compare and contrast essay help
The most commonly used liquid is water. In this experiment we study the equilibria that can exist between pure water and an aqueous solution, and ice, the solid form of water. The heat will transfer from a higher temperature toa lower temperature. In order for water to change states of matter, it takes a certain amount of kinetic energy or heat. The shift from ice to water (solid to a liquid) is called the heat of fusion.
The shift from water to ice is called the freezing point of water, which the standard is usually OOC. This is the point in which water and ice are at equilibrium. The freezing point Tf0, the vapor pressure of water and ice must be equal. If you add a soluble liquid or solid to the equilibrium mixture, the temperature of the ice and the solution will fall until it reaches equilibrium. The vapor pressure of water at OOC is less than that of a pure liquid. The temperature of the new solution will change the in which it reaches equilibrium or the new freezing point Tf. The new reezing point will be below the freezing point of the pure liquid.
ATf is called the freezing point depression, which is the change in freezing point. Tflnal – Tinitial = ATf . The freezing point depression is one of the colligative properties of a solution. Colligative properties include boiling point elevation, osmotic pressure, and vapor pressure lowering. When considering colligative properties it is easier to work on Molality. Molality is the solute concentration. Molality of A = no. of moles A dissolved/ no. of kg solvent in solution The boiling point elevation, Tb – kbm = ATb , and the freezing point epression Tf – kfm = ATf , uses the concentration.
Kb and Kf are characteristics of the solvent used. They use these characteristics to find the molar mass of an unknown substance. Finding an unknown, finding two different concentrations, then with the molar mass we can associate if the solution is ionic. The ratio of the true molar mass to the value you find is equal toa quantity. If the molar mass is less than an actual value you have a ionic compound. Hoff factor is the apparent percentage dissociation. Procedure: 1. Determine the freezing point of pure water. 2. Water-ice mixture you need to add a known amount of one of you unknowns 3.
Estimate the mass of your liquid to add to the mixture. 4. Measure water ice solution 5. Add solid to a water-ice mixture 6. Record mass 7. Make second molar mass measurement for you liquid unknown 8. Determine molar mass 9. Figure out % dissociation A. Freezing point (oc) pure liquid (H20) 0. 0 B. Object : Mass: (grams) Styrofoam cup 1. 72 Beaker 101. 12 Liquid Trial 1 Trial 2 Mass of liquid (grams) 9. 99 7. 96 Temperature fallen (oc) -3. 9 -3. 2 Overall mass (grams) 1 50. 29 146. 2 ATF (oc) 3. 9 3. 2 Molality 2. 10 Mass unknown 2 Mass of water final mass – liquid – Styrofoam cup) 138. 8 136. 52 ot solution 72. 09 58. 306 Molar Mass 34. 33 33. 90 c. Object Mass (grams) Solid (unknown 2) Mass of solid (grams) 10. 0 5. 94 -2. 5 Final Mass (grams) 195. 85 167. 75 2. 5 1 . 34 Mass solid 10 (final mass – solid – Styrofoam cup) 184. 13 160. 09 1 kg 54. 31 37. 10 31 . 58 27. 69 Calculation for C. Actual = 74. 55 74. 55/29. 635 = 2. 5 1=3. 5 = 3. 5-1 x 100= 250% average molar mass (31. 58+27. 69/2) x 250% = 75. 56 Discussion: Molar mass is a colligative property. This property allows us to study the change in states of matter and fgure out the solution.
The molality of a solution gives us the concentration of the unknown. We then use the freezing point depression to establish the molality of the new substance compared to water. The 1 kgsolution gives us a concentration to establish the molar mass. If the concentration is below the actual value it is an ionic compound. This experiment was for nonvolatile substances. During this experiment, we were given a deeper understanding on how vapor pressure affects the state of matter, which a substance can affect the point in which a solution freezes. The solution changes the intermolecular forces.
Emotional Turmole in Frankenstein essay help for free: essay help for free
Emotions are the energy that undermines people’s actions; while their mind is irrational and lucid, everyone is subjected to emotions. In Mary Wollstonecraft’s novel Frankenstein, she displays how Dr. Victor Frankenstein and the Monster experience a variety of emotions , feelings of Shame, Happiness, and Pain are all felt by the two main characters as they venture throughout the story. Victor Frankenstein and the monster both experience shame.
For example when Victor illustrates shame is when he decides to create an animated monster but was cared of his own creation, once his monster sprung to life. Victor saw the monsters pale yellow skin and monstrous eight feet high and was disgusted by it and was shamed of what he created. He abandoned his creation hoping it would disappear. Another example of when Victor shows shame was when Victor’s life was threatened by the monster because the monster wanted a female friend and forced Victor to create another monster.
Victor starts to build on the monster in a remote island in Scotland but is ashamed his own selfishness; building another monster to save imself when the monster could case destruction and death on other humans Just like how his original creation killed his brother, William Frankenstein died. In anger at himself he tears up his half created monster. The monster also shows shame. The monster shows shame when he looks into the water of the pond and sees his own reflection and exclaims in agony “Why did you form a monster so hideous” (93).
The monster realizes that he is hideous and is ashamed of himself. He is then struck with anger and seeks revenge on Victor for giving him a repulsive face. Another example when he demonstrates shame was when he passed by the town and the people would shriek and hit him. Learning from that experience he did not go into town again and became ashamed of himself so he hid in the forest, sheltering himself in the dirt hovel that was next to the cottage of the DeLacey family. Victor and the monster also experienced happiness but it doesn’t last long.
The first time Victor was ever truly happy was when he was a child and he was also content when he was with his girlfriend and soon to be wife, Elizabeth Lavenza. Another moment of happiness for Victor was when he finished his creation that he has been working on for two years. He describes it as “Beautiful! -Great God!… his teeth of pearly whiteness… ” (35). The monster shows happiness too when he is around nature, he appreciates and is happy with nature because nature is the only thing that doesn’t make insult him for his looks.
His was also blissful when he demanded Victor to make him a mate and Victor agreed. Victor and the monster additionally feel pain; emotionally and physically. Victor first feels emotional pain when his mom and his best friend Henry died. Victor undergoes emotional pain when Justine was executed and Victor becomes increasingly melancholy. He considers suicide but restrains himself by thinking of Elizabeth and his father. Another example is when Felix DeLacey hits the monster Molently with a stick” (97) in fear that the monster will harm his family .
The monster suffers pain when he is like a newborn, still clue less to the new world he is in and decides to touch he tire that is warm and soothing. He soon discovers the tlames could burn his hands. The monster also goes through emotional pain when Victor Frankenstein dies and the monster cries for him because the monster has no purpose in life and is emotionally frustrated. Both characters experience a series of emotions and have each changed emotions in comparison this are very similar yet they are very different. As both characters experienced pain, happiness, and shame it greatly affected their lives and how they behaved to each other.
Human Sexuality and the Medias Role college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help
Human Sexuality and the Media’s Role of Shaping Thoughts Abstract Research regarding the elements of how media objectifies women is available and plentiful because it is an old concept. This objectification shapes the opinions that women have of themselves and that men have of them. Common bonds that exist within the literature regarding the media’s role in human sexuality is objectification is accepted as normal, it affects the building of self esteem, and the perception of what is sexually desirable.
This paper includes a brief literature review, an analysis of the utcomes, possible implications and my personal reflection. The media plays a large role in objectifying women, shaping their opinions of themselves, and outlining the thoughts of human sexuality. This statement is true because it can be proved through multiple examples of television shows, daily advertisements, music videos and more. This statement is true because research shows correlations between media and low levels of body esteem in women. This statement is also true because of the definition of human sexuality.
Human sexuality can be defined as a mixture of the ways people feel and express their sexual haracter, their personal values of gender roles, and their experiences with sexual pleasure; it is unfortunate that the media largely determines what is “normal” in this area. Objectification ot Women The objectification of women in the media is far from a new concept. I was born in the 1980’s and I remember watching He-Man and Shera. I never thought about Shera’s character until writing this paper. Shera and even Wonder Woman wore skimpy clothing.
Even backing up before then, Playboy magazine was introduced in the 1950’s for men’s pleasure. All the television shows of the 60’s have portrayed imple and submissive housewives, and the 70’s advertisement showed all t he men who smoked cigarettes got the beautiful young woman. I feel that those things may not have been as offensive as the newer media materials however, they showed nothing to empower women or display their individuality without the intent to please a man. Regardless how big or little you are into women’s rights and equality, it is easy to see objectification of women every day.
In my opinion, this is an issue because it appears the message is that women are not valuable humans but objects of satisfaction. Today, Just googling the terms “objectified images of women” you see half naked women posing as a foot stool for clothing, a purse with a pair of tall slender legs, a beer bottle made out of a woman’s fgure, a woman with two big pool balls as breast, women in bikinis with bags over their faces, a sign that reads “wish I could go somewhere without make up feel beautiful” and the list goes on.
I wonder how men would feel if this was reversed. The flip side of this objectification has been demonstrated through a dating site called checkhimout. com, where women are persuaded to shop for men on hanging racks as if they were hopping for blue Jeans. The advertisement caught a lot of slack even though it is not even that popular. My concern is enough fuss is not being made to change how women are presented to society. The level of such objectification and acceptance is sickening and heartbreaking.
I feel it is a form of oppression to constantly exploit and dehumanize women every day within songs, ads, television, etc. Media Messages and Self-Esteem For this assignment, I reviewed the article “Adolescents and Music Media: Toward an Involvement-Mediational Model of Consumption and Self-concept. ” As of 2006, he typical teenager spent a minimum of 18 hours per week listening to music and an additional 3-10 hours watching videos (Kister et al, 2010). I assume that these numbers have increased with the improvement of technology making it easier to access such materials.
Kistlers article gave background information that teens absorbed these lyrics and held the images to be meaningful, including the idea that being wealth, physical fitness was vitally important. Kistler also stated that research found that most female teens looked to music and videos for accurate information on their “emerging sexuality. The study took 214 suburban eighth graders (82% white) and collected data through a series of surveys. Although there were limitations to their measures, the outcome still state that both boys and girls alike looked to the music characters to mirror their own image.
This is devastating most especially if the character is being degraded or their actions may lead to harm in real life (Kistler et al, 2010). I do not have any statistics but I have read headlines that speak of rapes and assaults due to inappropriate behavior and expectations glorified by music videos. What the Media Exhibits to be Normal you like to watch television, you see it is mostly normal tor a temale character to be a submissive housewife or a sexy whorish single that chases men. This is exemplified through shows like Desperate Housewives, Hot in Cleveland, or Love and Hip Hop.
Shows that may show a woman of intelligence or strong character displays her as a bitter or scorn bitch with some sort of hang up or control issue. My favorite example of this could be The Have and the Have Nots. Last but not least some shows show women with careers never have romantic satisfaction and Just become workaholics like Law and Order, Drop Dead Diva and the Closer. Even for music videos, the culture is making it specific that attractiveness is nothing other than heels and nakedness.
The images of these women display that a promiscuous and revealing body is sexy, desirable, and the best way to get a man with money. The sad thing is most of the lyrics are downing the very image that the video is glorifying. Although this is mostly hip hop genre, Latino and country music have ways of exploiting women as well. Kenny Cheslys song “Come Over” is about a booty call and Trace Adkins “Honky Tonk Badonkadonk” is about getting women to shake their butts while men enjoy the view. It is understandable that body parts are a prevalent element of sexuality but other things are Just as or more necessary.
Television shows, magazine ads, or music videos that talk about love, respect, communication, values, and relationships are barely existent compared to those that miss those components. This is illustrated in an ad with one man being catered to by two women in lingerie. To me this implies that this type of threesome relationship is desired, it is okay, and it is cool because it represents the trendiest and most current brand name. Laying in the bed with two half naked women has very little to do with a wrist watch. It is plain and simple that the media displays casual sex and booty shaking as normal.
This is displayed as normal because these components almost always have to be included for a show, song, or advertisement to be a long lasting or a short time big hit. The worst part is the bodies that are being shown and glorified are the rare type. The average shape and weight of a woman is rarely used for advertisement. Conclusion Human sexuality is a big part of who we are. From the time we are a child until we have reached a very ripe age, we have a strong emotion tied to our sense of man/ omanhood and our contentment with our personal selves.
Regardless of diversity, our personal selves include our sexual character. If we are bombarded with fantasy and unrealistic images of ourselves, we will not feel comfortable with ourselves. Research from Halliwell et al noted that providing information about the unrealistic nature of media images may have immediate benefits for young girls and women. Such discussion creates an increase in the short term levels of body and self esteem. I believe that had that study tested for long term, the results would have een concurrent, As a Human Service worker, I hope to help people increase their well being as an individual.
We never know what problems clients may be facing when we serve them so we have to be prepared with knowledge. If the media displays manly men as providers for their home, a male client may be uncomfortable applying for state assistance. If the media displays all of the popular television adolescents as one image, a teen toster child may incur additional stressors and problems due to body esteem. This class and assignment has reminded me that we must love and validate urselves as well as be open minded and non Judgmental towards clients.
Types of love in Shakespeare’s “Midsummer Night’s Dream descriptive essay help: descriptive essay help
The types of love in “Midsummer Night’s dream” by William Shakespeare To begin with ,we have the love story of Theseus and Hippolyta. Theseus has fought many battles and risked his life in order to win Hippolyta:”‘ woo’d thee with my sword / And won thy love, doing thee injuries. ” Next we have the pair of romantic lovers Hermia and Lysander and Helena and Demetrius who undergo many trials before they are united Finally, we have the fairy couple Oberon and Titania who are finally reconciled after a long period of separation.
What is common to all these different ‘love stories’ is the fact that the course of true love never did run smooth. Shakespeare reveals to us that love at all levels, whether it is the royalty or the ordinary folk, or in the supernatural has to undergo a rigorous trial before it succeeds. True love will succeed if the lovers are faithful to their partners and remain patient during their time of separation and trial. From the vicious, yet very real, love of Oberon and Titania to the youthful obsessive love that Helena has for
Demetrius (and the false love the fairies cause Demetrius to have for Helena), love is a primary subject in William Shakespeare’s “A Midsummer Night’s Dream. ” Though the King and Queen of Fairies are violent in their love for one another, their anger shaking the ground when the two fght, they most assuredly do love each other. Not so withHelena and Demetrius, however. In the case of Helena and Demetrius, Helena is in such a deep state of obsessive love for Demetrius that she truly shames herself hen trying to “catch” him – going so far as to compare herself with a Spaniel dog , available exclusively for Demetrius’ use.
All the while, Demetrius scorns Helena’s affections, preferring instead to chase after Hermia. In fact, Demetrius does not show any love or interest in Helena until the fairy Robin Goodfellow, or Puck , puts a spell on him. This is not a true love on either side. Helena does not love Demetrius, but rather obsesses over him – affording Demetrius all worth and herself none unless he returns her affections. On Demetrius’ side, the only reason that he begins to love Helena at all is the fairy spell – not from any affection of his own heart.
This is not a healthy , mature love in any sense, with one person in a self-degrading obsession and the other under an enchantment. On the other hand, the King and Queen of the Fairies, Oberon and Titania, have a much healthier, a much truer love relationship between them. Though spiteful at times because Titania’s possessions take her attention away from him, Oberon certainly loves his queen. However, this spite drives Oberon to play tricks and put spells on the Queen of the Fairies in order to remove that which so distracts the lady from her husband.
On Titania’s side, the queen is not above using her power to make Oberon Jealous – fawning over her possetions to point of ignoring him. However, once these tricks and intrigues are finished, Oberon and Titania meet in a spectacular reunion that once again reaffirms their love for one another. This is a healthy sort of love, with each partner exerting his or her own will – s opposed to one giving all control over to the other person – and compromises being made between the two.
Furthermore, the couple is not afraid to fght one another when it is appropriate – and the relationship seems stronger tor the arguing and making up. The two couples of Oberon and Titania and Helena and Demetrius show the striking contrasts in the types of love evidenced in “A Midsummer Night’s Dream,” though multiple other types are present in the play as well. Ranging from a youthful dalliance to a mature and healthy love, Shakespeare shows the full gamut of the love spectrum.
Hindi gk essay help service: essay help service
To acquaint students with the economic problems and solve the problems at local and national level To familiarize students with basic ideas in economics To foster an urge among students for effective participation. To prepare students to cope with stress and strain. To develop an understanding of the nations resources To develop among students a favorable attitude To help the students to understand that various sectors must develop equally. To develop among students a passion tor social Justice. To help students to acquire skills.
Objectives of teaching economics at Higher Secondary Level: 1 . To acquire the knowledge of facts, terms, concepts, trends, principles, problems and processes of economics. 2. To develop understanding of trends, principles, processes, etc in economics. 3. To apply the acquired knowledge and its understanding to unfamiliar situation. 4. To acquire economic skills like drawing maps, charts, tables, diagrams, graphs, etc. 5. To evelop interest in the subject and problems related to the economic life of the people. 6. To develop desirable attitudes necessary for developing a broader outlook. ) Correlation of Economics with Commerce, Mathematics, History, Geography, Science, Languages. Meaning of correlation: 0 Technique which establishes reciprocal relationship between different subjects of the curriculum for the better and clear understanding of the subject under discussion. 0 Acc. To Raymont, “No subject is ever well understood and no art is intelligently practiced, if the light which the other studies are able to throw upon it is eliberately shut out. ” 0 Knowledge is one invisible whole, which cannot be divided into water tight compartments.
Reasons for correlation: 0 Stability of knowledge 0 Economy of knowledge 0 Development of interest in the subject 0 Makes the burden of the curriculum light 0 Development of human and social qualities Types of Correlation: 1) Incidental Correlation: correlation between subjects occurring by chance not planned. 2) Planned Correlation: It’s a deliberate attempt to correlate subjects. There are two types of planned correlation: a) Vertical Correlation- correlation of economics with various branches of economics ) Horizontal correlation- correlation of economics with other subjects c) Correlation with life.
Correlation of Economics with Commerce: Main aim in Commerce is 0 to study about business, industry, trade and organization 0 study all activities beginning from production and leading up to distribution 0 study of trade, banking, export, import, book-keeping, etc All the above are closely associated with economics. Economics and commerce cannot be studied separately. They are inter-twined. Through the knowledge of commerce, it is possible to run the economy of a country more efficiently. Correlation ot Economics witn Mathematics: 0 There exists very close relationship of economics with mathematics particularly statistics. Most of the economic theories are propounded on the basis of statistical data. 0 In economics we make use of various mathematical symbols. 0 To formulate theories, Geometry and Algebra are widely used. 0 Without statistics the knowledge of economics remains incomplete. Marshall said, “Statistics are the straw out of which, I like every other economist have to make bricks”. 0 To draw graphs, sketches, and tables the teacher of economics depends on mathematical knowledge. Correlation of Economics with History: 0 Both subjects are social sciences. 0 After Industrial Revolution production of quantity and quality of goods improved.
Also resulted in competitive business for marketing of finished goods. Gave rise to infighting among various developed European powers which resulted in huge wars and new powers emerged. 0 First and Second World Wars were fought for economic considerations. 0 To get knowledge of various economic factors that were responsible for various historical events, we have to depend on history. 0 History tells about the economic development of various countries. When we read a particular period in history, we learn about economic conditions prevailing in that period. The beginning of medium of exchange such as gold coins and others are studied in history. Correlation of Economics with Geography: 0 In economics we study about various goods. The production is governed by various geographical factors such as nature of soil, climate. 0 Economic conditions of a country depend to a large extent on its geographical conditions. 0 India could become a great power in ancient times because of its geographical situation and other conditions. Agriculture, industry and other economic activities depend to a large extent on geographical factors.
C] Availability of raw materials means of transport and types land (plateaus, deserts, mountains, etc) are considered in major decisions of business. 0 Certain industries and trade develop in a particular place when geographical conditions favor them. Correlation of Economics with Science: 0 Teaching is a technical Job. It requires certain qualities of head and heart. Every teacher must familiarize herself/ himself with the time honored maxims of teaching which are evolved as a result of long experience in teaching and research in ducational psychology.
To explain the concept of Diminishing Marginal Utility give water to a student to drink and ask other students to observe how is urge for drinking water decreases gradually at that point of time. v) Particular to General 0 Examples and facts should be presented to students before giving them the general rules or principles. 0 Study of particular facts should lead the children themselves frame general rules and generalizations 0 Same principle adopted in inductive method of teaching 0 E. g. discuss adulteration of different products, cheating done to consumers and then teach the concept of Consumer Protection.
Prewar Nationalism in Southeast Asia research essay help: research essay help
Final Words on Origins, Nature and Development of pre-WWII nationalism: achievements and limitations You should know the factors for the development of nationalism Colonial factor (political, economic and social impact of colonial rule; colonial powers response to rise of nationalism) Nationalist factor (esp the impact of western education and role of leaders esp in the 1920s and 1930s) Inherent/contextual SEA factor (culture & religion) External factor (impact of external events and foreign ideologies) You should know the specific role of the different factors
Impact of colonial rule explains the initial impetus for native dissatisfaction which was due to the dislocation and marginalisation from the politics, economy and the traditional society. This alienation would continue throughout the colonial rule entrenching anti-colonial sentiments. Role of Western education & leaders explains the influence of western political ideologies on nationalist movements. These ideologies were useful in mobilising and organising the native dissatisfaction.
The rise of new leaders in 1920s who adapted these ideologies to the local needs and contexts to build nationalist movements that ere more broad-based, inclusive, and secular with a political goal of achieving not only independence but an independent nation-state. Colonial response to the nationalists (suppression, carrot and stick approach etc) explains the radicalisation of nationalism – in other words how nationalism became radical in terms of its methods.
Influence of Western political ideologies and events – explains how nationalist movements became more political in outlook Influence of religion and culture : see below Sample question: Ideology was more important than religion and culture in the growth of nationalist movements in the pre-WWII period. Discuss. Handles: Each was important in different way and in different stages of nationalist development. Religion and culture: provided a rallying point for early anti-colonial dissatisfaction; continued to be force for mobilisation of mass support across time.
Ideology on the other hand – modernised movements with evolution of goals, means and organisation. Not Just about which was more important but how each used was used by leaders. Argue that ideology was more important than religion and culture Ideology ethnic neutral and had the potential to unify diverse groups of people unlike religion and culture which was diverse. Had the potential to overcome the inherent divisions ot SEA societies and to uni ty these groups. E. g. B’ Dobama Asiayone attracted socialists, Marxists, students from the Rangoon university and even the religious elements the Pongyis.
PNI in I – Sukarno’s call for national concept of ‘Indonesia’ as well as key nationhood symbols such as national flag, language – step forward for East Indies given the geographical diversity. In contrast to ideology, religion – exclude minority groups or cultures and obstacle to the formation of nationhood. E. g. Malaya: absence of unified coherent movements – instead ovements targeted one another instead of colonial powers e. g. KMS vs SCBA vs CIAM. Ethnic rifts were exacerbated by religion and culture favouritism in Malaya instead of an encompassing (inclusive) ideology.
Ideology facilitated development of modern nationalism over time. Movements before 1914 largely based on religion and culture. They usually harked back to the past or focused on self-strengthening, which sought to reform traditional religions. In other words they were backwards. On the other hand ideology politicised the movements esp after WWI. Led to movements from traditional ones to forward ooking modern movements with the goal of political independence as a nation. E. g. l: Budi Utomo vs. PNI in 1928 which focused on development of nationhood.
B: YMBA to GCBA after to DA the 1930s. Ideology provided movements with means of resistance and organisation. This particularly applies to communism – gave party organisation and strategy in contrast to religious revolts. E. g. V: ICP established large scale soviets in rural Vietnam from 1930 to capitalise on economic deprivation of GD. Embark on land redistribution during JO. I: PKI worked with trade unions and carried out Banten uprising in 1926. Argue that religion and culture was more important than ideology Greater appeal to masses. Rallying point esp before 1914.
Why – more accessible to masses than external ideologies that lacked traction with traditional SEA societies. Given the religious nature of SEA, most of the movements were religious or cultural based. ICP was initally weak as the idea of socialism was alien to the masses and had to be tactfully couched under native concerns and confucionism by Ho Chi Minh in order to obtain the success as seen in Vietminh. Despite their sectarian nature, it served as stepping stone for subsequent movements e. . B: movements based on Buddhism – elaborate on footwear controversy; basis for GCBA when it politicised after 1914. : BIJ and Sl based on Javanese culture and Islam. Sl popular – elab. Change in name but kept Islam – intention of gaining support of predominantly muslim population. PKI did not get as much support as Sukarno’s PNI as socialist ideology was seen as atheist, which was affront to the religious population. Religion and culture continued to be tapped by nationalist leaders to mobilise mass support. Even though ideology started to influence movements after WWI, religion nd culture will continue to be used to mobilise mass support. Why? Because of the importance of religion and culture in SEA society.
Evident that popular movements tapped on religion and culture e. g. B: Aung San and Thakins popular because they worked wit n Pongyis which attracted much suppo rt. This is in contrast to Western educated politicians who collaborated with British and seen as collaborators. V: Vietminh – national goal of HCM was to achieve independence based on Viet nation. Islamic credentials of Sukarno played up as seen from how his pilgrimege to Mecca was widely publicized. Evaluation: played different roles. Ideology – made movements modern with clear goals and organisation.
Religion and culture – ensured mass support with their appeal to traditional SEA societies. Of course the most popular movements were those which used both. Such movements had visionary leaders who promoted ideological goal with cultural-religious undertones e. g. DA in B, PNI in I and Vietminh in V – elaborate. E. g. PNI fghting for independence based on Indonesian nation while tapping on Javanese support given the dominant Javanese leadership. Who contributed more to the development of nationalism in SEA before 1941 : olonial governments or nationalist leaders?
Key ideas – you should know the examples you should use. Role of colonial governments: Political and socio-economic impact of colonial rule led to the emergence of nationalist sentiments. Definitely colonial rule was the source of nationalism. The political and economic alienation experienced by the natives gave rise to anti- colonialism and continued to feed nationalist sentiments throughout. Certainly the degree of anti-colonialism differed from one country to the next depending on the harshness of colonial rule.
Yet the presence of anti-colonial movements even in most enevolent countries suggest that at the fundamental level – colonial presence did fuel the growth of nationalism e. g. P- even under the benevolent US – despite promise of independence…. sakdal movements (discontented farmer seeking for land reforms) in the 1930s demonstrate persistence of anti-colonial sentiments. Malaya – apolitical due to immigrant demographic and non-intrusive British indirect rule. Yet radical groups like KMM and MCP Provision of Western education and its unintended impact on the politicization of nationalist movements.
Western education introduced western ideas of self-rule and ationhood to native leaders. It nurtured a generation of leaders with a clear sense of political direction and access to the colonial powers e. g. l: Sukarno and Hatta started their political activities in the General Study Club of Bandung. They would come to lead PNI by 1928 ……… B: AS and Thakins educated in U of Rangoon. Led Dobama Asiayone………. Harsh political suppression intensified anti-colonial sentiments and strengthened nationalist resolve in the LR and helped to foment an intangible sense of nationhood.
Political suppression was employed more extensively under harsh Fr and D rule. Precisely because political progress was limited, anti-colonial sentiments intensified over time and nationalist groups were able to inculcate sense of nationhood more nan n US and British colonies. E. g. V- Fr suppressed all political parties including Phan Chu Trinh who was Pro-Fr moderate, Relentless suppression continued into the 1920s with VNQDD, ICP and Vietminh. l: D suppression of ISDV in 1920 failed to prevent PKI and later PNI. Although Sukarno was exiled in 1934, the intensified support would re-emerge when Sukarno returned during JO.
But, harsh political uppression also crippled nationalist movements leading to moderate ones, e. g. Indonesia – suppression of PNI led to moderate movements like Parinda and Gerindo and Vietminh going underground for nearly a decade. The granting of political concessions contributed directly to political progress of nationalist movements. Benevolent colonial rule usually bestowed political concessions, facilitating constitutional progress. This ensured tangible achievement and concrete step towards independence. In this regard, colonies under US and Br were more successful in terms of achieving concrete political progress.
E. g. P: promised independence as early as 1934 with the Tydings-McDuffie Act; B – Moderate nationalists Ba Maw were able to get Home Rule in 1935. Concessions could also dampen nationalist impulse and hindered a sense of nationhood. Concessions washed out anti-colonial sentiments leading to moderate and placid movements. Cultivated a group of collaborators who chose to work with rather than against colonial powers. Tydings McDuffie act in 1934 for Philippines and benevolence of Filipinization led to lack of radical movements and moderate elite rivalries – Quezon, Roxas, Osmena.
Burma – promise of Home Rule in 1935 Colonial suppression hindered the nationalist development in the SR especially potential movements. E. g. Dutch suppression of PKI in 1927 and later PNI in 1931 – removed key Indonesian leaders. The moderate lull under Parindra and Gerindo The use of carrot and stick strategy contributed to nationalist disunity e. g. Pursued in British Burma – with concessions to one group and suppression of other. Effect – moderates stayed away from radical pongyis and thakins. Deep nationalist disunity elaborate.
Role of nationalist leaders While the provision of Western education by colonial governments was important, trong nationalist leaders who were able to adapt these ideas to develop nationalism further. Contrast to the traditional self-strengthening leaders who also received western education but did not create a political vision for the movements. Nationalist leaders were successful if they could successfully conflate native concerns and problems with their western education, such as class struggle and path towards nationalism. Revolutionary leaders were able to mobilize and organize large groups for mass support. i. e.
HCM and adaptation of communist ideology to the Vietnamese context. Aung San’s ability to address native needs with nationhood ideals; common Burmese slogan and anthem – introduced land retorms to peasants development of the concept of nationhood. . Sukarno and n Disunity between and within nationalist groups and leaders could also hinder the intangible developments of nationalism. PKI branches were disorganized and disunited leading to failed coup. Thankin headquaters were disunited and lacked communication making them easy targets for colonial suppression such as the raiding of their headquaters and exiling key leaders.
Final evaluation Colonial governments were most responsible for the emergence of nationalist sentiments and benevolent colonial powers contributed more to the tangible political progress of nationalist movements. Contrast to harsh colonial governments with strong nationalist movements. Colonial governments contributed indirectly to the intangible development of nationalist movements through harsh rule and Western education but the nationalist leaders were more important in strengthening nationalist movements through harnessing Western ideas and galvanizing the masses and developing a strong sense of nationhood.
You should know the factors for the failure of nationalist movements (easiest to write) Nationalist factor Elite-mass divide and inability to capitalise on political concessions. Western educated leaders unable to relate to the masses. Lack of education on the part of the masses alienated them from the western philosophies of many movements. E. g. B: masses did not understand the democratic processes of elections and therefore influenced by wunthanu athins – shown in the voter turnout of 6. 9% in 1922. So in that sense political concessions by the British were not well utilised.
V: ICP was nitially focused more on ideology due to Soviet directive. But lack of support. Easily suppressed. Only when HCM changed the ICP to a more nationalistic Vietminh – greater support. Also moderate elite parties seen as self-serving politicians (Roxas, Osmena and Quezon) and regarded by masses as stooges of colonial powers (Golden Valley Party was seen as collaborators). Therefore little support for these western educated moderates who were negotiating with the colonial powers. E. g. B: Ba Maw discredited after his election victory in 1935 when he changed his mind with regard to separation with India.
P: Sakdal movement challenged the leading politicians from Partido Nacionalista. Why: disconnect; politicians were seen as more as enemies than the colonial powers due to elites control of land. Inter-party disunity in aims/methods and lack of unified support : too many parties at the same time; divided by aims and methods; led to split in support; can’t have a unified platform to challenge colonial powers or even to gain mass support. E. g. B: support split between Pongyis and moderate parties led by western educated leaders – 1922 1st Dyarchy elections – wunthanu athins sabotaged participation such hat there was only 6 turnout.
Failed to convince the British that they were ready for independence. V: Phan Chu Trinh was a moderate pro-French reformist; Phan Boi Chau was a radical anti-colonial leader. Both suppressed by the French by the end of 1910S. Intra-party divide: infighting; failure to present a united front; can’t become strong. E. g. P: intense political rivalry between moderate politicians from Partido Nacionalista and Partido Federalista led to the renegotiation of Hare-Hawes Cutting Act as Tydings-McDuffie Act in 1934. Both Acts were similar in substance rather than a olitical step forward.
B: Ba Maw’s turn around from anti-separation to separation after his 1935 electoral victory discredited him in the eyes of the masses as an self- interested leader. Colonial factor Colonial suppression: lack of political space and time for popular movements to cultivate support. Many leaders suppressed even before they had time to cultivate support. This was esp detrimental given that those leaders who had the potential to win much support were suppressed. Of course in the long term, suppression eventually led to backlash of increased support instead. E. g.
Indonesia: Sl and ISDV were suppressed by 1920 giving their increasing popularity in the 1910s; Sukarno and Hatta were also exiled after popularity with students in the 1931 and PNI dissolved. B: AS and Thakins suppressed in 1938 with raiding of Thakin Hq. Colonial concessions negated nationalist challenges: placated nationalists and led to group of moderate nationalists who collaborated rather than challenge the colonial powers. Where colonial rule was benevolent – few serious nationalist challenges e. g. P: Most Filipino natives pro-U- promise of independence in the TD of 1934 effectively ed to moderate movements.
M: indirect rule – traditional Malay Sultans kept in power. Malay movement KMS moderate in nature. British benevolence – moderate socio economic movements e. g. SCBA and CIAM. Carrot and stick strategy divided the movements e. g. British concessions to the moderates; suppression of Pongyis and radical Thakins – led to moderates fear of being associated with them. Inherent divisions of SEA society Traditional and religious nature of SEA society led to permanent problem which was that it led to divided movements and difficult to forge national unity. E. g. eligious ature of SEA society ensured the undertone of native traditional reaction throughout pre-war period. The irreconcilable nature of religion with politics and the rise of communism by late 1920s led to much nationalist disunity. E. g. V: traditional cultural Cao Dai movement in the 1930s endured with ICP and Vietminh. Inherent geographical/ethnic cleavages inhibited broad-based support for nationalists. In Malaya esp ethnic nationalism highly distinctive as a result of the background ot immigrant communities in the country. Each ethnic community movements with specific aims exclusive to other groups. E. g.
Malaya: MCP – Chinese; KMS- Malay; CIAM- Indian. V: movements divided across regions – north-south divide where north was led by educated elites who sought to overthrow colonial power VNQDD, ICP and Vietminh vs. South – traditional and led by monarchical nationalists e. g. Cao Dai movement. Indonesia – Predominantly Javanese ideology excluded outer islands such as East Timor and Achehnese. Burma also marginalized hill-side tribes like the Christian Karens. Evaluation: which one was important? Nationalist factor: important in explaining why the movements failed to achieve a sense of unity and nationhood. Esp so before 1920s.
But after 1920s – presence of strong leaders despite colonial suppression – e. g. B, I and V- explain. Colonial strengths significant in the failure of movements to achieve political independence. Despite the presence of strong leadership – no colony had achieved independence. E. g. B and l. In fact colonial concessions were dependent on colonial powers. E. g. P and to some extent B – it was the colonial powers who were granting concessions despite no or little pressure. Inherent factors – as it suggests it is inherent – nothing could be done to change that. Even popular movements like PNI, DA – still largely ominated by ethnic majorities.
Yet the popularity of these movements which attempted to project inclusive image – was a result of good leadership who were able to reconcile these rifts with ethnic neutral ideology. Nor was ethnic homogeneity a necessary pre-requisite of independence. You should know the achievements of the nationalist movements. Concrete achievements e. g. P and B – which indicates steps towards political independence Not so concrete achievements e. g. ability of nationalist leaders to forge national unity; gaining mass support To qualify the achievements: result of nationalists or colonial powers?
Kudler’s Fine Foods free essay help: free essay help
Kudler Fine Foods frequent shopper program will track buying patterns of every customer who signs up for the program. The trade-off will be giving the customers loyalty points that can be redeemed for high-end gifts. Cost, schedule, and performance are three aspects that will decide the design trade-off approach to use regarding the frequent shopper program system. To choose specific types of hardware and software for the frequent shopper program, particular factors must be considered first.
Project cost, planned system components, retailer support, adjustments, records, reaction time, resolution plan for future concerns, installation rocess, run-through of implemented system, and finishing of implanted system process are factors that must be considered before hardware and software is chosen for Kudler Fine Foods frequent shopper program. When Kudler Fine Foods is determining the hardware and software needed to use tor the trequent shopper program, Kudler Fine F s must consider cost, schedule, and performance.
It is important for Kudler Fine Foods to choose the correct hardware and software because the wrong software could cost money and trade-offs n other areas of the frequent shopper program process. For example if the hardware for the program cost $1 50,000 and the software cost $75,000, but the hardware and software wind up not working, more hardware and software needs to be purchased.
This could cause problems because the money used to reorder a new hardware and software may cause some of the team to be cut. It is very important for Kudler Fine Foods to include design trade-offs within the budgeting phase to ensure if any problems arise it will not affect in other part of the frequent shopper rogram. To keep track of the phases of the project must be completed in a timely manner. Overtime may be needed, but can be Jeopardized if design trade-offs are reinforced.
As stated previously, if more money needs to be moved around than will be cut, which may cause delay in the completion of the implementation of the frequent shopper program. During the project scheduling problems may occur because of scope creep. “Scope creep happens when new requirements are added to the project after the original project scope was defined and “frozen” (George, Hoffer, & Valacich, 2012, p. 75).
Scope creep can happen within Kudler Fine Foods frequent shopper program by the project team finding new efficient and potential methods that can be valuable. Here performance comes into play. The performance of the frequent shopper program may cause scope creep because the project team will not know until the program is tested.
Kyle smitley compare and contrast essay help: compare and contrast essay help
Kyle Smitley Founder and CEO of Barley & Birch’s Entrepreneurs are busy by nature and the one chosen by me is Kyle Smitley. She may be busier than most as she’s a full-time second-year law student in San Francisco, and also the founder of an organic kids clothing line that has become popular with celebrity moms like Jessica Alba and Sheryl Crow. The reason I chose Kyle Smitley is because she seems to be able to do it all and handles her studies along with the business which makes her someone to look up to.
She admits that it is very tiring and busy, “At first it was Just me staying up until 2 a. . every day figuring out how to get people to notice the line,” she said in an interview with the time magazine. “l basically Just don’t sleep. ” Smitley is also fighting for a worthy cause, Barley & Birch’s business model operates on the idea of giving back. From the first day of the business, she has donated more than half of her profits after paying her staff and a business loan to organizations that she feels personally connected with, such as CoCoDa, a non-profit that promotes community development in areas of Central America.
During college, Smitley spent time living in El Salvador and met some of the eople for which the organization’s work was benefiting. When Smitley decided to start Barley & Birch, she wasnt the talk of the Fashion Week runways. She had absolutely no experience in the apparel industry. By chance, she ended up doing some side research for the owner of a clothing boutique who wanted to know whether the companies that claimed to have organic or green products were really making them.
Smitley’s reports turned up some useful information, including the fact that many of the organic kids clothing companies were not actually using the healthiest fabrics or materials. l kept noticing gaps between what companies were saying and what they were actually doing,” she says. “l basically made up my mind right then that I needed to start my own line, one that was accountable to the environment and to its customers. ” She saw what was missing in the area of her choice and capitalised on it.
Barley & Birch clothes are made using 100 percent certified organic cotton and water-based inks that do not pollute the environment. The company’s donations also include offsetting emissions, and its manufacturers are U. S. -based and have been approved by Green America as environmentally responsible companies. Shipping is done from a warehouse in Ohio, a state that Smitley says she purposely picked for its central location, to reduce travel.
Before launching the first Barley & Birch line in December 2008, Smitley secured a $10,000 loan through the microlending site ACCION and embarked upon a major branding campaign. She then looked for a designer who had fashion experience to help bring her ideas to life. Her expectations were not sky rocketing and she started the venture as something to bring about a change. She collaborated with Jodie Milmore on designing the T-shirts, one-pieces, and pants, and then launched Just months after tarting ner first year ot law school. It didn’t take ner long to get the first sale.
Green Genes, an eco-friendly kids boutique in Chicago, wanted to start selling the line, Just days after receiving a letter and sales sheet from Smitley. Her first line sold out in just weeks proving the success of the business idea. There are millions of such students with great ideas out there, and a lot of new opportunities for people coming up with good new business ideas and even alongside college and with what life brings our way if one has a good idea they should go ahead with it and strive effortlessly till their aim is reached.
Illegal Electronics college application essay help: college application essay help
Illegal Electronics Televisions, cell phones, and computers have changed the lives of many people in society, however for the worst. Direct interaction is admirable over cell phone communication because a person can interpret one’s feelings through personal contact. Many teens in society today have trouble with the basics of direct conversation. Cell phones have taken over face-to-face contact, which leaves interaction between others to be unrefined. A computer lessons a student’s comprehension by the usage rather than his brain.
Enjoyable hands on tasks and creatively taught ways are effective strategies to learn by. Thoughts and study habits are best remembered by the use of a pen and paper. The computer has defeated the use of library books, which have true facts rather than the use of some false information from the computer. Television diminishes a person’s ability to lose weight, and therefore results in obesity. Television creates unhealthy consumption habits. Exercise is set aside due to laziness, television becomes priority over physical activities.
Television advertisements influence people to purchase products that are unhealthy. Lastly, family time has been over ran by the television box, which results n relationship issues between members. To develop an exceptional lifestyle for individuals, cell phones, televisions, and computers need to be banned due to lack of socialization, interaction, and the education of humans. Direct interaction is admirable over cell phone communication because a person can interpret one’s feelings through personal contact. Cell phone use has diminished the use of face-to- face contact in todays society.
Mobile phones have become universal; people can easily buy their own multi-functional cell phones, which include Internet connection that allows them to be online at any time. Individuals invest most of their time in chat, games, profiles, and texts that neglect all the things around them. People who depend too much on cell phone usage can limit social interaction, which makes people less active and outgoing. Social network interaction can almost never be interpreted correctly, with a blocked view of a person’s attitude or emotion.
A fight can break out easily due to the way a person reads his friend’s status or profile. Individuals rarely talk to strangers anymore. When a situation is uncomfortable, people take out their cell phone instead of engaging in conversation with the ndividual they are next to. People do not make as many friends as in the past because instead of interaction with a stranger, they text or call a friend of the present. Besides the negativity of a cell phone, positive aspects come with an on-the- go device. When an individual travels, a cell phone comes in handy when he needs to call his family to let them know he is safe.
If a person’s car breaks down, a cell phone is convenient for help right away. Cell phones are an important form of safety because they are so convenient. Landline telephones can be removed from houses to ave money. Cell phones can replace the landlines. Many businesses have specific work cell phones so if a person wants to get up from his desk, he can answer calls when ne is away. Text messages are acceptable when a person wants to send a snort description to a friend or family member. Also, text messages are exceptional in a crowded area when a person cannot hear to talk on the phone.
Even though cell phones can be a convenience or life-saving device, they can easily turn a trip to the market into a destructive auto collision. To drive distracted with a cell phone diverts a erson’s attention away from the primary task to drive a car. Deadly crashes have happened due to overuse of the cell phone. Text messages require visual, manual, and cognitive attention from a driver, which is a very alarming distraction. Business calls should be answered carefully at a desk, and not on the run. This enables a person to write down any important detail about the phone call, and allows him to refer back to the call.
Phone booths are always an option if a car breaks down and has troubles. Most of society who owns a cell phone, is wrapped around the notion hat without them, they would not be safe. In reality, cell phones carry germs that are spread easily because of the phone’s close proximity to the mouth. Germs spread easily through the mouth when a person coughs, breathes, or sneezes. Most cell phones are full of bacteria because they are often used in unsanitary environments. Cell phones are a distraction to life, which cause stress to finish tasks, depression, anxiety, and irritability.
In conclusion, cell phones have taken over the era of direct conversation. Many people in todays society communicate by email, text messages, r phone calls. Direct communication is important because a person can interpret how an individual feels about the conversation. A computer lessons a student’s comprehension because he is not using his brain, but is dependent on the computer for answers. Hands on tasks and creatively taught lessons are best achieved without a computer. To learn effective ways to study material is important throughout a person’s education to acquire a Job.
The use of a computer shuts off brainpower, which gives a person an answer without the use of the thought process. To study ooks and materials given in class is more effective than the use of search engines to try and achieve the answer correctly. The use of pen and paper has declined due to the use of the computer. The computer shuts Offa person’s brain, making the thought process turn off. This leads the person to comprehend little, because the computer did the work for them. Library books have been replaced with the Web. Less people travel to the library to look up material they need.
Computers are more beneficial and convenient to todays society. Library books have true to the point nformation, when Internet sites can list false data. Computers can easily distract a person to wander onto game sites, movie channels, or social networks instead of him accomplishing the task he needs to finish. A computer lessons a person’s brainpower and makes the process to think shut off, which grants him the answer. Television diminishes a person’s ability to lose weight, and therefore resulting in obesity. First, the combination of rest and snacks can pack on the pounds and make it easy to gain weight.
People tend to intake high calorie snacks when they watch television. The etabolic rate for individuals who are physically less active is generally low. One of the most common reasons for having a low metabolic rate is that people spend more time watching television and performing no activities that require physical strain, which ultimately leads to weight gain. Heart disease, high blood pressure, and diabetes are Just some of the health issues that are associated with obesity. People who watch less television cannot only help to achieve an attractive appearance, but it can increase the quality of life through preventing disease.
Second, individuals pend excessive amounts of time with the television, when those hours could be used in exercise. Aerobic exercise will burn calories, strengthen the heart and muscles, and condition the lungs. The body gets energy from fat cells and burning those cells is what produces weight loss. Without television, people could achieve more throughout their day, to leave more time for activity. Third, television does not promote a healthy lifestyle. Television advertisements make viewers hungry, to leave them to find themselves in their cabinet looking for a snack.
Advertisements promote nhealthy foods and snacks by catchy tunes or phrases that will stick in a person’s head when he shops for groceries, or when he Just wants a snack. Television advertisements focus on fast food, cereals, and unhealthy snacks high in sugar and cholesterol. Children often repeat what they hear, so ads especially influence the young. People over-watch the television, and they put on weight by television advertisements putting peer pressure on them to buy products that are high in fats. Fourth, television can decrease interactions with one another, and stunt the development of family relationships.
Television shows have taken over family bond time, which create fghts between members, and distances relationships within the family. Too much or too rigid of a television schedule can reduce intimacy in the family. Family members become too into the television box to share how they feel, and they run into the danger of the screen instead to family members for nourishment. Laziness around couch has been replaced with time spent outside with the family. Lastly, television stimulates obesity. People watch excessive amounts of television daily. As a result, people are obese. Television creates bad consumption abits, resulting in obesity.
People need to exercise to stay healthy, and television diminishes exercise. Advertisements on screen create unhealthy lifestyles by the use of peer pressure on viewers to buy products high in sugars, cholesterol, and fats. Family time has been taken over by the television screen, which results in families being distant from each other. Television declines a person’s ability to drop weight that eventually results in obesity. To develop a healthy lifestyle for people, cell phones, televisions, and computers need to be illegalized due to lack of socialization, interaction, and the education of umans.
First, direct interaction is admirable over cell phone communication because a person can interpret one’s feelings through personal contact. Face-t&face contact is important to know a person’s attitude and mood. Individuals focus more on their cell phones for communication, rather than to open up to others in society. Second, a computer lessons a student’s comprehension by the usage rather than his brain. Hands on tasks and creatively taught ways give students a way to excel in their studies. The use of school and resource books is superior over a computer because hey give true facts about a topic.
Lastly, television diminishes a person’s ability to lose weight, and therefore resulting in obesity. Bad eating habits and loss of exercise are two main reasons to why television should be illegalized. Advertisements create peer pressure on individuals to purchase products that are unhealthy. Family time has been replaced with television shows and causes relationship issues within the family. Televisions, cell phones, and computers have changed society negatively and to be illegalized to develop a more sui table lites tyle tor individuals.
The strange situation best college essay help: best college essay help
The research was looking at investigating the differences shown in attachments between infants and their primary caregivers (parents/ guardians etc. ). How was the experiment carried out? Who was involved? The experiment involved using a toddler, the child’s guardian and a stranger to see the child’s reaction to the different situations using the following stages: Results from experiment: Three different attachment styles were discovered by Ainsworth: secure, insecure, voidant and insecure ambivalent.
The attachment style that the child developed was dependant on how the child and mother interacted in the early stages of the child’s life: Conclusion: It was concluded from these results that the classification of the child depends on the treatment trom the guardian/ parent: Secure attachment: It is likely that it t child has secure attachment the primary care was responsive and sensitive to the child’s needs.
Insecure ambivalent attachment: If the child has insecure ambivalent ttachment the guardian/ parent was most probably inconsistent in attending to the child’s needs; sometimes the child was attended to and sometimes ignored. Avoidant attachment: A child with avoidant attachment behaviour would usually be a product of unresponsive care so the child becomes wise to the fact that communication is futile as there will be no response to meet their needs.
Evaluation: Mary Ainsworth’s ‘strange situation’ classification was deemed to have good reliability, becoming the accepted worldwide methodology for measuring attachment; and roved to have good consistency when a study in Germany showed that 78% of the children tested aged 1 years then again at 6 years were placed under the same classification. However, the classification has been questioned about the fact that the classification only identifies the attachment to the mother, whereas the child may have different type of attachment with father, grandmother etc.
This is criticised as it is only measuring a specific attachment to the Mother, rather than a general attachment style. The study has also been thought to be unethical, breaking the ethical guideline protection of participants, as the study can be distressing for the child considering that the child experiences separation from mother as well as stranger anxiety. In addition, the study has been thought to have low ecological validity as the child is in an unusual situation and an artificial environment. Seeing as the procedure of the mother and stranger in a scripted situation, this may somehow change the outcome of the child’s behaviour.
No Country for Old Men Scene Comparison my assignment essay help london: my assignment essay help london
The Coin Toss The award winning film, No Country for Old Men, adapted from Cormac McCarthy’s 2007 novel, is a riveting tale of a brutal chain of events related to money, murder, and drugs, which rolls through West Texas in the 1980’s. Told through the perspective of the stories three main characters – a soulless killer, an old time sheriff, and an experienced country boy – both the novel and the film keep the audience anxiously waiting for the next gun fight or brutal killing.
Amazingly, the film’s adaptation, directed by brothers Ethan and Joel Coens, manages to capture the hemes and overall essences of the novel by maintaining all distinguishing mannerisms and dispositions of the characters; while also keeping the films dialogue almost a direct reflection of the novel. Essentially, “the Coens make a great film… because they remain true to a great book” (Edwards 61).
Although many of the scenes throughout the film deserve recognizing for their brilliant visual representation of the novel, one of the more disturbing scenes and arguably the best scene adaptation, is Antoine Chigurh’s conversation with the Texaco gas station owner and the life-or- eath coin toss. In both the film and the novel, the scene serves the same purpose of developing Chigurh’s character and introducing the significance of the coin.
Like many of the scenes the Coens treat the pages in the novel as the script (Bayless 8); however, they most definitely add subtle, genius improvements to the scene, in addition to using methodically thought out techniques to heightening the overall uncomfortableness and escalating discomfort felt by the audience, throughout the characters exchange. Throughout much of the film, the dialogue has been taken directly from the McCarthys writing and does not deviate from the author’s desired depiction of the tension and uncomfortableness of the exchange between Chigurh and the inconspicuous gas station attendant.
Allowing for enough screen time, a little over four and half minutes, for this conversation to unfold, permits the dialogue to really ingrain the desired impression on the audience and pull them into the scene. The directors chosen camera technique, a simple two composition that progresses the scene a steady pace, forces the audience to feel a part of the awkward exchange; bviously, a quality of film that could not be as profoundly achieved through the narrative in the novel.
In addition to the benefits of camera techniques, the Coean brothers’ add in subtleties that in enhance the overall eerie feel of the scene, aspects that are not included in the novel. One of the most well thought out and creative addition, is the hanging electrical wires on the back wall, Just behind the proprietor head. Unarguably, each one looks like nooses. No doubt, this inventive visual enhancement was intentional and it most definitely heightens the aura of death in he scene.
Another technique not seen in the novel that serves to heighten the tension felt in the scene, is the un-crinkling of the Chigurh’s cashew wrapper. This seemingly simple aspect does wonders at adding suspense to the scene and demonstrating the strain and uncomfortableness for the gas station attendant and perhaps even the irritation of Chigurh. The excruciating, drawn out rustle of the cashew wrapper also brings to the attention ot the audience that this scene, like many others in film, has no music; consequently, the only sounds are the tense ialogue and the exaggerated chewing of Chigurh.
The fact that the awkwardness can be felt throughout this section of the film, without the contribution of appropriate and intense music that most directors usually include in scenes to help provoke a desired emotion in the audience, speaks multitude about Just how incredible the actors’ performances are and the genuine brilliance of the directors abilities to capture the essence of the novel. So although the scene in the films, lacks some of the details of the novel, it arguably does a better Job of expressing this specific scene.
As stated previously, this scene in both the novel and the film is responsible for introducing the coin and its implication to the plot of the story. Since the coin reappears later in the closing scenes of the narrative, it is critical that its significance is accurately portrayed through the early encounters in the novel. Besides, contributing to the plot of the story, the coin also provides insight and gen into Chigurh’s twisted ethical code, understanding of fate and his general character.
Both the novel and the film equally manage to illustrate the coin as instrument of fate – he belief that everything happens for a reason. In Chigurh’s sick morality code, he uses the coin as a means for mercy and as an opportunity for a person he deems worthy to potentially be spared; however, Just because Chigurh provides the opportunity does not mean that fate will allowed them to be saved.
Essentially, Chigurh places so much faith in the doings of the universe, notably whether the coin lands on heads or tails, that he places the full responsibility on the coin and he unquestionably allows the coin’s Verdict’ to determine his actions and the onsequential outcome of the entire situation. Although the novel does a good Job of representing the significance of the coin to the character development of Chigurh, it does not have the same visual advantage of film of presenting body language.
Consequently, the film is potentially better at portraying this scene and demonstrating the extensive respect that Chigurh has for instruments of fate, in this scenario the coin. In the film, Chigurh chokes on his cashews upon hearing the attendant “married into” (McCarthy 55) the gas station, the viewer can see the disgust n his facial features and the overall anger in his body language at the realization that the proprietor was handed ownership of the gas station. Consequently, visually seeing Chigurh’s reaction, makes it obvious that he wants to kill the attendant.
This cinematic advantage, arguably gives the audience a better understanding of how strictly Chigurh adheres to his ethical code and the extent of respect and value he places in his perception of fate, since although it is obvious that he desires to kill the attendant, he will not overrule the decision of fate’. In both the novel and the book, it s reinforced throughout each passage the evilness of Chigurh, however, the scene at the gas station goes further and provides the audience with insight into the psychotic mind and ethical code of a seemingly emotionless killer.
Even though the scene only includes a conversation between Antoine Chigurh and the proprietor, the contribution to the storyline is immense. Moreover, although the scene in both the novel and the film are tremendously similar, they have minor differences and improvements that arguably contribute to a better understanding of the underlying ubtleties of the scene and essentially,
A Royal Salute to Common Wealth popular mba argumentative essay help: popular mba argumentative essay help
When the British Empire and all of its colonies was broken up after the Second World War, the organization, the Commonwealth union, was founded. The organization consists of 54 independent member countries that are linked together by a common history and set of values, but by time the Commonwealth has been criticized for being an outdated and meaningless organization based on oppressive values. In his article “A royal salute to the Commonwealth” (201 1), Peter Oborne responds the critique and gives an image of how an important and powerful role the
Commonwealth will play in the future. Peter Oborne start commenting on Duke William and Duchess Kate’s first visit to Canada. Oborne followed them on their royal holiday when they visited Canada’s National War Memorial. The monument remembers the Canadian troops during the First World War and the Second World War, where they fought along with the British. Oborne perceive this visit as an affirmation of the still consisting link, which can be seen as a direct result of the Commonwealth union, between Canada and Britain.
After the Second World War hen the British Empire broke down, the Commonwealth union was founded as an organization. The former colonies agreed to enter into a united organization with the purpose based on democracy and human rights but because of the financial crisis, these unions have been under a lot of pressure in the recent years. Oborne argues that the political leaders of Britain must realize how applicable the union is to play as an alternative and important part in politics worldwide. Osborne ‘s main accusations are that the leaders of Britain the past years have ignored their obligations to the
Commonwealth union. According to Oborne the British leaders had their difficulties of accepting the Commonwealth because they see it as an expression of the former imperialism “For many years it has been automatic in progressive circles to sneer at the Commonwealth as a meaningless relic of our imperial past” (l. 19-20). Oborne sees this as an expression of aversion to face the countrys history. According to Oborne, the I-JK have ignored the relationship with the Commonwealth because the leaders have been busy acting lapdog for the U. S. nd the EIJ which for many years as emerged as the world’s most significant powers “But I would argue that it is Tony Blair and Gordon Brown’s poodle-like relationship with the United States, and the former’s slavish worship of the European Union, that now looks out of date” (l. 28-29). But Oborne sees an opportunity. As a result of the economic crisis, the U. S. and the EIJ today is under enormous pressure, and according to Oborne these former superpowers no longer will play such a dominant role in the future. This will provide space for alternative power structures such as the Commonwealth.
In trying to xplain his message, Oborne builds his argumentation on words, appeals and symbols of a special kind. First of all he uses negative loaded words in order to describe the British politicians, words like “The Commonwealth never fitted into New Labour’s relentless modernising vision. Blair regarded traditional British values and identities as xenophobic, if not racist” (l. 23-25) and when he describes the Commonwealth, he uses positive words connected to freedom, strength and democracy such as “Such is the invisible strength of the Commonwealth, the association ot independent countries” (II 16-17).
Furthermore, Oborne uses rhetorical features ex. logos, which appeals to the reader’s intellect and sense of logic, when he uses true facts that supports his cause: “Consider the facts: Just under two billion people, approximately one third of the world’s population, live in Commonwealth countries” (l. 31-32). Oborne also uses pathos when he mentions the crown prince couple, William and Kate, as a symbol of the Commonwealth. Using something as extremely popular in Britain as William and Kate appeals to the readers’ emotions and feelings.
In this way Oborne borrows the extremely popular couple to make his oint: “The crowds who have flocked to see William and Catherine are surely sensing this profound link between our two nations” (II. 10-11). It is clearly that the purpose of Oborne’s article is to criticize the British leaders. He criticizes them for their ignorance of the Commonwealth and he wants the readers to realize how great the union could play on the worldwide political stage. Oborne argues that the Commonwealth will come to play a major worldwide political role in future, but can the union do anything against the great powers such as China and the U. S?
I highly doubt so. And does it actually even matter if the royal crown prince people makes an official visit to one of the Commonwealth country? What if they Just visited Canada for pure pleasure? Either way the Royals should not interfere in politics at all, that is not their purpose. But who knows what will happen if the U. S and the EIJ looses their role as dominating factors of power after the financial crisis. The World’s power structures would turn upside down and we would have to face the future with new, powerful countries like India and China. At this highly hypothetical moment, the Commonwealth Union might come at handy after all.
Dax Cowart essay help: essay help
In 1973, Dax Cowart and his father went to view some property near their Texas home. They parked their car in a dry creek bed. This was not uncommon as, in parts of the desert areas in Texas, there aren’t roads, or only some dirt roads. After surveying the land, the men returned to their vehicle. They were unable to get their vehicle started so they started working on its spark plugs. As chance would have it, under the creek bed was a faulty gas line. A spark from the accelerator resulted in an xplosion that left Dax Cowart’s father dead.
Sixty-seven per cent of Days body sustained second- and third-degree burns. Prior to this he was a healthy young Jet pilot and amateur rodeo performer. Crawling from the scene of the accident he was, by chance, seen by a ranger. He begged him to shoot him. When emergency paramedics arrived he again made this request. Days prognosis for survival was approximately 20%, but his potential quality of life was deeply compromised. He repeatedly requested to die and these requests were all denied.
He unsuccessfully ttempted suicide by, for example, trying to crawl out of his hospital bed in an attempt to throw himself down the staircase. He was grossly infected by the time he left the hospital and hoped that he would die from sepsis. He didn’t. Against his will, he underwent 232 days of treatment in Parkland Memorial Hospital in Dallas. The types of treatment available at that time we might consider as quite “barbaric”. Immersion in tanks of saline, continuous debridement and medications now considered inappropriate were then the best known way to manage such extensive urn injuries.
Also, at that time, there was a great fear that hospitals might inadvertently be producing “drug addicts”, so analgesia was kept at a minimum. At the time of his hospital admission, Dax was in a critical condition and his mother was appointed as his proxy decision maker. So her wishes concerning his care were honored. Days mother held strong religious beliefs concerning life’s beginning and end solely to be the will of God. So to even consider her son’s request to die was an enigma to her.
Later, and despite the fact that he was deemed competent, his epeated refusal of treatment and requests to die were consistently declined. The accident left him blind and gravely disfgured, with only partial use of his fingers. He later became a millionaire as a result of an out-of-court settlement with the gas company. Dax graduated from law school in 1986. He also became a regular speaker for the Society for the Right to Die. His argument remains that his physicians had been morally wrong to treat him against his wishes. He maintains that he should have been accorded the right to die. Dax Cowart essay By farzanaaJani
My beloved world aqa unit 5 biology synoptic essay help: aqa unit 5 biology synoptic essay help
My Beloved World In Sonia Sotomayor’s book, My Beloved World, Sotomayor mentioned a memory in her childhood that I could definitely relate my past with. “If I needed to have these shots every day for the rest of my life, the only way I’d survive was to do it myself. ” Those lines represent a time in Sotomayor’s life when a decision had to be made. She had to either learn how to prepare the syringe and inject the insulin or she could possibly risk being stabbed in the face by her panicking mother or father.
This image eminds me of a time in my childhood when my grandmother grew too weak to manage herself around the house, and especially me. Being the youngest child of 7 at the time, someone had to take care of me while my siblings were at school and my parents were at work. We were a low income family who gradually lived off food stamps so we couldn’t really afford a babysitter. Grandma would usually be the one who took care of me but since her hip surgery, she became very immobile. I didn’t know much about taking care of myself but it had to be learned and it had to be fast.
The most important skill I had to learn was to cook. I would also have to cook for grandma but my knowledge on cooking meat and vegetables were beyond my knowledge. Grandma guided me how to turn on the stove, apply the oil, marinate the meat, and then grilling the meat. IVe applied those skills into my every life from the age of 5 until now, and still growing. Without learning those skills, either grandma or I would be the ones to suffer and that is why I feel like I can relate to Sotomayor’s decision to learn how to support her own life when her family couldn’t.
Should GM food be supported write essay help: write essay help
However, while GM crops market expands, customers are shrinking, where more and more people in the world tend not to buy GM crops (Finucane & Holup, 2005)(Cook, Keerr & Moore, 2002). This essay will dentify and analyze both supporting and opposing views towards GM crops, and will explain why it is more advisable to not support GM crops. There are two main supporting views towards GM crops – its efficiency and effectiveness.
GM crops’ efficiency refers to the crops’ ability and speed to grow in tough conditions, and efficiency is important because it renders crops a higher yield, providing a stable food supply and preventing famine. It is particularly true in developing countries where they struggle to buy enough food for their citizens to survive. On the other hand, effectiveness involves benefits of its consumption and hat it does not cause hazards in addition to the hazards found in its untransformed crops.
GM crops, monitored by thousands of international scientists, are known for its better nutritional value, and are tremendously beneficial to developing countries (Drake, Ma & Key, 2008). A famous example includes the “Golden Rice Project”. Lack of Vitamin A is common in developing countries, where at critical level could be fatal, and the “Golden Rice Project”, which harvests rice faster with higher Vitamin A content, is estimated to have saved 2 million children per year from Vitamin A deficiency (Drake, Ma & Key, ibid). Another aspect of effectiveness is its safety.
To support it with statistics, GM crops are put into industrial use for 1 5 years already, and no illness is recorded; to support it with science, most GM crops are classified as “substantially equivalent” to their untransformed plants (Society of Toxicology, 2003), which means the GM crops’ compositions and genetic structures are highly identical to their untransformed state, minimizing the chance of potential hazards. Based on its increased efficiency and effectiveness, GM crops are wide spread nowadays to create a more stable supply in higher quality.
However, opposing views argue with three main reasons: food safety issues, ethical concerns and current alternatives. Firstly, opposing views doubt whether GM crops are safe to eat. Looking detailedly into the scientific researches of GM crops, there are many defects. There are inadequate published researches, and experiments of GM crops are inaccurate (Mayer & Stirling, 2004)(Pusztai, op cit). Inadequate researches indicate that GM crops are not maturely developed enough, and theretore potential hazards and related problems may not yet be discovered (Mayer & Stirling, opcit).
On the other hand, experiments of food safety verification of GM crops contain defects. Scientists determine GM crops to be safe when GM crops are “substantially equivalent”; however, “substantially equivalent” is not clearly defined because no specific rules and measurements is provided for how will a food be “substantially equivalent”, and hence is concluded by Pusztai (op cit, pp. l) as an “unscientific concept”. In those experiments of feeding mice with GM crops, the results are criticized as incomplete.
Some mice, after being fed GM tomatoes, died within a short period of time, and the eath rates exceed the natural level; some other mice’s ability to digest were found to decline (Pusztai, op cit). These presumably originates from GM crops’ DNA mutations (Drake, Ma & Key, op cit)(Pusztai, op cit), which is more active than in the untransformed stage, and hence may produce new unknown allergens and toxins. Toxins are known to cause food poisoning outbreaks while allergens may cause severe health damages to specific people with specific genes, and both has recorded death cases.
Moreover, if toxins and allergens do exist, the spread of GM seeds with on-GM seeds may combine and create even more dangerous plants, affecting nature in a way we cannot reverse. These potential harms can affect millions of lives nationwide that indicates GM crops not being as effective as claimed, and are strong reasons for not supporting GM crops. Scientists of the supportive side utilize statistics to argue that it should not become a concern when GM crops are industrially produced for 15 years with no illnesses reported (Drake, Ma & Key, op cit), yet it does not convince the public entirely.
Potential hazards might take a long time to emerge; take laser-eye surgery as an example. When doctors first introduced laser-eye surgery to permanently improve eye sight, the surgery had been claimed as risk-free. However, after a few generations, doctors started documenting illnesses from patients who had conducted surgery 20 years ago. Same applies to GM crops – 1 5 years of industrialization of GM crops is not evidence solid enough to eliminate all potential hazards.
It is advisable to gather a group of volunteers to engage in a long term research on GM crops until it is wide spread to the world. Before it is done, it ought not to be industrialized, Secondly, ethical issues of GM crops are raised. They include that to support GM crops is to cross species boundary, and to commodify life (Comstock, 2010). In genetic modifying process, different species of genes are combined together, and hence species of plants are mixed, crossing the species boundary, changing what this nature is.
To cross such a line, it is the Job of nature or God, because current science does not provide us enough knowledge and ability (Comstock, ibid). To cross the boundary, irrevocable changes to the food chain might be caused, posing dangers on humans eventually. Another ethical ground is the value of life. Life is sacred, and should not be measured monetarily. GM crops, as Comstock (ibid) says, “treats life in a reductionistic manner, reducing living organisms to a little more than machines”.
If we can treat living organisms the way we treat GM crops, we are inevitably encouraging the idea of commodifying life, where perhaps 20 years from now, we would go to a retail store, pick up a paper cup and similar to selt-service trozen yogurt machines, we choose the genes we want and check out at the counter, with a newborn baby made immediately. When we purchase GM crops to eat, we ought not o only enjoy the food, but also be aware of these two ethical grounds. Lastly, current alternatives should be taken into account.
In developed countries, people are living in a condition where healthy clean food are available everywhere, an increased in nutritional value would not make a big difference in their lives. Therefore, with a safer alternative in hand, it is advisable for the public to choose natural food over GM crops. Supportive side of GM crops would argue about the 2 million children saved by GM crops per year, and much more millions of children to be saved in the developing countries from nutritional deficiency. GM crops’ benefits do override its concerns in this case.
However, GM crops are in themselves unethical and objectionable, as explained earlier in the ethical grounds. The question comes down to this: whether we should neglect the ethical grounds and the consequences to save those lives in the developing counties? Take an example, where the goal is not to save lives suffering from nutritional deficiency, but to narrow down the gap between the wealthy and the poor. Most of the time, the poor suffers from bad living environment and needs help; yet, however needy they are, unethical means should not be taken to chieve the goal.
Therefore, we would not rob a bank to help the poor; we raise money through charity funds. Applying the same to those nutritionally deficient children, they are needy of food, but food must not be produced in an unethical way. To conclude, GM crops should not be supported after analyzing both sides to this argument. To the general public in developed countries, GM crops contain increased nutritional value. However, with our current alternatives and considering the potential hazards and ethical issues, we ought not to support GM crops.
To the eople needy of food in developing countries, even though nutritional benefits and production efficiency overrides the health issues, GM crops is an unethical way of producing food and should never be industrialized in any ways. Therefore, all things considered, we ought not to support.
Confucianism’s similarities to virtue ethics cheap essay help: cheap essay help
Isaiah Fasoldt Confucinism’s Similarities With Virtue Ethics Confucianism, the ancient social philosophy of China, would have had no ethical parallel in the West as little as 30 years ago. There are some small similarities that it holds with utilitarian ethics and deontology. There is very little in ethical egoism or relativism that lines up with Confucianism. I believe that virtue ethics, however, as laid out in Alasdair Maclntyre’s book After Virtue bears a striking resemblance to Confucianism.
One important feature of Confucianism, according to John Koller, is that it is an ssentially humanist philosophy; in other words, human beings are the ultimate source of values. This is in apposition to Supernaturalism”which claims that values ultimately come from God, and naturalism”which believes that values come from nature. Thus, Confucianism, answers the question of “How can goodness and harmony be achieved? ” by looking for exemplars and principles in humanity itself. This is strikingly similar to the picture that Alasdair Maclntyre paints of the world.
According to Maclntyre, most of the ethical language and arguments that are thrown around between ethicists and even everyday people is fundamentally ncomprehensible or incoherent. Ethical prescriptions used to be based on a common belief in God and the ways in which He has ordered the universe. In today’s world, however, we no longer share that common belief, but we have kept the structures and language of our old ethical systems without the foundation stones on which they were originally built.
To remedy this ailment, Maclntyre proposes going back to a kind of virtue ethics, an essentially humanist philosophy that defines virtuous behavior as what a good man would do. Like Confucianism, virtue ethics looks to neither God nor nature, but rather humanity to find the principles by which o live. Furthermore, both Confucianism and virtue ethics focus less on the rightness of actions themselves, but rather on the development of virtuous people.
Koller, notes “The Confucian idea that virtue, rather than law, should be the basis of government… “. Similarly, virtue ethics sees ethical behavior as ultimately driven by character, not by rules (deontology) or consequences (utilitarianism). Both Confucianism and virtue ethics are interested in cultivating people “skillful” in doing good as the basis of a stable society. Confucianism’s similarities to virtue ethics By ifasoldt
Brazil’s Gol argumentative essay help online: argumentative essay help online
What were the benefits to Gol of a listing on the New York stock exchange in addition to the San Paulo Bovespa? According to its strategy, Gol wanted to get a solid group of long-term investors that understood the business and a group of research analysts that understood this sector in order to exploit its expertise to achieve its (Gol’s) goals. If we take a closer look at the majority of investors in the company, they have high positions in trade of the equities of Jet Blue, Southwest and Ryanair.
That’s mean that they understand the business in this sector. The benefit of a listing on the NYSE in addition to the Bovespa was that they reached investors based in South America (Gol strives to be a low-cost carrier in South America) as well as investors based in USA Oet Blue, Southwest). 2. Why do you think the Gol stock offering was oversubscribed? Because Gol is one of the most profitable airline in the world, that operates in a growing industry.
It is popular and successful company offering ervices that are highly rated by customers and the expected value of the company will most probably rise up according to the positive prognosis and Gol’s strategic plans. 3. Do you think Gol would have raised as much money if it had Just listed on the New Sao Paulo exchange? Absolutely not, the US investors would not have easy access to the stock exchange, which offering the Gol’s stocks, if it would be located in South America only. Moreover, the majority of investors are engaged in trading with the equities of JetBlue, Southwest and Ryanair (in the US). How might the Joint listing of the New York and San Paulo stock exchanges affect Gol’s ability to raise additional capital in the future? The advantage of offering Gol’s stocks over both stock exchanges is that more investors have an access to those stocks. New investors might come up. Also, new investors who are share holders of other companies operating in another sector (e. g. aircraft factory industry) might strike a deal or bargain between Gol and the other companies. It might rise up the value of the company and improve its profitability.
State Government Outline popular mba argumentative essay help: popular mba argumentative essay help
The state government of Georgia is the United States governmental body established by the Georgia State Constitution. Georgia is a republican form of government with three branches legislative, executive and Judiciary. The Georgia general assembly is the state legislature of the state of Georgia. It is bicameral consisting of the senate and the House of Representatives, The general assemblys 236 members serve two year terms and are directly elected by constituents of their district. The general state onstitution vests all legislative power in the General Assembly.
The general assembly meets in the Georgia state capital Atlanta, Georgia In Georgia the executive branch is the largest with 99% of the state’s budget devoted to its activities. In doing so, the governor yields strong wields strong budgetary powers. Georgia has 14 Congressional districts, an increase in one seat following the 2010 United States’ Census. Executive Authority rests with the governor in the state of Georgia. The governor and the lieutenant governor presides over the senate while the House of Representatives selects their own speaker.
They are elected on separate ballots to four year terms in office. Georgia recognizes all local units of government as cities so every incorporated town, no matter the size is legally a city. There are more than 25 executive departments in executive branch and hundreds of smaller boards, agencies and commissions. Legislative authority resides in the General Assembly, composed of the Senate and Representatives. The Lieutenant Governor presides over the Senate, while the Houseof Representatives selects their own Speaker. The
Georgia Constitution mandates a maximum of 56 senators, elected from single- member districts, and a minimum of 180 representatives, apportioned among representative districts (which sometimes results in more than one representative per district); there are currently 56 senators and 180 representatives. The term of office for senators and representatives is two years. The laws enacted by the General Assembly are codified in the Official Code of Georgia Annotated. To be elected as governor a person must be at least thirty six years old and must have been a United
States citizen for fifteen years and a Georgia resident for six years. Governors serve a four year term of office and may serve no more than two consecutive terms. Georgia’s judicial system consist of ascending levels of courts. The most important trial court in Georgia’s Judicial branch is the superior court. The state is divided into circuits with one or more superior-court Judges elected in each circuit. Local government is the oldest form of government in Georgia. There are three types of local governments in Georgia counties, cities and special districts.
Georgia has four consolidated city-county governments. The House of Representatives consists of 180 members from regions around the state. Each January the House convenes to set an annual operating budget, amend the prior year’s budget and craft laws to address issues ranging from education reform to transportation investments. Georgia Senate each January, 56 senators meet to set an annual operating budget, amend the current year’s budget and craft laws that range from promoting business to keeping health care spending in check.
The legislature of Georgia is the General Assembly, a bicameral body consisting ot the Senate and the House ot Representatives. The Senate has 56 members and the House has 180 members. Each member of the legislature represents geographically distinct districts from which each voter may give support to one candidate for each body. For most of its history, the state of Georgia, used an unusual county unit system by which districts were drawn such that each had the same area.
However, population growth in cities across the state led to he rural population, which was in relative decline, having disproportionate power in government. Both senators and representatives have terms of two years. There are no limits on the number of terms any person may serve. The highest Judiciary power in Georgia is the Supreme Court, which is composed of seven Judges. The state also has a Court of Appeals made of 12 Judges. Georgia is divided into 49 Judicial circuits, each of which has a Superior Court consisting of local citizens numbering between two and 19 members depending on the circuit population.
Under the 1983 Constitution, Georgia also has magistrate courts, probate courts, Juvenile courts, state courts; the General Assembly may also authorize municipal courts. Other courts, including county recorder’s courts, civil courts and other agencies in existence on June 30, 1983, may continue with the same Jurisdiction until otherwise provided by law. Each county in Georgia has at least one superior court, magistrate court, probate court, and where needed a state court and a Juvenile court; in the absence of a state court or a Juvenile court, the superior court exercises that Jurisdiction.
Representation of Amir’s Life by Khaled Hosseini essay help free: essay help free
The author Hosseini presents a turning point in Amir’s life by using pathetic fallacy “a crisp San Francisco breeze”. The adjective “crisp” symbolises the fresh, new start chapter of Amir’s Journey. This declarative sentence also parallels the opening scene in the first chapter where the mood is described as “frigid” and “overcast” depicting a dark and grim atmosphere.
Furthermore, the personification “the past always claws its way out” and the verbs “peeking” and “crouching” show the immediate action of hiding that Amir has possessed throughout his whole life. In contrast, in this turning point Amir has now come to the realisation that there is “a way to be good again”, a way to redeem himself for being such a coward in the past. Whilst in the park, Amir watches “a man toss a football to his son” which foreshadows the later event of Amir taking in Hassan’s young child, Sohrab.
Hassan’s murder by the Taliban (resulting in Sohrab becoming an orphan) also marks a turning point in Amir’s quest for redemption. To Amir, Hassan’s death does not only mean the death of a friendship, but also that he can never apologise to Hassan for the allowing of his rape and blaming/lying to him about his stolen money. However, when Amir receives a phone call from a very sick Rahim Khan stating “he knew about Assef, the kite, the money’ initially suggests that Amir will have to live with the guilt of his foolish actions ermanently.
The following short, dramatic sentence “he has always known” and the adverb “always” suggests that throughout these years, even though Amir thought he had escaped his past by creating a new life for himself in California, he will never be freed from his guilt until he finds a way to make amends for his selfish actions. Therefore, when Rahim Khan says “there is a way to be good again”, Amir knows that he must travel back to his war-torn Afghanistan to rescue Sohrab and give him ulfilling life that, as a result of Amir’s selfish actions, he stole from Hassan.
Furthermore, going to Kabul becomes a test of Amir’s honour, loyalty, and manhood. Amir is clearly afraid to go. He knows the city is extremely dangerous, and in returning there he would risk everything he has, including his life and the welfare of his family. Therefore by rescuing Sohrab, Amir can become the man that Baba always wanted him to be, and he can finally atone for the ways he failed Hassan as a friend.
Deceptive advertising aqa unit 5 biology synoptic essay help: aqa unit 5 biology synoptic essay help
A bartender spreads Nutella on a crepe in a Rome creperie. Alberto Pellaschiar/AP When I was in high school, one of my French teachers ” a person whose opinion I trusted without question ” told me that Nutella was, essentially, French peanut butter. For years I clung to the belief that the chocolaty hazelnut spread slathered on bread was a good-for-me meal. When friends called me crazy, it only took a quick
Google search to learn that even though you can find Nutella in the peanut butter aisle, it isn’t exactly a straight-up nutritional substitute. The discovery shouldn’t have been much of a shock, I suppose. A glance at the Nutella label would reveal the first ingredient is sugar, followed by palm oil. And how could something that tastes so good be as healthy as, say, a bowl of Fiber One? Perhaps because I had spent so many years blithely eating Nutella and toast for breakfast, I took special interest in the case of Athena Hohenberg, the named plaintiff in a proposed class action against Ferrero, the company that makes Nutella.
The California mom alleges in her legal complaint that she fed her 4-year-old daughter Nutella after seeing ads that represented the spread as “nutritious” or a “healthy breakfast. ” But last December, Hohenberg’s perception changed. That’s when she learned from friends that, as her complaint says, “Nutella was in fact not a ‘healthy’ ‘nutritious’ food but instead was the next best thing to a candy bar. ” Nutella contains 21 grams of sugar per serving. Half the 200 calories in a two tablespoon serving come from fat. Ferrero spokeswoman Elise Titan wouldn’t comment on the specifics of the lawsuit, but she aid Ferrero stands behind its product.
Not withstanding my own youthful Nutella experience, how could a mom mistake the spread for health food? I mean, the stuff tastes like chocolate. “So does Ovaltine,” Hohenberg’s lawyer Ronald Marron told Shots, adding that there are health benefits associated with eating chocolate. Hohenberg wasnt available to speak with us herself. Among other things, Hohenberg’s lawsuit seeks a stop to Ferrero’s marketing of Nutella as being “healthy,” run corrected ads to inform the public that Nutella isn’t healthy, and return money the company earned from “any wrongful act or practice.
Marron concedes there will be critics of the suit, saying, “Some people might think that this lawsuit never should have been filed. But we want to hold foodmakers accountable. ” To see some of the health claims, Marron says look no turtner than Nutella’s website. He and Honenberg arent the only ones to question the Nutella marketing messages. Jennifer Harris, the director of marketing initiatives at the Rudd Center for Food Policy at Yale University, which tracks food advertising, says her organization noticed the Nutella ads in question about six months ago. “They seemed pretty outrageous,” she tells Shots.
Harris says that food companies highlight the positive aspects of their food ” and they dont communicate the bad things. “The main problem [with Nutella] is it has 21 grams of sugar, which is 5 teaspoons of sugar,” she says. “That’s obviously not healthy. ” Instead, the company focuses on the low sodium, the hazelnuts or the skim milk in Nutella. “This is one reason the public health community thinks there needs to be more regulation over what is allowed to be promoted as healthy,” she adds. Marron says he expects that the court will decide whether to certify the case as a class action within a year, unless there are other filings
SlucaJ Reebok patika: Federal Trade Commission, Plaintiff v. Reebok International Ltd. , doing business as Reebok, Defendant. The Federal Trade Commission announced today that Reebok has agreed to pay $25 million to settle charges it misled consumers with false claims about EasyTone walking shoes and RunTone running shoes. Ads for Reeboks toning shoes boasted lab tests had proved the sole’s special design would help lead to a more perfect body. It’s the shoe proven to work your hamstrings and calves up to 11 percent harder and tone your butt up to 28 percent more than regular sneakers,” a arrator said in one such TV ad. Just by walking. ” In the TV spots, some of which aired on ABC, the scientific claims were underscored by close-up shots of perfectly toned legs and tight backsides. But in settlement papers filed today in a federal court, the FTC said the claims were false. “In truth and in fact,” the settlement agreement reads, “laboratory tests do not show that when compared to walking in a typical walking shoe, walking in EasyTone footwear will improve muscle tone and strength by 28 percent in the gluteus maximus, 11 percent in the hamstrings and 11 percent in the calves. “The consumers expected to get a workout.
Not to get worked over,” David Vladeck, director of the FTC’s Bureau of Consumer Protection, told reporters. “Advertisers cannot make claims about their products, particularly not objective claims like this, without having some basis for it. That’s the law. ” The ads ran in 2009 and 2010, but Reebok pulled them off the air and out of magazines after the FTC began its investigation. After it’s approved by the court, the $25 million will go into a pot for consumer refunds. Consumers can file online to receive a refund at: http://ftc. ov/reebok In a prepared statement Reebok insisted, “We stand behind our EasyTone technology. “Settling does not mean we agree with the FTC’s allegations,” the statement reads. “We do not. We have received overwhelmingly enthusiastic feedback from thousands of EasyTone customers, and we remain committed to the further development of our EasyTone line of products. ” The market for toning shoes has exploded in recent years. The FTC said sales of the shoes, which are designed with soles that create instability, increased from $17 million in 2008 to “close to $1 billion” last year. The settlement referenced in this story can be read here: http:// mw. ‘. ttc. gov/os/caselist/1023070/index. ntm Ovo Je ( E) kako I na koli nacin da oni koli su kupili patike dobiJu novac nazad(znaci onih 25 mil. Su za to) Refunds Stemming From Reebok’s Settlement With FTC Mailed to Consumers Who Bought EasyTone and RunTone Shoes and EasyTone Apparel Company Paid $25 Million for Refunds to Settle FTC Charges of Deceptive Advertising In connection with the Federal Trade Commission’s settlement with Reebok International Ltd, a settlement administrator is mailing approximately 31 5,000 checks to consumers who bought llegedly deceptively advertised toning shoes and apparel from the company.
Ads for Reeboks toning shoes claimed that sole technology featuring pockets of moving air creates “micro instability’ that tones and strengthens muscles as you walk or run. EVO OVDE MOZDA BOLJE OBJASNJEN OVA] SLUCAJ… kOJi mama moze da optse u zahtevima tvoJe faktori,istoriJat cinJenica,pravni okvir. . Reebok to Pay $25 Million in Customer Refunds To Settle FTC Charges of Deceptive Advertising of EasyTone and RunTone Shoes Settlement Order Prohibits Reebok from Making Unsupported Claims that ‘Toning Shoes’ Strengthen, Tone
Muscles In its ongoing effort to stem overhyped advertising claims, the Federal Trade Commission announced that Reebok International Ltd. has agreed to resolve charges that the company deceptively advertised “toning shoes,” which it claimed would provide extra tone and strength to leg and buttock muscles. Reebok will pay $25 million as part of the settlement agreement. The funds will be made available for consumer refunds either directly from the FTC or through a court-approved class action lawsuit.
Consumers who bought Reebok toning shoes or toning apparel can submit a claim here. The FTC wants national advertisers to understand that they must exercise some responsibility and ensure that their claims for fitness gear are supported by sound science,” said David Vladeck, Director of the FTC’s Bureau of Consumer Protection. Consumers should carefully evaluate advertising claims for work-out gear and exercise equipment. For more information see: How’s that Work- out Working Out? Tips on Buying Fitness Gear.
Reeboks EasyTone walking shoes and RunTone running shoes have retailed for $80 to $100 a pair, while EasyTone flip flops have retailed for about $60 a pair. Ads for the shoes claimed that sole technology featuring pockets of moving air creates “micro instability’ that tones and strengthens muscles as you walk or run. According to the FTC complaint, Reebok made unsupported claims in advertisements that walking in its EasyTone shoes and running in its RunTone running shoes strengthen and tone key leg and buttock (gluteus maximus) muscles more than regular shoes.
The FTC’s complaint also alleges that Reebok falsely claimed that walking in EasyTone footwear had been proven to lead to 28 percent more strength and tone in the buttock muscles, 11 percent more trength and tone in the hamstring muscles, and 11 percent more strength and tone in the calf muscles than regular walking shoes. Beginning in early 2009, Reebok made its claims through print, television, and Internet advertisements, the FTC alleged. The claims also appeared on shoe boxes and displays in retail stores.
One television ad featured a very fit woman explaining to an audience the benefits of Reebok EasyTone toning shoes. She picks up a shoe from a display and points to a chart showing the muscles that benefit from use of the shoes, while a video camera continues to focus n ner buttoc ks She says the shoes are proven to strengthen hamstrings and calves by up to 11 percent, and that they tone the buttocks “up to 28 percent more than regular sneakers, Just by walking. Under the settlement, Reebok is barred from: making claims that toning shoes and other toning apparel are effective in strengthening muscles, or that using the footwear will result in a specific percentage or amount of muscle toning or strengthening, unless the claims are true and backed by scientific evidence; making any health or fitness-related efficacy claims for toning hoes and other toning apparel unless the claims are true and backed by scientific evidence; and misrepresenting any tests, studies, or research results regarding toning shoes and other toning apparel.
Ftc. gov/reebok gives consumers the basic facts about the Reebok settlement and directs them to apply for a refund if they are eligible. The Commission vote authorizing the staff to file the complaint and approving the proposed consent decree was 5-0. The FTC filed the complaint and proposed consent decree in the U. S. District Court for the Northern District of Ohio on September 28, 011. The proposed consent decree is subject to court approval.
As part of its efforts to stem overhyped health claims, the FTC last year alleged that Reebok deceptively advertised its “toning shoes” by claiming that consumers wearing the shoes would strengthen and tone leg and buttock muscles more than by wearing regular shoes. Reebok paid $25 million for refunds as part of its settlement agreement with the agency. The amount each consumer gets back is based on the amount the consumer claimed to have spent on the products. Consumers will receive approximately 87 percent of he amount on their claim forms that was submitted and approved.
The deadline for filing a refund request has expired. Under the terms of the FTC settlement, the funds were made available through a court-approved class action lawsuit. Rust Consulting, Inc. , the court approved settlement administrator, will begin mailing the checks on August 8, 2012 to eligible consumers who submitted a valid claim for a refund. The checks must be cashed on or before November 6, 2012. Consumers who have questions should call 1-888-398-5389. The FTC never requires consumers to pay money or provide information before redress checks can be cashed.
Family reflection cheap essay help: cheap essay help
Family reflection BY mk21366 Family is one of the primitive institutions in society. Its organization and the relationship between generations shape values formation, economic outcomes and may even influences national institutions. This primitive institution though is also a group of people who interact and influence each other. The family that will be presented in this paper, let’s call them the Adams family is a four member family that the writer of the present knows for nearly 20 years. Mr. Adams is the owner of a company and he is a well respected person in the specific business despite.
He has never attended University. Mrs. Adams is a c. o. executive in a multinational company, ever since her University graduation and she is also considered to be a successful professional. They are the parents of two male aged 24 and 26 and were married around the age of 25. Their eldest son works in his father company and the youngest lives and works abroad. Mr. Adams comes from a troubled family, he has one brother, with whom no contact exists for many years, and their mother was the second wife of their father.
His father was a troubled man compulsively Jealous of his ife often psychologically abusing his wife and he had beaten her twice one of them was in front of Mr. Adams who protected her and threaten his warned his father never to do so again. His mother was a traditional passive person nearly unable to support and protect herself and believed that men have every right to be authoritative. His father’s Jealousy for his second wife was rationalized due his first wife’s cheating on him with his brother. His father owned a company in the same field Mr. Adams is activated and his mother a housewife.
Mrs. Adams comes also rom a troubled family, her father was a gambler and her mother was an alcoholic, to this alcoholic woman Mr. and Mrs. Adams assigned the care giving of their children. She had a fatal stroke in the kids’ presence 14 years ago. Mrs. Adams father was an accountant who was prematurely retired because of a heart condition due his weight and ner mother was a nousewite. Her tamer’s gambling and early retirement caused financial problems and insecurity to the family, Mr. Adams who was working at the family business supported Mrs. Adams during her studies at the University.
Both Mr. and Mrs. Adams used to work long hours and were determined to succeed in their professions and earn us more money as possible. They always valued powerful and rich people and put great effort to improve their social status and they have achieved that. Their way of living has been, rather superficial following the trends of the Greek society over the recent years. They live in a 300 m 2 house in the suburb, travelling a lot to exotic places and in general live a luxury life. They value and respect others on the basis of their financial and social status, especially Mrs.
Adams, and this has ffected also their children who quite often refer to their housekeeper as the “slave”, the specific housekeeper is an educated woman a financial refugee from the former Soviet Union. None of the children ever attended university or was keen to be an educated person and until recently they all lived under the same roof. When their eldest son reached the adolescent years he presented symptoms of deviant behavior including marihuana use, arrests for graffiti and aggressive behavior. Two years ago Mr. Adams discovered that his youngest son was a heroin user.
He found out about he addiction only because of the fact that his son fell into o comma. Until that day he had not realized anything even though they lived and worked together. Mrs. Adams on the other hand knew all about the problem, her son had written a letter he passed to his mother, in this letter he admitted his addiction and asked for her help. In her point of view she was helping him trying to spend time with him, something that she did not use to do before, going out with him, hiding the problem from her husband and not consulting a specialist. As mentioned above both Mr. and Mrs.
Adams, worked hard to achieve a better social and economical status spending limited time with their children, even on holidays. They promoted a life style for their children which was based on their suppressed childhood wishes like piano and painting lessons and complained when the children refused to go along. Mr. Adams was dominated by his own father and grew up in a severe environment where strict rules were applied. Those rules originated from his father’s need to have absolute control on his wife and his fear that she might cheat on him, a fear he felt until the day died t the age of 85, always suspecting that Mr.
Adams was covering up his mother. As a father Mr. Adams was determined not to be strict at all, he claims that he tried to have an open and trusted relation with his children and never doubted or checked on them. This attitude did not change even when both children failed in their school exams for the first time. Nobody bothered to improve their educational level, instead the children were sent to a luxury summer camping while Mr. and Mrs. Adams left for their holiday trip.
No rules were set even after a call from the local police station here the eldest son was taken after he was caught for graffiti on private property. Graffiti on public and private property was his idea of entertainment. The relation of Mr. and Mrs. Adams could be characterized as a detached one, they both have been involved in intimate relations with other people, and this was a situation they both knew but avoid discussing about it. They only talked about separation twice over the years but decided to continue their marriage for their children’s shake.
Her relation with her children was also detached, both children from time to time omplained in public mentioning that sne did not use to caress them, or cook tor them, or that when she and her husband were away for vacation she used to ask the housekeeper not to work during her absence despite that the two children were living at home, or that she used to call and remind them to take care of the dog in a way that really bothered them; you two animals take care of my baby. She is a superficial fashion victim acting always in a trendy way. The eldest son remembers that she used to tie his brother with a leash as soon as he started walking.
Mrs. Adams was surprised of her son’s memory of a fact she had forgotten and besides that was trendy back then as she said. She also believes that when you do not speak about a problem this does no longer exist or will automatically go away. Based on this belief she thought that if she would spend time with her son, his addiction problem would go away. She also claimed fear that her husband would leave her if he found out about this, so he persuaded her other son not to reveal the problem. Both parents did not notice the change in their son’s behavior or felt comfortable with xcuses that he was tired when he was “distracted”.
They both were upset when the father found out about the addiction. Mrs. , Adams as a mother kept a close relation with her youngest son, whom she manipulated completely. Both parents had a strange attitude towards their children; they never set rules or limits trusting that their children would behave as adults and on the other hand whenever a threat to their marriage would appear they both claimed that they should stay married for their children shake and that their children need them. About a year ago Mr. Adams decided to leave his home and ask for a divorce. Mrs. Adams talked him out of this; one of her arguments was their addicted son.
Their son was already living in another country, had long ago overcome the withdrawal symptoms of his addiction, he was and still is regularly seeing a therapist, he lives with a woman with whom he has an intimate relation and recently he got a better Job at customer service of a multinational company of consumable products. The eldest son of the family works in his father’s company and six months ago he moved out the family house to live with a girl he is related to, something that did not make his parents happy, they both entioned their children leaving home made them realize that they are getting older.
This increased the anxiety they experience due to the economical recession. All their life has been concentrated about pursuing of prosperity, a prosperity which of course they shared with their children. And this was their main role in the family. They considered their children education and culture as part of their social status and never really wondered what the children themselves would like to do with their lives. The difficulties the children faced at school did not alarm the parents, besides here was always the possibility of inheriting their father’s business.
The parents had unresolved issues from their childhood. Issues, they never faced not even when the Greek therapist of their son pointed out that they should. They all felt relief when their son decided to move to another country, the parents because they would not be obliged to be part of problem solving and thus they would not be obliged to face their repressed difficulties, and the eldest son relieved his guilt because in a way he was the one who introduced his brother to drugs. This family has a weak ierarchy, and usually avoids conflict and definitely avoids facing their problems and the work on them.
The parents were trapped with the children and are unable to resolve the contlict between them. Due to the structure ot their tamilies Mr. and M Adams thought that they were autonomous persons, but they seem to have confused autonomy with isolation. Both of them react with an immature way, and think that the change of scenery will automatically resolve any conflict. They both refuse to resolve their issues and bring to the present the problems of the past. They seem nable to handle the stress and in cases of crisis their anxiety is out of control.
The eldest son also avoids facing and resolving his own issues. The only person in the family who tries to find a way to deal with his problems is the youngest son. He was the most vulnerable person and desperately looking for help. As he was disappointed from his family attitude and unwillingness to face the problem he decided to leave the country, ask for help abroad; find out who he really is and what he wants to do with his life. Amazingly the most vulnerable one seems to be the most willing and determined person to face and resolve his issues.
Blirred lines write my essay help: write my essay help
This is the latest development in the story of how the biggest song of the year became the most controversial of the decade: an unprecedented achievement, though not one that fills Thicke with pride. It seems impossible that anyone with the faintest interest in popular culture could have missed either the song or the controversy, but here is a recap. At the end of March, mid-table R&B singer Thicke, along with producer Pharrell Williams and rapper T’, released Blurred Lines, a libidinous R&B party Jam about a woman in a nightclub who may or not be interested in him.
In April, one blogger branded it a “rape song”, and two months later Tricia Romano of the Daily Beast described it as “rapey”, a word that caught fire in other media outlets. The song might have escaped censure if the video, in which the three male performers goof round with scantily clad (and, in one version, topless) models, had not generated its own separate yet overlapping controversy. “It promotes a very worrying attitude towards sex and consent,” explained Kirsty Haigh, ELISA’s vice-president of services. This is about ensuring that everyone is fully aware that you need enthusiastic consent before sex. The song says: ‘You know you want it. ‘ Well, you cant know they want it unless they tell you they want it. ” Many people who follow pop music closely, however, are surprised that Blurred Lines has become such a lightning rod. “It really id boggle my mind when people started freaking out about it,” says US music critic Maura Johnston. “This is Just a cheesy pickup line song and everyone was like: ‘No, it’s about forcing a woman against her will. There are so many songs out there that are worse about demeaning women. Maybe it’s an easy target because Robin Thicke is kind of slimy. Right now there’s a lot of tension between women and men online so this was a way of women taking a piece of pop culture and saying: ‘No, we’re against this. ‘ But it’s weird to me because I didn’t see it and I still don’t. ” Blurred Lines is not bout rape in the same way that Cop Killer is about the fantasy of killing cops, so it is a question of interpretation.
If you dont think the songs narrator is willing to have sex without consent, then the song seems at worst sleazy, and the reaction overblown. If, however, you think that the concept of “blurred lines” sends a dangerous message to listeners, then it’s explosive. I directed the girls to look into the camera. This is very intentional and they do it most of the time; they are in the power position. I dont think the video is sexist. The lyrics are ridiculous, the guys are silly as fuck. ” (the girls are playing with the guys)
Selling Concept free college essay help: free college essay help
The marketing management philosophy that holds that achieving organizational goals depends on determining the needs and wants of target markets and delivering the desired satisfactions more effectively and efficiently than competitors do. The Selling Concept. This is another common business orientation. It holds that consumers and businesses, if left alone, will ordinarily not buy enough of the selling company’s products. The organization must, therefore, undertake an aggressive selling and promotion effort. This concept assumes that consumers typically sh09w buyi8ng inertia or resistance and must be coaxed into buying.
It also assumes that the company has a whole battery of effective selling and promotional tools to stimulate more buying. Most firms practice the selling concept when they have overcapacity. Their aim is to sell what they make rather than make what the market wants. SELLING CONCEPT The idea that consumers WII not buy enough of the organization’s products unless the organization undertakes large-scale selling and promotion effort. Advantage: When the firm have overcapacity, selling concept become beneficial to sell their product. lt can also be applicable in non-profit organizations or societies See the example).
Disadvantage: Selling is largely a wasteful activity because a company truly practicing marketing concept will not need to sell its product. Marketing make selling redundant. Selling consume a lot of organizational resources, as the company force the product on customer. Example: A political party, will vigorously sell its candidate to voters as a fantastic person for the Job. The candidate works hard at selling him or herself – shaking hands, kissing babies, meeting donors and making speeches. Much money also has to be spent on radio and television advertising, posters and mailings.
Candidate flaws are often hidden from the public because the aim is to get the sale, not to worry about consumer satisfaction afterwards. The third marketing philosophy is called the “selling concept”. The selling concept proposes that the basic function of the organization is to convince people to purchase its products. Perhaps the – known practitioner of the selling concept in the arts is Danny Newman (1977), who advocates reliance on subscription sales as the means of ensuring survival. His approach relies on sales-stimulating devices such as discounting and advertising.
With regards to promotion, Newman suggests the importance of “floridity of statement and showmanship… we should fill our brochures with readable, entertaining, bright material. Above all, they must be invested with selling thrust”. The problem with this approach is that it assumes that, for any product, a market can be generated through promotional and pricing manipulations. This assumption, especially in the arts, may not be warranted. Furthermore, the strategy that accompanies the selling concept is often undirected and unfocused in an effort to create mass appeal.
This can result in an ineffective promotional campaign and ultimately can disillusion customers whose expectations are inflated and then not realized. The selling concept: Consumer and business, if left along, wont buy enough of the organization’s products. The concept is practiced most aggressively with unsought goods. Goods that buyers do not think of buying, such as insurance and encyclopedia. Also practiced in overcapacity. Aim is to sell what is made rather than what market wants. Consumers will buy products only if the company promotes/ sells these products. The Selling Concept
The selling concept holds the idea- “consumers will not buy enough of the firm’s products unless it undertakes a large-scale selling and promotion effort”. Here the management focuses on creating sales transactions rather than on building long- term, profitable customer relationships. In other words; the aim is to sell what the company makes rather than making what the market wants. Such aggressive selling program carries very high risks. In selling concept the marketer assumes that customers will coaxed into buying the product will like it, if they don’t like it, they will ossibly forget their disappointment and buy it again later.
This is usually very poor and costly assumption. Typically the selling concept is practiced with unsought goods. Unsought goods are that buyers do not normally think of buying, such as insurance or blood donations. These industries must be good at tracking down prospects and selling them on a product’s benefits. 1 . undertakes a large-scale selling and promotion effort 2. The Selling Concept is suitable with unsought goods”those that buyers do not normally think of buying, such as insurance or blood donations. . Focus of the selling concept starts at the production level. . Any company following selling concept undertakes a high risk. 5. The Selling Concept assumes -“customers who are coaxed into buying the product will like it. Or, if they don’t like it, they will possibly forget their disappointment and buy it again later. 6. The Selling Concept makes poor assumptions. The selling concept The selling concept holds that customers and businesses, if left alone, will ordinarily, not buy enough ot the organization’s products The organization must, theretore, ndertake an aggressive selling and promotion effort.
The selling concept is epitomized in the thinking of Sergio Zyman, Coca-Cola’s former vice president of marketing: The purpose of marketing is to sell more stuff to more people more often for more money in order to make more profit. The selling concept is practiced most aggressively with unsought goods, goods that buyers normally do not think of buying, such as insurance, encyclopedia, and funeral plots. Most firms practice the selling concept when they have overcapacity. Their aim is to sell what they make rather than make what the market wants. However, marketing based on hard selling carries high risks.
It assumes that customers who are coaxed into buying a product will like it; and if they do not, they will not return it or bad-mouth it or complain to consumer organizations, or they might even buy it again. The sales concept By the early 1930’s however, mass production had become commonplace, competition had increased, and there was little unfulfilled demand. Around this time, firms began to practice the sales concept ( or selling concept), under which companies not only would produce the products, but also would try to convince ustomers to buy them through advertising and personal selling.
Before producing a product, the key questions were: Can we sell the product? Can we charge enough for it? The sales concept paid little attention to whether the product actually was needed; the goal simply was to beat the competition to the sale with little regard to customer satisfaction. Marketing was a function that was performed after the product was developed and produced, and many people came to associate marketing with hard selling. Even today, many people us the word “marketing” when they really mean sales.
Hospital & Health Care Industry in India my assignment essay help: my assignment essay help
Hospital and Healthcare Industry Abstract Health care may be defined as “The prevention, treatment, management of illness and the preservation of mental and physical well-being through the services offered by the medical and allied health professionals. ”From the ages of self medication, Indian health care industry has come of ages during the recent times. Indian health care industry has emerged as one of the most challenging as well as largest service sector industry in the country. With the 2nd largest population in the world & 70% of it living in villages, it has become a challenge to provide medical services to one and all.
On the other side it also gives both public as well as private players a huge market to play. The role of Indian government in providing medical facilities is very important as every individual can’t afford the huge bills of private hospitals. Government has been helping below poverty line people by providing free medical facilities time & again. In India an individual can chose amongst various alternatives of medication like Allopathic, homeopathy, Ayurvedic etc. Allopathic currently leads all other forms of medication.
India provides various world class multi specialty hospitals and is attracting both patients & specialists from the world over. Here in our project, we are learning the business model of any of the key players in the hospital industry. We are trying to analyze the subject by doing an in-depth industry analysis, which includes industry lucrativeness, overall growth and profitability of the industry. A comparative analysis of Indian hospitals industry Vis-a- via global hospital industry has been done to gain a perspective on various options an Indian consumer has with respect to their foreign counter part.
We have also performed following analysis pertaining to the HOSPITAL INDUSTRY: 1. POTER’s five force 2. PEST Analysis. In order to analyze & comprehend any business model specific to a player we also need to do in depth study of the company as a whole. We have decided to analyze the business model of APOLLO HOSPITALS, other business areas APOLLO is into, revenue growth of APOLLO, its competitors, path breaking developments at APOLLO & expertise of APOLLO. We also need to understand and analyze the weaknesses, strengths, opportunities & threats to APOLLO HOSPITALS.
Along with this we have to study the strategies applied by APOLLO hospitals since its inception & changes made by them as & when required. INTRODUCTION Industry Overview Globally, India contributes 20 per cent to the global disease burden, ranks 171 in a list of 175 countries on public health spending, and is popularly known as the cardiac and the diabetes capital of the world. This shows that there is a high need of medical facilities in India. The healthcare industry has matured into a big sector in India with a contribution to the GDP of 5. % making it the third largest sector. The sector is also least affected by recession due to constant demand. Currently the in India the bed ratio is 1 per 1000 and lags behind the WHO norms of 1 per 300, this shows that there is huge potential in the industry of about 75000 to 1000000 more beds. With a CAGR (compound annual growth rate) of 15-17% in this sector the industry is lucrative with 1, 80,000 Crore of projections by year 2012. It is a social sector with state and central government providing subsidies and grants.
It includes hospitals, health insurance, medical software, health equipments and pharmacy. The hospital industry accounts for half the healthcare sector’s revenues and is estimated to be worth USD $22 billion and expected to grow to USD $32 billion by 2011. With average household consumption expected to increase by more than seven per cent per annum, the annual healthcare expenditure is projected to grow at 10 per cent and also the number of insured is likely to jump from 100 million to 220 million. The number of players in the industry have increased many folds with presence in every sector i. . hospitals, medicine retail, clinics, diagnostics and research. The government with the help of private players is going to make investments of USD 1-2 billion and make this industry as one of the top five in terms of healthcare worldwide. India Health Infrastructure Number of Hospitals in different zones in India Share of private expenditure as a percentage of total expenditure on healthcare has grown to nearly 80 per cent over the last decade and it is further expected to increase more than $40 billion by 2012.
With the potential to return 30-40 percent margins and decreasing public sector investments, the hospital segment will be dominated by the private hospitals. It is estimated that nearly 75 per cent of all hospitals and 40 per cent of hospital beds in the country are in the private sector. The private sector provides 60 per cent of all outpatient care in India and as much as 40 per cent of all in-patient care. Private vs. Government Spending in India THREAT OF NEW ENTRANT ANALYSIS * Is quite high * As the profit in this industry is high new competitors are attracted towards the industry. Also many specialized hospitals (comparative low investment) are opened which are curbing the patient from multi specialty hospitals. Porter’s Five Forces THREAT OF SUBSTITUTE BUYER POWER SUPPLIER POWER * Threat of substitute is low to moderate. * As in case of non emergency cases people prefer homeopathy or naturopathy. * Buyer’s power is moderate to high. * And also there is threat of substitution. * Ex Shifting to other medicine like ayurveda or natural care. COMPETITIVE RIVALRY IS HIGH * Is moderate * There are surgical instruments which are developed by only few players n which case the supplier power is high. * But there are some common instruments which are manufactured by many players in which case supplier power is low. PEST ANALYSIS 1) Political Analysis: * A part of the budget is allocated for the development of healthcare facilities. * To encourage investment in the health care sector, government of India has allowed 100% FDI under the automatic route. * Government has also accorded the infrastructure status to the hospitals and has announced Lower tariffs (between 5–8 per cent) on medical equipment and devices. Tax benefit is now available to hospitals which are constructed and have started or would start functioning at any time during the period beginning the 1st day of April, 2008 and ending on the 31st day of March, 2013. * Customs duty exemption on specific personal medical aids like crutches, wheel-chairs, walking frames and artificial limbs. 2) Economic Analysis: * Strong GDP growth rate of India over the past few years (8%) * Growth in GDP from the sector is expected to increase from 5. 5% in 2009 to 7% in 2012. Government has made loans easily available and thus people with limited means could avail better/specialized treatment 3) Socio- Cultural Environment Analysis: * Increasing disposable income of the people. * More number of people approaching the age of 60. * Medical facilities have increased since there is more awareness of healthcare among the population * Certain percentages of beds have to be kept for people below poverty line for e. g. in Mumbai, 20% of beds has to be kept reserved for poor people. * Taking care of the needs of BPL people in both rural and urban India. These hospitals provide open counseling and relief centers; teach hygiene, sanitation to the masses. 4) Technological Environment Analysis: * Breakthrough innovation in the field of specialized equipment for e. g. test tube baby. * Communication has managed to bridge the gap between places located at long distance. * Mobility of medical services has improved the health conditions in rural parts. * Mobile phones, credit cards (for payment purposes) etc have made doctors and medical facilities easily available. * Increasing complexity of hospital care
Key Drivers of the Hospital Industry 1. Growing population and economy- One driver of growth in the healthcare sector is India’s booming population which is currently 1. 1 billion and increasing at a 2% annual rate. By 2030, India is expected to surpass China as the world’s most populous nation. By 2050, the population is projected to reach 1. 6 billion. This population increase is due in part to a decline in infant mortality and the result of better healthcare facilities. By 2025, an estimated 189 million Indians will be at least 60 years of age—triple the number in 2004.
The growing elderly population will place an enormous burden on India’s healthcare infrastructure. The Indian economy, estimated at roughly $1 trillion, is growing in tandem with the population. Goldman Sachs predicts that the Indian economy will expand by at least 5% annually for the next 45 years and that it will be the only emerging economy to maintain such a robust pace of growth. 2. Expanding middle class India traditionally has been a rural, agrarian economy. Nearly three quarters of the population still lives in rural areas, and as of 2004, an estimated 27. 5% of Indians were living below the national poverty line.
Some 300 million people in India live on less than a dollar a day, and more than 50% of all children are malnourished. India’s thriving economy is driving urbanization and creating an expanding middle class, with more disposable income to spend on healthcare. While per capita income was $620 in 2005, over 150 million. Indians have annual incomes of more than $1,000, and many who work in the business services sector earn as much as $20,000 a year. 3. Rise of diseases- Another factor driving the growth of India’s healthcare sector is at a rise in both infectious and chronic degenerative diseases.
In addition to battling infectious diseases, India is struggling with the emergence of diseases such as AIDS as well as food- and water-borne illnesses. Moreover as Indians live more affluent lives and adopt unhealthy western diets that are high in fat and sugar, the country is experiencing a rise in lifestyle diseases such as hypertension, cancer, and diabetes, which is reaching epidemic proportions. Over the next 5-10 years, lifestyle diseases are expected to grow at a faster rate than infectious diseases in India, and to result in an increase in cost per treatment. . Medical tourism- Medical tourism is one of the major external drivers of growth of the Indian healthcare sector as a whole. The emergence of India as a destination for medical tourism leverages the country’s well educated, English-speaking medical staff, state-of-the art private hospitals and diagnostic facilities, and relatively low cost to address the spiraling healthcare costs of the western world. India provides best-in-class treatment, in some cases at less than one-tenth the cost incurred in the US.
India’s private hospitals excel in fields such as cardiology, joint replacement, orthopaedic surgery, gastroenterology, ophthalmology, transplants and urology. 5. Emerging health insurance market- In recent years, there has been a liberalization of the Indian healthcare sector to allow for a much-needed private insurance market to emerge. Due to liberalization and a growing middle class with increased spending power, there has been an increase in the number of insurance policies issued in the country. In 2001-02, 7. 5 million policies were sold. By 2003-4, the number of policies issued had increased by 37%, to 10. million. The Insurance Regulatory and Development Authority (IRDA) eliminated tariffs on general insurance as of January 1, 2007, and this move drove additional growth of private insurance products. Market Share of Key Players in Health Insurance Companies (2008) Best Practices Followed in the Industry * Consolidation, from fragmented systems transition into large multispecialty groups and truly integrated systems. * Greater vertical and horizontal integration of care and the employment of uniform, data-based quality standards that will reduce wide regional variation in care patterns. Accelerated use of cutting-edge outsourcing strategies to reduce costs and improve healthcare value. * Obtaining International certifications for standards so as to get recognized internationally and attract people from all over the world. * Following SOPs (Standard Operating Protocols). * Having a detailed formulary of medicines. * Superior planning and execution of product/services launches. * Strategic Alliances. Example Manipal Cure and Care invested US$ 82 million in a tie-up with Aditya Birla Group and Jubilant Retail for building over 100 health outlets across India by 2012. Usage of Innovative technologies. Major Challenges * India’s hospital industry faces significant shortage of qualified manpower in all categories of doctors, nurses and paramedical staff. * Additionally, building hospitals without a mandatory ‘needs analysis’ in light of catchment area requirements will lead to an uneven development of healthcare delivery infrastructure and hamper optimal utilization of scarce resources. * Affordability of the high cost of technology by consumers of healthcare in India will necessitate significant adaptations to technology in the context of Indian markets.
This is especially important in light of the escalating costs of material and equipment. * Hospitals also face limitations due to significant bureaucratic hurdles in obtaining clearances for setting up new facilities. The other Governmental policies that will hinder growth are lack of a consistent policy on accreditation of healthcare delivery institutions, existence of arcane rules that inhibit participation of private sector in owning and operating medical and paramedical educational institutions, lack of availability of health statistics which could promote proper planning of facilities and low overnment budget allocation to healthcare as an industry. * Rural health care is one of the biggest concerns as more than 60% of our population still lives in rural areas ; there is requirement of proper hospitals all across the rural India * Rising competition, due to the onset of private and foreign players, on one hand improves quality but on the other hand has made holy organization like hospitals a money making machine. * More opportunities abroad are making our young doctors and aspirants to shift to countries like U. S.
A, Canada, and U. K * Government hospital’s pitiable condition ; infrastructure are making the poor either to go to high cost private hospital s or ignore the illness, thereby making the conditions worse. Major Players in the Industry * Public Hospitals like AIIMS, PGI * Apollo * Fortis * Wockhardt(Recently taken over by Fortis) * Max Health Care * Global Hospitals * Manipal Health Systems(MHS) * Narayana Hrudayalaya * Care Hospitals * Aditya Birla Memorial Hospital Company Chosen- Apollo Hospitals Enterprise Limited (AHEL) Company Overview
Incorporated in 1979 as a public company, Apollo hospitals enterprise limited (AHEL) is one of the leading healthcare providers in India and Asia. It is being promoted by Dr. Prathap C Reddy who gave up his practice in the US and came to India to setup a world class infrastructure. It operates at various levels of hospitals and has wide network of 43 hospitals across the country and the world. The company has entered into diagnostic clinics, retail chain for medicines, medical BPO, medical insurance and clinical research. The group is planning to invest Rs 2000 crore, to build around 15 new hospitals, n India, Sri Lanka, Nepal and Malaysia. It maintains the best figures in the healthcare industry of 7. 4 million treated patients and 98. 5 % success rate in 45,000 cardiac surgeries. The group has ramped up its IT infrastructure with the implementation of Hospital Information System (HIS) in its hospitals. Bibliography * India Hospital Report May 2010 by NorthBridge Capital * Healthcare In India- emerging Market Report * Hospital Industry Insight by Cygnus Business Consulting ; Research Pvt. Ltd. * Health Insurance In India. (n. d. ). Retrieved from http://www. healthinsuranceindia. blogspot. com/. * IBEF * CRIS
Is globalisation a good development? history essay help: history essay help
Is globalisation a good development? Nowadays, there are a lot of influences from other countries noticeable in our lives. We can walk into stores founded in the United States or any other possible country. We couldn’t imagine living without having access to famous worldwide brands, stores, food, music and beliefs, which have enriched us through globalisation. Globalisation, defined by people like us, is a very nice thing… unfortunately this doesn’t affect two thirds of the population of this world. l Searching for a single definition of the word is a hopeless task.
As a concept, globalisation does not evoke a single image, but an imagery of disparate meanings. Most people view globalisation as an absence of borders and barriers to trade between nations, not only in concrete products but also in culture and beliefs. On economical, political and cultural aspects there are some who see globalisation as a highly positive force leading to economic liberalism, political democracy and cultural universalism. However, there are also snags attached to it, which will in all probability make you look at this subject differently.
Countries can concentrate on products and services, suited to their climate and the presence of commodity, due to globalisation. This is conducive to the consumers, who have the best and cheapest products imaginary at one’s disposal. However, these products may function well but they most certainly are produced by labourers who are mistreated and live underneath the poverty line of 1 dollar a day. These labourers don’t get the chance to start a business on their own because the multinationals dominate the entire economy.
Therefore little factories in the ountryside, which make relatively expensive products, don’t stand a chance against the multinationals. These labourers make very little money and end up working for a multinational or another big company. With the money they make by selling intermediate goods, they can’t even afford to buy the finished product. So the real value of their money has declined. Just because we want to spend as little money as possible, our products have to travel around the entire world, hailing from low-wage countries, before they finally reach our supermarkets, drugstores and other shops.
Our sources with fossil fuels are beginning to grow empty and air will be polluted by gasses after they are released into the air. This will cause even more environmental problems like deforestation, the growing of the ozone hole, the melting of ice caps and therefore disappearance of animals and humans living space. Because every type of information and goods are spread all around the world, for example via the Internet, we are gradually creating cultural universalism. It would be a pity to lose all the great cultures, even the smallest ones, of which we didn’t even now their existence.
If we continue this globalisation, the population of the world will become more or less the same. We will have similar tastes in music and fashion, we will all communicate in the same language and we will all have the same interests. Just because there will only be one of each left. I think we need to treasure all cultures and differences before we lose them. They way we are trying to set the problems globalisation provoked to rights, is not always as helpful as we think it is.
As an example: an organisation like OXFAM NOVIB ill give a family in Africa mosquito nets to prevent them from being bit by a malaria mosquito. Therefore, this family won’t buy these nets from the local shops anymore and these shops have to close their doors and end up having no income at all to take care of their family. Of course there are also positive effects caused by local development assistance. When a family has been given a cow or a goat, they could sell the milk or cheese, they acquired from these animals. However, this is not always the case.
So we’re still searching for solutions to solve the problems we created hrough globalisation. Therefore we shouldn’t create more. In spite of the advantages of globalisation, I think the disadvantages of globalisation weigh more than the benefits. We have to do Justice to all the people in the less developed countries. The poverty and exploitation of people affect their lives and go by us unnoticed, but the environmental and cultural problems affect us all. We have to form the effects of globalisation a certain way in which the less fortunate people can profit from the benefits Just like we do.
Why I Don’t Believe in God cbest essay help: cbest essay help
Why I Do Not Believe in God In this paper, I will formally and philosophically discuss the arguments posed by Thomas Aquinas and use my own personal opinions and experiences to explain my disagreements with Aquinas and why I do not believe in the existence of God. Whether or not God exists is an argument that has been ongoing since some of the earliest philosophers took it up hundreds of years ago. Many philosophers have stated arguments on this topic, from Thomas Aquinas to David Hume to St. Anselm. To this day, it is one of, if not the most, debated topics. St.
Thomas Aquinas is a noted philosopher known for his empirical arguments for the existence of God. Though Aquinas posed many arguments in favor of this, I will discuss and explain the teleological argument. This argument is built upon the idea that many things in the world which we live exhibit order and standards. Aquinas asserts that where there is a high order such as these, there must be a superior designer or creator who established and enforces such an order. According to Aquinas, this is whom we refer to as God. My issues with Aquinas’ argument most closely follow those of David
Hume, the later philosopher who criticized Aquinas’ assertions. If God were a perfect creator, he would want to create a perfect world for his creatures to live in. An omnibenevolent God would not want evil to exist, and yet it does through both evil actions of people and natural evils such as hurricanes, tornadoes, and other natural disasters. Additionally, many natural laws exist that can have negative effects on mankind still exist (such as falling from the effects of gravity), and we are exposed to these effects despite supposedly having a God who is omnibenevolent and mnipotent.
In addition, it does not seem to make sense that God would not create every creature perfectly, rather than have some be superior than others. Though I was raised in a Christian household and attended church frequently while growing up, my beliefs have shifted as I have grown older because I have not experienced God firsthand or in a very direct way. Recently, I was not sure exactly what my stance on God’s existence was. When I learned of and researched David Hume’s refutation of Aquinas’ argument, it solidified my thoughts.
I agree most directly with Hume’s point of a perfect God not creating a perfect world and the kind of pain and suffering this imposes. I myself, and myriad others, have had loved ones pass away after lengthy battles with cancer or other deadly, tormenting diseases. From personal experience, it makes one question the existence of a higher power because it does not seem right that a God who is supposed to love his creations so much would put them through such trials and tribulations. It is not sensical, and is frustrating to those whom, like me, have been in the situation.
In brief summation, I do not believe in the existence of God. My own personal experiences in addition to David Hume’s well-reasoned philosophical argument have led to this conclusion. Thomas Aquinas’ argument for God’s existence falls short with me in that a perfect creator should not allow such bad things to occur on Earth that do ” wars, famines, disease, murder and other crimes, etc. A God such as the one discussed in this argument that is supposedly omnipotent and omnibenevolent especially should not allow these things to happen, and yet we as a world tace them daily.
A Crime of Compassion my assignment essay help: my assignment essay help
Barbara, a nurse, is accused of “murder”, by the audience of a TV show named the Phil Donahue show. She had a patient, named Mac, who had lung cancer and was resuscitate 52 times. It was between the years of 1970s and 80s, and the law of how many times someone should be resuscitated have not passed yet. Barbara injected Mac with pain medication and did not press the code button until after he was dead. Now after being resuscitated for that amount of time you could only imagine his pain and stress.
The nurse should not be accused of murder because the man “who she urdered” begged for his life to be taken, he was terminally ill, and the doctors were just prolonging his life and not really saving it. Patients, like Mac, have the right to decided if they want to die or not. In the 1970s-1980s, such laws have not been passed yet but out of common courtesy and someone begging to take their life away- what would you do? Mac had decided way before the 52nd resuscitate that he wanted to give up on life. His wife, Maura, even agreed with his decision.
After being a young well put together man that was a cop with an endless cough to someone who an not even stand up by himself, was very overwhelming and the six months of his treatment was not enough. “He begged us: ‘Mercy… for God’s sake, please Just let me go. ” (Huttmann. 187) How many times does a patient have to ask or even beg to take their life before you do so, and it should have not been up to the doctor but up to their family. “.. when no amount of pain medication stilled his moaning and agony… Pain… no more… Barbara… do something… God, let me go. ” (188) Those quotes are proof that the medications were not working and Mac was terminally ill, which means hat he will eventually die. Being alive is basically being able to do things and live on your own, with Mac’s situation he was basically dead. He could only eat liquid food through a tube, have i. v. Solutions enter his veins, an oxygen mask, being soak in perspiration, having bedsores, feces that burned his skin and so on.
Now who really would want to live like that- if he was not dead before then he is definitely dieing a slow painful death. It is understood that the doctors might have had hope for Mac and they was Just doing their Job. “Their Job is not only to prevent death but also to mprove their patients’ quality of life. Many times there is nothing a doctor can do to prevent a patient from dying if the patient has a terminal disease. ” (Baack) The doctors were trying to prevent death obviously but they were not improving Macs quality of life, if anything it was getting worse.
It was also known that he was terminally ill, which means you are only waiting for that day to come. The doctors know that so what exactly are they doing. Mac had Just wanted to be put out of his misery but the doctors were too arrogant and greedy to do so. Obviously, the longer a atient is in the hospital the more money they have to spend. So were the doctors prolonging Mac’s life for the money or did they really believe that a miracle was going to happen. Hospital environment allows the doctors to increase their income significantly by doing multiple and unnecessarily procedures, and longer length of stay for patients. ” (Wedekind) With that being stated the doctors had another human being suffering Just for their best interest. Barbara was accused for murder because she getting get the okay to do so from the doctors but if she did would she have still been accused ot murder or woul they accuse the doctors. (Huttmann 1 9) Maybe it would have been okay or not really a big deal if the doctors gave the “no-code” order.
Barbara did the right thing. She thought about the patient and not herself. Mac was terminally ill and there was no saving him. He wanted to die and was very grateful when Barbara did what she did. It was understood that he was suffering tremendously and wanted all of it to stop. The doctors on the other hand was not thinking about Mac’s health but only focusing on keeping him alive. The longer he is alive the more money they are getting. Barbara is not guilty.
Life my essay help uk: my essay help uk
An examples might be: past and present tense which intertwine and literary terms which evoke and contribute to the central idea of the novel. 8. relate the way in which the title of a novel pertains to and fits the novel itself. 9. trace and discuss the role that suspense plays in a psychological novel. 10. discuss how the author manipulates suspense in order to achieve tension. 1 1 . infer events and meanings not explicitly stated. 12. ite incidents from the story to support the following statement of theme: In order for children to mature into adults they must understand themselves. Questions for Essay and Discussion Usually a novel moves along in time with the events of the story, more or less chronologically. I Am the Cheese does not. Its events are Jumbled together, and this non-linear style of writing is frequently difficult to follow. In I Am the Cheese the author switches from present tense to past tense and back many times. What effect did this style of writing have on you?
Was it easier or more difficult than the usual novels you read? How did it help or hurt the actual story itself? Why do you think Cormier wrote this way? A mystery novel leaves clues and hints to get the reader interested; it causes isinterpretations, and in the end, it resolves the mysteries. What was the mystery, now were you misled, and now did the novel solve the problems? One theme of I Am the Cheese might be the confusion of leaving childhood and attaining adulthood. However, at the end of the novel Adam has not arrived at his maturity. Instead, he is still a teenager and still confused.
Discuss in detail Adam’s confusion, insecurities, and their causes. The title of the novel refers to a nursery rhyme. Discuss two different ways the rhyme fits both the title and the story. Give at least three examples of how Adam/Paul’s false memories conflict with reality. Compare and contrast what he believes truth to be with actuality. 6. I Am the Cheese should be a novel about Adam’s ability to find his true self after years of constant lies about everything. He can not find himself because of his “mental problems,” which were directly caused by years of his parents’ deceit.
Adam confuses reality with memory, truth with lies, and past with present. He does not understand the situations in which he finds himself. Explain how these falsities, which Adam grew up with and believes to be true, make the inability to discover one’s true identity a theme in the novel instead. A psychological novel delves into the thoughts, hopes, weaknesses, and fears of the main character. Psychology, combined with suspense and danger, can create a novel that is very mysterious. Describe the events Cormier uses to reveal Adam’s fragile psyche and how that contributes to the mystery and suspense.
Put any five of the following major events of I Am the Cheese on a timeline in correct chronological order: Mother dies Family put under protection Car crash Father reports story Adam is institutionalized Adam overhears his parents Adam finds birth certificates Study Guide Student Copy PAGES 1 -11 VOCABULARY furiously – rapidly slithering – sliding Thomas Wolfe – American author, wrote You Cant Go Home Again dreary – dull, dark claustrophobic – fear of closed-in places resolve – decide provisions – food reckless – careless omen – a sign about the future wavered – swayed What is the setting of I Am the Cheese?
What is the narrator searching for? What are three things he remembers? Who is introduced in the beginning of the taping? How can Adam be in bed and be telling the story of the bike Journey at the same time? PAGES 29 – 38 sanitarium – asylum wary – cautious ntensity – in a state of excitement implacable – unbothered loping – running easily stalk – to move threateningly camaraderie – friendship apparition – ghost-like overshadowed – was more important than What makes it appear that Brint is a doctor? Is he?
What is the first clue Adam gives? In the long flashback, what two characters walked together? What did they encounter before reaching their destination? PAGES 93 – 106 reverberates – echoes loudly decibel – measurement of sound volume On another narrow country road, Adam is overtaken by the three troublemakers. He tries to feel for something important. What is it? Which one of the boys is driving the car? The next four pages represent conversations between Brint and Adam. What is Adam’s general impression during this interview?
Rock in a Hard Place cheap essay help: cheap essay help
What problems did the Rank Group find with the Hard Rocks three main internal information systems (restaurant operations, merchandising, and financial)? Why was this a problem? Problems the Rank Group found with the Hard Rocks three main internal information systems -Restaurant operations -Merchandising -Financial The Hard Rock Cafe had many problems with their operating, merchandising and financial systems. First, there was no standard system.
Many cafes and franchise owners installed their own systems and these systems did not integrate or ommunicate well with each other. Because of this, the planned Data Warehouse did not work at all. Because these systems did not work well, the IT staff spent all its time trying to fix problems with the systems and had no time for new systems or new development. The system ran on a Linux box that was described as “hackerware”. The system was never able to get better.
Corporate was unable to obtain reliable information and was not able to get any information immediately. Corporate did not know what merchandise was selling and did not have a good idea of what their inancials were (money was Just sitting for over a week and no one knew it). The financial system was not updated often enough. No one trusted the system. There was no consistency in their product names so Corporate could not fgure out what was selling and what wasn’t.
There were no standards across the company, which prevented comparison and analysis among Cafes. 2. What’s the solution? The solution to Hard Rock Cafe’s problem was multifaceted. First, the infrastructure and existing systems had to be fixed. One million dollars was spent on installing a data warehouse system that captured and analyzed data orporate wide. Point of sales data was now available regarding all purchases as well as demographic info on customers. Then, $1. 5 million was spent on installing a system to capture data on merchandise sales.
These sales account for 50% of Hard Rock’s revenue and is critically important to this operation. This new system ensured that appropriate merchandise was available at all locations. Then, $5 million was spent on a new financial system which eliminated 50 ditterent ledgers and made data available on one system that was available chain wide. This improved financial perations so much that the financial staff was reduced from 90 employees to 30 employees – a huge savings for the company.
Hard Rock then began to leverage these new systems into driving customers to their web site by offering special promotions. A big part of this strategy is the use of a CRM system to know their customers better and to aid in driving sales. 3. What’s the role of CRM? The role of CRM at the Hard Rock Cafe is to gather and analyze data about their customers to drive sales and profit. The CRM system allows the company to keep careful tabs on visitor’s on-line behavior nd track how they respond to certain promotions as well as track their in restaurant purchases.
The more data they have about the customer’s purchases and desires, the better they are able to tailor their promotions to the customers to get him/her to visit again. 4. How does the data in a CRM differ from that of a POS? pos is more what the customer purchased, when he purchased it, (day, time, month, etc.. ) where he purchased it, how he paid for it, the amount of time he spent in the restaurant. The data is for that specific event (purchase). CRM information is more about gathering data over many events (purchases).
The goal is to gather as much info as possible about what a customer buys over a period of time, where and when he makes purchases, what he likes and what he may not like. The goal is to take POS data and pool it over time, then analyze the data to help determine how to get the customer back in the restaurant and to increase sales. The CRM can help determine what special promotions may be effect with a certain customer and be able to notify the customer of when these specials are available. The CRM helps a company get to know its customer base better and what can drive sales.
International financial management grad school essay help: grad school essay help
Taking over an existing companies Setting up a completely new company Mexico economic positions in recent years Inflation Changes in exchange rates 7 5 6 Mexico corporate governance and corruption rankings and the likely political risk involved. Corporate governance 8 Political Risk and corruption ranking Mexico ‘s current levels of inward foreign direct investment activity 12 Managing economic and translation exposure 12 Trends in the costs of debt for the previous year and the change in Mexico’ share price indices Costs of debt Stocks market Impose tariffs Mexico credit rating
Conclusion Abstract 13 14 15 This paper presents the finding of possibility of investment in foreign country for GKN PLC, which is the United Kingdom based company. This company conducts business as the manufacturer of automotive and aerospace parts; they intend to pursue a globalisation agenda. The findings are based on selected country, Mexico, which is whether to invest under three strategies, licensing local companies, taking over existing companies or setting up completely new company.
This report offers the tools and some useful discussions to determine the proper investment which omprise of PEST analysis to identify inherent risks, advantages and disadvantages of three strategies analysis and discussions of financial and economic circumstances in Mexico. Introduction Investment in globalisation is the trend that many organisation try to expand their business. Besides, selecting the focused country, the most critical issue that the management teams need to consider is the conformation of investment.
Nevertheless, there are three key strategies, licensing local companies, taking over existing companies and setting up completely new company which is necessary to be nalysis before making decision. This report presents the critical analysis under circumstance of globalisation agenda of the GKN PLC. , which is the company registered under the United Kingdom law and listed in London stock exchange. The destination of investment is Mexico, therefore the discussion of strategies and financial and economic issues are shown in this report.
To implicate the best solution for investment from those 3 strategies, the work exhibit advantages and disadvantages of each. Also, this paper applies PEST analysis to indicate inherent risks that might be occur in Mexico. Some related discussions are also offered including, inflation, changes in exchange rates, corporate governance, corruption ranking, levels of inward foreign direct investment activity, possible effects of translation and economic exposure, trends in cost of debt in Mexico, impose tariffs and Mexico’s credit ranking.
This report is conducted under the knowl edge o t international tinancial management 1 . Company’s backgrounds GKN is a British’s company which is listed on London stock exchange and is a constituent of the FTSE 100 Index. They are a global engineering group which design, anufacture and service systems and components of automotive and aerospace for the world’s manufacturers. GKN have four main divisions namely, GKN driveline, GKN powder metallurgy, GKN aerospace and GKN land systems. They have employees approximately 48,000 people work in GKN companies and Joint ventures in more than 30 countries around the world.
The financial position highlight of company: there are total assets E6,270 million and total equity El,927 million. In 2012 period, GKN delivered an excellent financial position with record profit achieved in all four divisions. There are also gross sales E6,904 million, profit before tax E497 million and earnings per share E26. 5 pound. Although, in this year is uncertainty in many of their market. 2. Investment in Mexico Vehicle production in North America grows rapidly. Mexico has become the 4th largest vehicles exporter in the world.
As AMIA ranked the Mexican light vehicles exports value has shown that approximately 64% of the value of Mexican vehicles and auto parts export to the United States, therefore Mexico has become a significant growth market for GKN. 3. Inherent risk analyses 3. 1 Political risk In recent year the corruption in Mexican government has become increasingly emarkable (as describe in Appendix 1). There are two main features. Firstly, several high profile incidents have come to light in rapid succession with ramifications for the national political dialogue, as Mexican president has promised to stamp out government corruption.
Secondly, over the past few years there has been a substantial increase in state debt, which in some cases has been linked to mismanagement of government funds or outright embezzlement. As a result, the political risk might drag down investment returns or even go so far as to remove the ability to withdraw capital from an investment. 3. 2 Economic risk Mexico’s economy is the world’s 1 lth largest by World Bank estimates. Mexico’s economy has growth slowly rather than the most countries in Latin American over the last decade.
In 2008, Mexico’s economic had been into a deep recession and it recovered in the end of 2010 on the back of growth in factory export (as describe in Appendix 2). But measures of employment and consumer confidence have not yet returned to pre-recession levels. Consequently, in term of economic recession in Mexico in recent years might affect company by customers stop buying things. This crisis might decrease the sales and cash outlay. 3. 3 Social risk Consumer expenditures and disposable income per capita have grown and are expected to keep growing in the future.
However, the increasing unemployment rate that remains a main problem in Mexico (as describe in Appendix 3). As a result, company might get a little effect on unemployment rate increases because most of income’s company comes from export to another country. 3. 4 Technological risk Mexico purchases 94% technology from outside country, which reflects both a lack of innovation and low research and development (R&D) spending. Mexico has played a part in the development of modern biotechnology since 1970. It becomes very important in Mexico.
Also the IT sector has increased such as the number of internet users, PCs per capita, and mobile density shown significant progress. 4. Advantages and Disadvantages of Three strategies 4. 1 Licensing local companies Advantages 1. 1 . The license can take products to the new market without the cost of setting up locally and the risks that would come up with this. 1. 2. Licensees might be powerful and large enough to provide the high market share and deter the competitor in the industry. 1. 3. It is possible to improve products to meet the local market by learning rom working with licensees. . 4. The licensing is a kind of information technology transformation so that it is possible to do further negotiation for support and training. 1. 5. Lots of expenses can save well in term of research and development. Disadvantages 1 . The Quality control might be neglect from licensees because the products are under the licensor brands. 2. In the future, the licensees might become potential competitor. They will realize the right opportunities that they are able to get the profit which is much more than royalty fee. 3. The technology that transfers to local licensees may be stolen. 4.
It is possible to lack of chance to enter the licensee’s market with foreign direct investment. 4. 2 Taking over an existing companies 1. It is save time and resources in order to create the business plan because everything is already done for a buyer. Also, the processes of research and tracking market are skipped, the buyer is able to go along the strategies and improve them more efficient. 2. The infrastructure has been already set up for the buyer, including supplier, employees, equipment, properties and information system. The new owner can start work immediately, it is not necessary to establish the investment plan for hese. . The groups of customers have been reached so that the new owner can reduce the cost on advertising and marketing. This means that they already have had their market share, and then expanding market is only the critical task.
Everything is starting so that there are no restricted rules which already have been set up as existing companies to follow. Consequently, the organizations are flexible, they can reate the rules and culture that suit their environment. 3. Location is one of the important factors that owners should consider before set up companies. Establishment new companies can choose the prime location to invest. 4. The entrepreneur can bring all experiences, skills, expertise, resources, technologies and innovation and integrate them to create their big role in the markets instead of adapting the existing which might be hard to manage with. . It is the higher responsibility to start everything new especially investing aboard, including license, marketing, reputation, finding resources and business plan. . Although, setting up new companies have not to pay as lump sum but the cost since start up until stable might be higher than other. In addition, the risks may be higher rather than those indeed. 3. Market share and customer base is also needed to create and attack because everything is walk from the beginning. 4. In financial view, the new companies have to build up their credit to be trustworthy from the financial institution. 5.
Mexico economic positions in recent years 5. 1 Inflation Mexico’s Inflation rate usually refers to the inflation rate based on the consumer price index, or CPI for short. The Mexican CPI shows the change in standard price of consumer goods and services which Mexican households purchase for consumption (as describe in Appendix 4). In order to measure inflation, an assessment is made of how much the CPI has risen in percentage terms over a given period compared to the CPI in a preceding period. If prices have fallen this is called deflation (negative inflation). 5. 2 Changes in exchange rates Source: From the figure we can see that Min=O. 4678 (2 Oct 2013) and Max=O. 05412 (1 5 May 2013), Exchange rate changes will impact the price of imported goods. First, imports f consumer goods and raw material price will change, there by import raw materials and imported goods or similar goods of domestic commodity prices will change. Theretore, G GBP to MXN exchange rate max point, that when toreign currency appreciation will make imported goods more expensive, so in order to import raw materials export-oriented commodity producers increased production costs and weaken its ability to compete on the international market.
By contrast currency devaluation will make imported goods become cheaper, so that the import of raw materials to export-oriented commodity producers will reduced production osts and the export products in the international market competitiveness is also enhanced, while the domestic production of the raw materials also will not bring benefits 6. Mexico corporate governance and corruption rankings and the likely political risk involved. 6. 1 Corporate governance Corporate governance included the governance structures, the banking and financial systems, ownership and control patterns, industrial policy, and industrial relations.
Mexico advocated liberal and open door policy to welcome foreign direct investment. Encouraging banks to take part into foreign shares and provide financial assistance or foreign direct investor. Besides, According to requires of foreign companies, the government of Mexico to develop staff training programs and training of staff. Importantly, Mexico developed several tax incentives for foreign direct investors. Basically, corporate governance in Mexico is friendly to GKN group. 6. 2 Political Risk and corruption ranking 6. 2. 1 Government of host country 1) Stability of government Mexican implement presidential republic.
President is the head of state and government which is for a term of six years and shall not be re-elected. There is no vice presidential in Mexican. Last year, the presidential candidate of Institutional Revolutionary Party named Pena Nieto which was sworn in December 1st 2012 for a period from December 1st 2012 to November 30th 2018. From 1917, Mexico experience twice peaceful change of regime. 2) Power of government and Corruption ranking The high risk of criminal is a seriously issue of the Mexico government. The source of issue is from the drug lords. The government hopes to completely wipe out drug cartels.
Although the government arrested several drug lords. But drug lords have a more brutal in order to response to government killing blow. This result leads to ncreased crime rates. Source: Van DJik J. , J. Van Kesteren and P. Smit Paul (2008), Criminal Victimisation in International Perspective – Key Findings from the 2004-2005 International Crime Victims Survey and European Survey on Crime and Safety, WODC Publication n0257, January. As these graphs show, the Percentage of people reporting at least one of the ten categories over the previous 12 months in Mexico is 18. 7 which are more 3. per cent than average. Importantly, corruption is a highest percentage of crimes in Mexico which is 13. 3 per cent. The mean of twenty-six countries which is collected by OECD is 1. 9 per cent that is 1 1. percentages lower than Mexico. Source: Transparency international http://www. transparency. org/cpi2012/results From the other research show that Mexico only got 34 and ranked 105 in the corruption perceptions index in 2012 which is lower performance in 175 countries. In summary, the government which is corruption and inaction can not to provide support and protection of foreign investors. . 2. 2 Relationship of government and foreign investment 1) Background Mexico is located in the southern North America which is beside the United States. The advantage of geographical makes Mexico became the one of the best starting oint to develop the United State and the rest of the North American markets. Mexico attracts a lot of foreign investment and global concern by its favourable tax policies and good investment environment. 2) Political for foreign investment Mexico is the second largest foreign direct investment in developing countries.
The Mexican federal and local government takes a series of major policies so that can able to attract substantial foreign investment. From the national level point of view, Mexico has been committed to development of the multilateral relations with other countries and organizations. In 1986, Mexico takes part in the WTO. In 1994 Mexico sign the North American Free Trade Agreement with the United States and Canada. In 2000, Mexico signs a free trade agreement with the European United. Since then, Mexico has signed more than twenty bilateral agreements or terms, in order to provide a safe environment for foreign investment.
In addition, Mexico signed free trade terms with more than ten countries to provide a guarantee to promote foreign investment. 3) Relationship with the home country GKN Group is established in the United Kingdom. The relationship of the United Kingdom and Mexico is a significant factor of the GKN. In recently year, the United Kingdom keeps a friendly relationship with Mexico in several fields like renewables, energy efficiency and nuclear issues. 7 Mexico s current levels ot inward toreign direct investment activity Source: O http://www. oecd. rg/statistics/ This graphs show the inflows of foreign direct investment in Mexico. In 2007, the inflow of foreign direct investment is 31492 million US dollars, when it comes to 2008; there was a decrease from 31492 million US dollars to 27140 dollars which is drop about 13. 8 per cent and continued to decline at the bottom which is 16119 million US dollars. After 2009, there was a slight increase in 2010 which is 20709 million US dollars and then saw a tiny fall to 19544 million US dollars in 2011. Overall, Mexico inward foreign direct investment activities show an unstable situation to foreign investor.
It seems that there are different government politics in different period. 8. Managing economic and translation exposure. As for using historical exposure, except other risks, it mainly depends on assets are monetary items or non-monetary items. Reference to GKN (2005) statistics that it has “completes acquisition of the remaining 51 percent shareholding in Velcon from DESC”. These assets were 507 Peso million (23 million Pounds). And this acquisition has earning profit by used historical exposure. In that case, if GKN used economic exposure that may result in GKN experience a reduction of fund or need restructuring.
Due to during this period economic exposure might cause the increasing sensitivity of revenues to exchange rate movements, and also could lead a decrease sensitivity of expenditures to exchange rate movements. Nevertheless, what if GKN used translation exposure? Because of the character of translation exposure may cause the inadequate forward contracts for pounds and Mexico peso. Translation exposure effect when an MNC translates each subsidiarys financial information to its parent company for consoled financial reporting (Hagelin and Pramborg, 2006). It does not affect cash flows straight.
Hedging translation exposure may use previous or futures contracts. But it still have several limitations, for instance, if GKN used translation exposure, the inaccurate forward contracts and accounting distortions may make it loss profit due to the uncertainty exchange rate. 9 Trends in the costs ot debt tor the previous year and the change in Mexico’ snare price indices. 9. 1 Costs of debt Mexico recorded a Government Debt to GDP of 42. 85 per cent of the country’s Gross Domestic Product in 2012. Government Debt to GDP in Mexico is reported by the International Monetary Fund.
From 1996 until 2012, Mexico Government Debt to GDP averaged 43. 3 Per cent reaching an all-time high of 48. 2 Per cent in December of 1996 and a record low of 37. 8pPer cent in December of 2007(as describe in Appendix 5). Generally, Government debt as a per cent of GDP is used by investors to measure a country ability to make future payments on its debt, thus affecting the country borrowing costs and government bond yields. 9. 2 Stocks market Stocks in Mexico had a positive performance during the last year. Mexico Stock Market (IPC), rallied 6,000 points or 13. 63 per cent during 2012(as describe in Appendix 6).
From 1988 until 2013, Mexico Stock Market (IPC) averaged 12604 Index points reaching an all-time high of 45913 Index points in January of 2013 and a record low of 87 Index points in January of 1988. 10. Impose tariffs It is suggested by OECD that”… the tax system could be made more efficient, by broadening the tax base, and it does not raise sufficient revenues to fght poverty, develop human capital and build infrastructure. Evaluating and removing tax xpenditures and special tax regimes is necessary, especially those that erode the corporate income tax base, such as for the maquiladoras.
Refusal Memo write essay help: write essay help
The company’s main competitors proudly featured their many onations of time and money to the community on their websites and in their other marketing materials, but your company was completely mute on the topic, even though many of its employees did community service on a personal basis. You felt that this apparent lack of community mindedness might help explain D&E’s downward slip on the citys list of top 100 companies while your competitors steadily held their positions. You also felt that both the employees and the city were missing out on productive partnerships.
Thus, with the assistance of the marketing director, ou worked hard to organize an employee volunteer program. The program is now finally up and running, with its own page on the company’s website, a growing database of company-approved service opportunities, a modest amount of paid time off for volunteering, a mechanism for recognizing outstanding volunteers, company grants for special projects, and other attractive components. Through a great deal of internal marketing, youVe generated a healthy amount of employee participation”without which, of course, the program would be a failure” nd the momentum is growing.
But now you have to write your first negative message related to this initiative. Carolyn Smythe, who works in the Purchasing Office, has Just emailed you her request that the Center for Non-violence (the CNV) be included in D&E’s program. In other words, she would like D&E’s official approval for the CNV, which means that it would be included in the list of volunteer opportunities for employees, that it would be eligible for a grant from D&E, and that she”and anyone else who wanted to olunteer for this organization”could get paid two hours per month to work for the CNV.
You don’t feel that you can accept her request. The CNV is not officially supported by any particular political party, but it obviously leans pretty far to the left. Smythe argues for the inclusion of the CNV on the grounds that their main work is to conduct conflict-resolution strategies in the schools”strategies that are politically neutral” but the organization also conducts “peace camps” in the summer and has a history of rotesting military solutions to political problems. The “About Us” part of the CNVs website explains that the organization was originally founded by peace activists in the 1970s who wanted a better solution than military school for students with behavior problems. ) Actually, you’re in favor of the work this organization does; in tact, your own son participated in a C V program at his elementary school, and you were impressed with what he learned about respecting others’ opinions, negotiating, and finding creative compromises. Given the recent outbreaks of violence in schools and other public places, you personally feel that the skills taught by the CNV are needed now more than ever.
But you know that your bosses are politically conservative, and so is the city overall. Plus, Dawson and Engels, the two company founders, are both veterans. You’re worried that D&E’s support of the CNV would cost the company business and be an affront to the company executives. The print and online guidelines for the volunteer program state that, in the interest f fairness to all D&E employees, organizations need to be neutral on political and religious grounds in order to be approved for inclusion in D&E’s volunteer program.
Assignment Write a refusal memorandum to Carolyn explaining why her favored organization cannot be included, and see if you can think of an alternative course of action for her to pursue. It is critically important to the volunteer program that you not lose the enthusiasm of the employees or let them start a negative buzz. Keep Carolyn as a supporter of the program while not giving her what she asks for.
Ethics abortion paper buy essay help: buy essay help
Sometimes getting pregnant and having a baby is the greatest thing that can happen to someone and that’s all they have ever dreamed about. There are other cases however, in which pregnancy is not so happily received. A young woman, still in high school, would most likely not receive the pregnancy as well, and nor should she. What are her options once she does become pregnant? Based on John Stuart Mills ideas of Utilitarianism, he would condone an abortion because it is pain avoidance for the girl.
Bishop Mortimer however, who supports Divine Command Theory, would absolutely reject the idea of abortion and tell the young girl to put the child up for adoption after it has been born. Is one of these ideas superior to another, or are they both equally acceptable. John Stuart Mill would definitely be in favor of abortion, because it coincides with his ideas of utilitarianism. The situation of the pregnant teenage girl I think follows all three principles of utilitarianism. The first principle is consequentialism which states that the moral rightness of an action hould be Judged based on the results.
It might sound wrong to kill a fetus, but in the end it results in a better life for both. The second principle, hedonism, states the ultimate end of all actions or goal we strive for is pleasure and pain avoidance. Child birth is without a question one of the most painful things someone can endure, so it seems natural a teenage girl would want to avoid that, especially seeing how it would not be worth it at that point in her life to have a kid. The third principle, impartiality, declares she should bring about the greatest good for the greatest number.
Since there are only two people, or potential people involved, the girl has the right to make either decision she chooses. Based solely on the three principles of utilitarianism, I would have to say that John Stuart Mill would agree with abortion. Bishop Mortimer on the other hand, would strongly be against abortion. In Divine Command theory, abortion is seen as murder, which is never permissible. It is even stated in the Ten Commandments, “thou shalt not murder”. Mortimer would be much more inclined to favor adoption over any other option.
He would argue that the teenage girl sinned by having sex outside of marriage and getting pregnant, so she must face the consequences of her actions. Of course it would be ridiculous to say that she must also raise the child, because she might not be able to or she might Just be an unfit mother. Mortimer would also see abortion as selfish, because the teenage girl wants to take away a potential life Just to avoid some pain and strife. It would be seen as selfish also because it takes away her responsibility to the child all together.
Based on stated ideas, it is apparent that Bishop Mortimer is opposed to abortion. Abortion is not an action that should be taken lightly or without caution, but in my opinion it is acceptable in most cases. I agree with John Stuart Mill’s idea of pain avoidance, because I don’t think we have any right to tell someone that they have to endure one ot the most paintul things imaginable. We might pick a ditterent option it it was our situation, but its not our situation, its hers. Not to say that Bishop Mortimer would be flat out wrong, his ideas Just would not viable for every person and situation.
Oh, East is East cheap mba definition essay help: cheap mba definition essay help
Oh, East is East, and West is West, and never the twain shall meet. This is a part of Raudyard Kipplings poem The Ballad of East and West. This poem is perfect to use as an explanation to why Brick Lane is so different. Brick Lane is dominated by people from the east, especially Hindis and Bangladeshis. The cultural differences between the East and West are major. They have different religion, food, language and even clothes. The West has more of a modern way of thinking while the East base their thoughts on religion.
And it is not your parents who influence your cultural or political view, but the people around you in the country you live in. Because in the movie we see that the parents and the oldest daughter are completely different. Her mother tries to teach her the norms that she grew up with. For instance her mother tells her to keep her skirt down and not to wear Jeans as that was unusual in the place the mother was born. However, her daughter doesn’t seem to understand or agree with her thoughts, simply because her everyday life in the British society has ad an impact on her.
The British society has different norms than the Bangladeshi and therefor her mother and she do not come to an agreement on things like clothes. Now that you know the difference between the mother and the daughter, lets explain why. It seems like even though she has been raised in a family with eastern culture, she still acts as if she is British. Mostly because the small network of families and friends with eastern culture cannot go against the mainstream culture that most people live after.
The mainstream will eventually have an impact on a person as he/ she grows up and lure him/her into their lifestyle and culture. Even the mother seems to change a little at the end of the movie which shows us the “power” of the affection in everything around you. The youngest sister is still young and has not been affected as much as her older sister, but she will eventually be a part of the mainstream society. There are many different factors in the British society that make you “convert”. And the factor with the biggest impact is school.
In school you learn different rules, way of thinking and you meet people every day. These people become a part of your everyday life and affect you in a way. That might be the reason to why her daughter was wearing the skirt up high even though her mother was against it because she was more concerned about what they thought. Now that we know why she is different and how the society can affect us, it leaves us with one possible conclusion: Oh, East is East, and West is West, and never the twain shall meet. Oh, East is East By Moflow
Minority english essay help online: english essay help online
I am a young 23 year old Hispanic girl, I am not married nor do I have kids. I am working towards my degree, live on my own, I have a decent Job, and do not depend on my parents. But as a minority I face the challenge of negative labels in many places I go. I especially deal with them when I am with my 4 nieces and nephews (age range from 6 months-10 years old) in public places.
People think I am a typical Latina which includes: being a dropout with no education, four kids (that may be from at least 2 different fathers), no Job, no goals in life, etc. The biggest problem I have faced eing a minority is, being able to overcome negative stereotypes and being able to outweigh statistics. According to statistics from cdc. gov, in 2010, 23. 2% of elementary and high school students were Hispanic, but only 6. 2% of college students were Hispanic. Meaning that Hispanics are not going to college after high-school.
This research paper will investigate how people treat me when I am alone and when I am with my four nieces & nephews, and how the differences reflect among gender, race, and age. II. Method I utilized a type of participant observation known as complete observation. Playing he role of a complete observer, I observed and recorded the positive and negative, acknowledgement towards me with and without kids, I also observed and recorded the different looks and conversations I was able to get with and without the kids, based on three criteria: gender, race, age.
The Setting I selected a very busy mall called NorthPark Center Mall, located in North Dallas off of Central Expressway. I chose this mall for several reasons. First, it is an easy place to view different types of genders, race and age groups. Second, it has several stores that I am able to go into and quickly be able to note the differences among who nters the stores according to gender, race, and age. Lastly, I chose this particular mall because it is huge, containing over 200 stores & restaurants, which helped to maximize my potential for observation.
Observation Strategy To avoid looking obvious, I observed no longer than 20 minutes anywhere from one central benches located in different areas of the mall, different types of stores which included: Forever 21, Nordstrom, Bebe, Disney Store, Loft, and LEGO, and restaurants inside the mall that included: Luna de Noche Tex-Mex Grill, Hibachi-San, and Maggiands Little Italy, I also observed when walking inside the mall from 2 different ntrances which were from Nordstrom & Macy’s. Moving around from place to place was the only way I could observe discreetly and accurately given the amount of information I had to record for all the individuals.
Other ways I considered observing included dressing very poorly maybe with ripped shirt and shorts and my nephews not groomed, not clean, and also the total opposite, also trying to make as much eye contact with someone as much as possible, facial expressions, different conversations as people passed by me in the different entrances, benches, restaurants, & stores I isited. These strategies were all possible, because doing so allowed me to record valuable information and observe from the different locations and able to note the differences among gender, race, and age.
I observed on five different days Monday at 7pm (alone), Wednesday at 5pm (witn my nephews & nieces), Friday at Oam (alone), Saturday at 5pm (with nephews and nieces) and Sunday at 12pm. I chose to observe on two weekdays and on the weekend and also at different types to be able to diversify my research which allowed me to make a more complete investigation. Therefore, I observed on 3 different weekdays Monday, Wednesday, and Friday, which according to a mall cop those are days that an older crowd tend to visit. I also chose the weekend because that’s when a more diverse population tends to go and do their shopping.
However, according to my own observations it varies among the time, what age groups go since NorthPark is so huge it is very diverse at ALL days and times of the week. That is why I chose different times of the day, ranging from 10am-7pm. I also chose that time range because I believe that vastly different groups of society re active at different times of the day. For example, elders tend to wake up extremely early and go walk some miles at the mall as opposed to a younger crowd that typically go to school or work during the morning time and do their shopping at later times.
I believe that by observing at various days and times of the week, I included a more representative sample of the population. Categories and Measurements I based my observations on gender, race, and age, because I believe these criteria highly influence the different looks, facial expressions, comments, manners among people towards me. I chose these three because they are easily determined & viewed, and therefore more accurate to measure, although age and race were sometimes hard to determine. One other category I considered measuring was socio- economic status.
Although I believe that this may be an important contributing factors to the topic, I decided against using it because I couldn’t find a way to accurately determine how wealthy a person is based on a single observation. To determine age and race, I used obvious physical characteristics I could observe to classify a person, such as skin/eye/hair color, style, and language accent if any. For this topic, there wasn’t a way to measure exact proximity. I only observed people that actually noticed me no farther than about 2 feet. Ill. Findings Altogether I made a total of 12 observations at different times over 5 separate days.
After observing about 200 people that entered the various places inside the mall I observed, I found that more that almost every one of the persons I observed actually said hello & smiled at me while I was alone. Less than half, looked at me with a confused face, did not smile, and commented something to the other person they ere with while I was with my 4 nieces and nephews. I found that the day or time didn’t matter the huge difference I observed was the gender, age, and race of the people I observed. I found that 60% of males and only 40% females acknowledged me in a positive way, with a smile, opened the door for me while I was alone.
The percentages were reversed when I was with my nieces and nephews, only 40% of males and 60% females acknowledged me in a negative way, didn’t open the door, made comments or facial expressions towards me and the kids. Race During my research I chose to observe only whites and Atrican-Americans. I tound that 90% of all Whites and African-Americans acknowledged me positively while alone. While I was with the kids it changed drastically, 80% whites and 40% of all blacks acknowledged me in a negative way even when I smiled at each and every one of them.
Age When it came down to age, it was a very broad type of positive and negative acknowledgment. Age ranges from 15-60 years old, overall I received positive acknowledgement while I was alone of more than 50% male, blacks from ages 15-60 years old and only about 10% showed negative acknowledgement towards me with the kids. Female, whites, between the ages of 15-45 years old over 40% acknowledged me in a positive way whole I was alone, while 70% acknowledged me an a negative way while I was with the kids.
Also, I found that I received much more attention from everyone including cashiers from the various places I was in, when I was with the kids especially when they were not groomed. ‘V. Discussion & Implications Through my observations I found overall I had a more negative acknowledgement from Whites, females and males. A more positive acknowledgement from Black, males & females. Also, according to my research elders are more likely to stereotype and cknowledge me negatively when I walk around with my nephews and nieces. While I was alone more than half actually acknowledged me while I was alone.
Although gender, age, and race statistics are interesting, I see no real-world application for this information to this situation. As it all varies from the different places that you visit. As stated earlier I chose NorthPark because it would allow me to see a more diverse crowd. Proximity, on the other hand, seems to play a significant role, a man or female no matter the race is very likely to open the door for me while coming in through an ntrance with the kids, especially with a stroller. On the other hand, while I was alone males are more likely to open then the door then females.
Solutions In reality there is no true solution that I can provide, that will allow me to be seen in a positive way with or without kids. The only thing I can suggest to my Hispanic, single ladies is to not worry about negative stereotypes or acknowledgements and overcome the bad stats, work hard towards career, not to get married at an early age, and work twice as hard as any other race. V. Conclusions Altogether, this paper exposed several previously unknown facts about the different ttitudes, positive & negative acknowledgements that people in general have towards young, Hispanic women.
What I found much interesting was the fact that I never imagined getting so many bad looks, with kids. I always believed I’d be more respected in public when I was with kids, especially because I could blend in as a single mother. If I could I would raise a program to assist young Hispanic women to overcome all stereotypes as they are growing up. As I stated earlier there isn’t a solution that I could recommend to avoid stereotypes. Only to work towards goals and dreams, and never give up!
The Inventions of Thomas Edison popular mba argumentative essay help: popular mba argumentative essay help
Thomas Edison was one of the greatest inventors and industrial leaders in history. Thomas Edison’s inventions are still used today in many different ways. In that essay I am going to talk about his early life, his career, and last what did he offer to the society. Thomas Alva Edison was born to Sam and Nancy on February 11, 1847, in Milan, Ohio. Known as “A1” in his youth, Edison was the youngest of seven children, four of whom survived to adulthood. Edison tended to be in poor health when young.
To seek a etter fortune, Sam Edison moved the family to Port Huron, Michigan, in 1854, where he worked in the lumber business. Edison was a poor student. When a schoolmaster called Edison “addled,” or slow. His furious mother took him out of the school and proceeded to teach him at home. Edison said many years later, “My mother was the making of me. She was so true, so sure of me, and I felt I had some one to live for, some one I must not disappoint. ” At an early age, he showed an interest for mechanical things and for chemical experiments.
At the age of 9, his mother bought Edison a chemistry set, which helped him in his experiments. Beginning his career early, In 1859, Edison took a Job selling newspapers and candy on the Grand Trunk Railroad to Detroit. In the baggage car, he set up a laboratory for his chemistry experiments and a printing press, where he started the “Grand Trunk Herald”, the first newspaper published on a train. An accidental fire forced him to stop his experiments on board. Around the age of twelve, Edison lost almost all his hearing.
Despite the difficulties he had face, Thomas never stopped working on his dream . 1n 1862, he took a Job as a telegraph operator in Port Huron. In 1868, Edison moved to Boston where he worked in the Western Union office and worked even more on his inventions. In January 1869 Edison resigned his Job, intending to devote himself fulltime to inventing things. In January 1869 Edison resigned his Job, intending to devote himself fulltime to inventing things. His first invention to receive a patent was the electric vote recorder, in June 1869.
Daunted by politicians’ reluctance to use the machine, he decided that in the future he would not waste time inventing things that no one wanted. In 1887, Edison had built a new, larger laboratory in West Orange, New Jersey. Edison would often sleep in the lab and spent much of his time experimenting in the lab. When X-rays were discovered in 1895, Edison developed a X-ray focus tube, or fluoroscope, then it was used in hospitals.
Deforestation of Southeast Asia descriptive essay help: descriptive essay help
The effects deforestation is having on south-east Asia are dizzying. Rapid development since the siege of Khe-Sanh in Vietnam (1968) and surrounding nations of the Mekong region has caused widespread destruction of their forests. Many of these areas are switching trees for coffee bushes, threatening the extraordinary biodiversity that holds around 1,700 different species. These trees are cut down for the furniture export market. Also, forests are being wiped out for the construction of new large-scale infrastructure. One of Vietnam’s top five products for exports is wood urniture, resulting in deforestation.
It is also known to be a miniature China, except with weaker unions, lower wages, fewer labor laws, bigger tax breaks to favored companies, and heavier subsidies to state-sponsored industries. Neighboring Laos’ and Cambodia’s forests are illegally being manufactured by the Vietnam furniture companies, resulting in deforestation in these regions also. The addition of large- scale infrastructure is also having a large impact on these regions. Tree covered mountains of Vietnam are being clear-cut for a controversial new dam, which also is isplacing local tribes.
There are also many defoliation missions in order to feed specific factories. The biggest devastation of this deforestation is the elimination of habitats for the incredible species that called these forests surrounding Vietnam home. For the last fifteen years, researchers have been studying these regions, said to be full of many new, unknown species. Some of these include the Javan rhino, barking deer, fishing cat, ferret-badger, finless porpoise, Irrawaddy dolphin, giant Mekong catfish, etc. There is believed to be even more to discover.
Business Economics Assignment “essay help” site:edu: “essay help” site:edu
This module introduces participants to the microeconomic theory of the market and the firm. First, we discuss economics in general. Then, we explore the theory of demand and supply and market equilibrium. Later in the semester, we turn our attention to firms, looking at the production function of firms as well as cost and revenue concepts. Finally, we examine the different types of market structures. Topics covered in this module include Market Demand, Market Supply, and Equilibrium; Firm Production and Costs; Market Structure; Perfect Competition; Monopoly; Monopolistic Competition; and Oligopoly. Learning Objectives and Outcome Knowledge and understanding This module develops a knowledge and understanding of: The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services. A coherent core of economic principles, including the microeconomics of decision and choice, production and exchange. Understanding extends to economic policy, analytical methods and modelbased argument. Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics. The application of economics, in particular the fields of business economics and ndustrial economics.
Intellectual skills This module develops: The cognitive skills of critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, including the ability to identify assumptions, evaluate statements in terms of evidence, to detect false logic or reasoning, to identify implicit values, and to define terms adequately and to generalise appropriately. Professional practical skills The ability to apply economic models to economic problems and phenomena. Transferable (key) skills Effective oral and written communication skills in a range of traditional and electronic media.
Effective self-management in terms of time, planning and behaviour, motivation, self- starting, individual initiative and enterprise. 2 3. Lectures and Seminars a. Lectures Lectures take place on Mondays, 1400 – 1600 at F3A12 from Week 2 (23/9/13) to Week 11 (25/11/13). b. Seminars You should sign up for one (1) seminar group. Please make sure that there are no potential clashes with other lectures or seminars before you sign up for a group. Seminar groups meet three (3) times during the semester. You should only attend the seminar group for which you have signed up.
The essay should be no more than 1,500 words. All essays must be submitted to the Admin Office by the deadline date. Please note that this deadline is strict. Unapproved late submission of the essay will result in a loss of 5% absolute on the standard University scale per normal working day until the mark reaches zero. Students must submit their essays in word-processed format, and they must cite and list any source reading material. References should be listed on the last page in the standard style. Marks may be deducted for poor presentation, grammar or spelling. Plagiarism will not be tolerated.
Please consult the Business School Undergraduate Student Handbook for more guidelines on how to present and submit your essays. Assessed assignments will be returned to students through the Admin Office. Deadline: 22 November 2013, (Friday of Week 10) at 2 p. m. to the Business School Administrative Office b. Examination The examination will consist of 40 multiple-choice questions. The questions will cover material from lectures and seminars. Negative marking will be adopted in the examination to ensure that guesswork is avoided. All correct answers will be awarded the same mark.
The negative mark awarded to an incorrect answer will depend on the number of available answers. For illustration, see the below: Question: XXXX a) Answer: Incorrect b) c) d) Answer: Correct (Mark -0. 33) You should only give one answer to each question. If you give more than one answer to a question, you will not get a mark for the question. If you do not give an answer to a question, you will not get a mark for the question. N. B. Should you require any of the materials associated with this module in non-standard format (e. g. large print) please contact me.
My first love persuasive essay help: persuasive essay help
My First Love My first love began six years ago, when I was only fourteen, I was very young with no experience with boys. I thought that there was no heart break in this world, until I met him. His brown caramel eyes, shady dark brown hair, pink color skin it was breathtaking. That first moment when at tutoring class we saw each other he was making his way to the seat in back of mine and while approaching he was smiling at me, made my heart skipped a beat.
It took me months to talk to him; we became best riends nothing what I wanted, his life and his thoughts were mine, he was my world and he even had a clue i kept it secret. Everyone said that we had something between us and i was happy that people could imagined that. He always make me laugh without noticing how deeply in love i was falling. One day he invited me over to his house to watch movies, he chose the movie “The Notebook”, surprised because he chose a romantic movie and I thought “it mean something, he liked me”.
Minutes after the movie finishing, i went to his lips kissed im and suddenly he stopped me and told me that he didn’t liked me that way in that moment I felt stupid and heart broken. I ran away, went home and cried for days. He broke my heart. Years passed, I never heard from him my best friend told me he left the city. I promised myself that i would never drop another tear for him and because of that my feelings almost vanished along with him but there were still memories haunting me for being stupid. His name is now engraved in my soul, he is part of who i am now. He made me cry but he also made me strong.
Martin Luther King Jr. and Henry Thoreau Debate cheap mba definition essay help: cheap mba definition essay help
Fight For What is Right A cold, snowy winter night in Birmingham, Alabama: one of those nights where you would rather stay inside and sit by a fire while sipping on a cup of hot chocolate. Not everyone is doing that though, for many people walk in the cold all bundled up. Some of the more unfortunate ones stay stranded outside in the freezing weather with not nearly enough layers to keep them warm. In Birmingham, a lot of these people consist of African Americans who cannot afford somewhere to keep warm or are Just simply denied a place to stay based on their skin color.
In this day and age, segregation exists between whites and blacks. A huge issue nationwide, but when it comes to Birmingham everything is taken to a new level. To ensure the separation of whites and blacks, you can see plenty of racial signs and other such tactics used by the city. Although between King and Thoreau, none of these resemble an issue; they both could stay warm under their nice winter Jackets, both had a place to go back home to and more importantly, one was a white man and the other a black man. Henry David Thoreau and Martin Luther King Jr. both made themselves very well known and idolized by many.
They knew each other through a mutual friend but came into contact when they ran into one another here in Birmingham. The segregation in Birmingham continues to get out of control with constant bombings and killings of African American citizens, causing certain groups to want to take action towards reform in Birmingham. The group known as the Alabama Christian Movement for Human Rights called upon King to help lead them in non-violent reform, while Thoreau made his trip here to witness the reforms. Thoreau’s time of non-violent reform came about years before King even began to participate.
King actually learned Just about everything from Thoreau’s writing, but Thoreau has no sense of that at this very moment. What King learned from Thoreau, he put to use more than Thoreau ever did. Right now the two men share the same non-violent beliefs and want to spread the word in their own separate ways. As the two men walk down the street they engage in friendly small talk. But then they come across a black couple denied entry into a restaurant. Both men look at ach other in disgust. They have seen it happen hundreds of times, but each time they see it, they have the same disgustful reaction.
After what they Just witnessed, the two men started to state their opinions to each other on why they see this type of policy as a disgrace. Henry Thoreau spoke first with a scornful tone in his voice on how he cannot respect his government for allowing instances like these to occur. He continues speaking, “l cannot for an instant recognize that political organization as my government which is the slave’s government also (180). In response, King expresses to Thoreau, that you cannot put the entire blame on the government even though they could change the laws involving segregation.
But would that change how the white majority feels, especially in southern states. Those people grew up witn certain opinions ot Atrican Americans. King goes on with another strong statement, saying “Whatever affects one directly, affects all indirectly (214). ” With this statement, King tries to tell Thoreau that if they cannot change how people think, then segregation will not change either. After uttering such words, King goes quiet, neither one of them saying anything to each other. Both continue walking with their eyes facing forward, trying to fgure out what they are going to say next.
After a few minutes of walking in the freezing cold with a light flurry of snow, the silence is broken. King ends this when he asks Thoreau how he plans on making a difference for racism and segregation. Thoreau does not respond right away, giving King the opportunity to answer his own question: “Henry, we need to make a difference here in Birmingham. If we do something here then it ay affect the whole nation. And we need to do it in a non-violent manner. ” He continues, “In any non-violent campaign there are four basic steps: collection of facts to determine whether injustices exist; negotiation; self-purification; and direct action (215). King believes that these steps will lead them to a successful reform against segregation. Thoreau agrees with King that they should reform in a non-violent way, but questions who will Join him. He immediately states,
They continue enjoying each other’s company, but ever since their heated discussions the two have not said one word or even batted an eye towards the other. They arrive at the footsteps of Martin Luther King Jr. ‘s apartment where he says one final comment to end the night, “Henry, we have a ‘moral responsibility to disobey unjust laws’ (218). We are nere tor a reason; and that reason involves making a ditterence. So tomorrow let’s get everyone in town together and move forward with this reform. ” Thoreau ooks at King with a blank face and continues his way.
With his incomparable leadership ability, King leads a reform the next day in Birmingham. The reform in Birmingham took place in 1963, and was led by Martin Luther King Jr.. This action brought attention to the integration efforts in the city, and during these nonviolent riots the citys police brought out dogs which attacked the civilians. They would also spray the people with high powered water hoses. But the reform actions demonstrated led to the government changing the city of Birmingham’s discrimination laws.
Art history midterm descriptive essay help: descriptive essay help
The cultural differences between the two pieces of art work are that the Hall of the Bulls painting is about spreading life from within while Ti and the Hippopotamus is more about after life so they can enjoy stuff they did in their current life in their after life. A similarity both pieces of art have are that they are both showing their hunting culture in the artwork and Just how they lived and survived their everyday lives. The painting of Ti and the Hippopotamus is carved and chiseled while Hall of the Bulls is more loose and brushy. a.
The lines in the paleolithic mural Hall of the Bulls are more wa’. y and horizontal while the lines in the egyptian tomb fresco Ti and the Hippopotamus are more thin and defined. Both do have Waw lines, in Ti and the Hippopotamus the water beneath the boat has Waw lines with hippos and other aquatic fauna. b. The colors in Hall of the Bulls was charcoal created from their fires, and they used earth pigments of iron and manganese to create permanent color that we can still see today. The colors used in ti and the hippopotamus are more vibrant compared to Hall of the Bulls and ore intense.
There is also more ofa variety. c. The painting hall of the bulls is non hierarchical meaning that all elements comprising the art object are of equal importance, while Ti and the Hippopotamus is more hierarchical meaning that art object is made up of elements of different comparative importance. The materials used for the Hall of the Bulls were charcoal painted on natural cave rock. The Egyptian relief was done in limestone. In relief the picture is drawn and the background is then carved away from the subject matter. B.
The cultural meaning of The Judgement of Hunifer Before Osiris is to do good deeds and to be kind hearted to that you wont get eaten by Amemet. It was used to be passed down for generations so egyptian culture wouldn’t be forgotten. The Bull- leaping was shown as the palaces as ceremonial centers this piece of art was a centerpiece of Minoan life. To the Minoan people bullleaping gave the expression of manliness to men. The Judgement of hunifer before Osiris was done of papyrus paper. The techniques are very tight and contained. The bull leaping mural is a fresco type of painting. The lines in the bull leaping mural are thin and wavy. They are mostly horizontal. The lines in the Judgement of Hunifer painting is more verticle. The lines applied in this painting are horizontal line, vertical line and curve line. Horizontal line is seen on the floor tile. Curve lines are seen on the body and head of the characters. Besides that, the painting is made up of organic shapes and geometric shapes like rectangle, square and round shapes. The colors used in the Judgement of Hunifer on the top-left part of the drawing are olivegreen, white and ellow ochre makes the subjects pop out more.
The colors in the Bull Leaping Mural are much more vibrant wit n the and slight red The Judgement ot Huniter is more saturated while the Bull Leaping mural is more unsaturated. The bull leaping mural is more hierarchical while the Judgement of Hunifer is more non hierarchical. Both drawings are symmetrical. The papyrus scroll used in the Judgement of Hunifer is created by using painting technique, by applying colors of black, olive green, white and yellow ochre. There is also drawing technique used to draw out the characters nd shapes, and writing of hieroglyphs on the wall in the painting.
The bull leaping mural is a fresco type of painting. c. The Palace of Knossus and the Temple of Amun were both ceremonial centers. The Palace of Knossus was a ceremonial and political center of minoan civilization and culture. The temple of amun is the largest religious complex ever constructed anywhere in the world. This ancient Egypt complex demonstrates the religious significance of the area in ancient times. The temple of Amun at Karnak is made up f a series of separate structures and features that combine to form one huge building complex.
The Palace of Knossos was a monumental symbol of Minoan civilization because of its construction and use e of luxury materials. The architectural plan was very advanced along with their building techniques. The palace of Knossos was also much more colorful, filled with art, while the temple of amun was more of Just monumental statues and structure built out of rocks. D. Both the Sumerian Votive Statues and the Menkure and Wife were carved out of limestone and painted. The Menkure and Wife statue is 2 feet 35/8 inches (70. cm) and the Sumerian Votive Statues is about 30 inches. Sumerian Votive figures were made as an act of worship to the gods and placed in a shrine before the image of the god. The Menkure and Wife was to show that the pharaoh was at his best at all times and his wife was always besides him. It is really focused on stereotype. The Votive statues were carved of limestone alabaster and gypsum and the Menkure and Wife statue was made of limestone as well. Both are very chiseled and defined. Both have a lot of detail as well.
Cognition and Personality mba essay help: mba essay help
My goal in this paper will be to answers the question required based on the viewing of the movie “Rain Man”. Looking at the movie from a therapist view and not as a lay person, I will begin by giving a brief synopsis of the movie and move on to focus directly on my response to each question using the main character as my reference point. Synopsis “Self-centered, avaricious Californian Charlie Babbitt (Tom Cruise) is informed that his long-estranged father has died.
Expecting at least a portion of the elder Babbitt’s 3 million estate, Charlie learns that all he’s inherited is his dad’s prize roses and a 1949 Buick Roadmaster. Discovering that the $3 million is being held in trust for an unidentified party, Charlie heads to his home town of Cincinnati to ascertain who that party is. It turns out that the beneficiary is Raymond Babbitt (Dustin Hoffman), the autistic-savant older brother that Charlie never knew he had. Able to memorize reams of trivia and add, subtract, multiply, and divide without a second’s hesitation, Raymond is otherwise incapable of functioning as a normal human being.
Aghast hat Raymond is to receive his father’s entire legacy, Charlie tries to cut a deal with Raymond’s guardian. When this fails, Charlie “borrows” Raymond from the institution where he lives, hoping to use his brother as leverage to claim half the fortune. During their subsequent cross-country odyssey, Charlie is forced to accommodate Raymond’s various autistic idiosyncracies, not the least of which is his insistence on adhering to a rigid daily schedule: he must, for example, watch People’s Court and Jeopardy every day at the same time, no matter what.
On hitting Las Vegas, Charlie opes to harness Raymond’s finely-honed mathematical skills to win big at the gaming tables; but this exploitation of his brother’s affliction compels Charlie to reassess his own values, or lack of”. (the Movie data provided by AMGreof”) Define cognition and provide a description of the cognitive processes. In the movie the Rain Man Raymond is a great example of cognition and through out the movie you were able see this development processes unfold. Raymond is able to memorize reams of trivia, and add and subtract multiple and divide with out any effort.
This would be stored information in Raymond’s Brain. Cognitive psychology is the branch of psychology that studies mental processes including how people think, perceive, remember, and learn. As part of the larger field of cognitive science, this branch of psychology is related to other disciplines including neuroscience, philosophy, and linguistics. The core focus of cognitive psychology is on how people acquire, process and store information. There are numerous practical applications for cognitive research, such as improving memory, increasing decision-making accuracy, and structuring educational curricula to enhance learning.
The cognitive rocesses, commonly referred to as cognition, are the many processes working together in the formation of thought. Cognition helps us to acquire information and make conscious and subconscious conclusions about the world around us. Our five conventional senses are utilized in this complex process as a means of gathering information. What is the relationship between cognition and personality development? Cognitive development is the realization of a person, over time, of their psychological state and its change. A person is limited in their personality development by how much (in ost cases, little) they are able to observe.
For instance, if you are in your mid- twenties, think back to when you were eighteen. How much of your thinking has changed (that you are aware of)? Now, when you are forty, think back to when you are eighteen and repeat that question. If you are unable to see the difference between your mind when you were eighteen and your mind when you are twenty-five or forty years old, your cognitive development has been heavily stunted. However, your personality development has likely changed in some manner – you’re Just not aware of it.
In the Rain Man Raymond development has not moved in the area of development. How do parents influence a child’s personality according to each theory: evolutionary, biological/genetic, and behavioral? A seemingly obvious fact about human nature is that our personality is influenced by our parents. Intuitively, it seems as if the way our parents raise us exerts an enduring influence on the nature of our personality. By teaching certain types of behavior and by punishing actions of which they disapprove, parents may significantly influence the behavioral and emotional styles of their children.
This intuition, however, contrasts with a second one. Common knowledge tells us that siblings often differ greatly from one another. One brother may be outgoing, the other shy. One sister may be conservative, the other liberal. Since siblings have the same parents, and parents tend to treat their children similarly, such examples seem to suggest that parents’ style ot child rearing might make little ditterence to the personality ot their children In the trait theories, the basic variables of the theory are people’s traits, that is, their “broad predispositions … respond in particular ways” (Pervin & John, 2001, p. 226). Most trait theories try to identify a common set of traits that can be used to describe the personality of any individual. These trait theories rely on the statistical procedure of factor analysis to identify dimensions that can be used summarize individual differences in personality traits. Researchers using this technique commonly identify a set of five trait dimensions. These Big Five personality traits include extroversion, neuroticism, conscientiousness, agreeableness, and openness to experience (Pervin & John, 2001).
Once one identifies a set of basic traits in this manner, a primary question is to identify where the traits come from. Why do some people have more or less of a given trait than others? Almost all trait theorists have sought biological explanations for variations in traits. People are seen to inherit a given level ofa trait in the same way that they might inherit hair color or height. In the Rain Man it can be assumed that Raymond may have developed the trait of the skills he possess from his mother and father even though he is autistic, thus given into the theory that DNA plays a arge part in our personality development.
How does self-efficacy relate to personality? Self-efficacy has been described as the belief that one is capable of performing in a certain manner to attain certain goals. Psychologist Albert Bandura has defined self- efficacy as one’s belief in one’s ability to succeed in specific situations. One’s sense of self-efficacy can play a major role in how one approaches goals, tasks, and challenges. The concept of self-efficacy lies at the center of Bandura’s social cognitive theory, which emphasizes the role of observational learning and social xperience in the development of personality.
Self-efficacy is directly related to health behavior, but it also affects health behaviors indirectly through its impact on goals. Self-efficacy influences the challenges that people take on as well as how high they set their goals Self-efficacy also affects how people respond to failure. ((psychology. com) Raymond is using the process of observational behavior as he is introduce to new things in his environment he absorb the behaviors and takes them on as his own, What “nature” and “nurture” factors contribute to one’s self-efficacy?
Michael Vick vs Mike Tyson rice supplement essay help: rice supplement essay help
An apology is made to admit and show remorse over past actions that affected other people. It is meant to repair a negative image. The confession and owning up to the mistakes reinstalls trust back to the person. Apologies are seen every day in the media, news, and online etc. Most apologies in the public eye are made by senators, comedians, or athletes aiming to gain trust and support back from their fans. Two famous athletes Michael Vick and Mike Tyson made public apologies after encountering physical and federal scandals.
Michael Vicks apology was rhetorically ffective because he appealed to emotions, religion, and credibility. While Mike Tyson’s apology was not rhetorically effective because of his arrogant tone, use of fallacies, and contradiction with statements. In early 2001, Michael Vick and his three associates Purnell Peace, Quants Phillips, and Tony Taylor started to invest in pitbull dog fghting competitions. Later on that year they went on to establish the “Bad News Kennel” where they trained and breed pitbulls; the Bad News Kennel was said to house 50 pit bulls.
Michael Vick became a registered dog breeder, so he can breed stronger and more fght efficient pit bulls. Vick and his associates began to sponsor and house fighting competitions in Virginia and at their facility. The men tested their pitbulls with regular dogs and other pitbulls. If the pitbulls did not perform well, they shot, electrocuted, hanged, and drowned the inefficient dogs. When Michael Vicks cousin, Davon Boddie, was arrested on drug charges, the state started to investigate the property for animal cruelty because Boddie gave Vicks address as his own.
At first Michael Vick denied and blamed the dogfghting operation on the family members who lived on the property, and stated he never visited the property. It was not until later, when the other 3 associates pled guilty to the case, Michael Vick decided to confess and pled guilty to the crime. He admitted to funding the dogfghting operations, gambling, and murdering the dogs. He was sentenced to 18 months in prison. The scandal was all over the media. People saw Michael Vick as a cruel vindictive person. They did not like the major football star anymore.
He lost a lot of endorsement deals, over 33 of them. After admitting to the crime, stating his apology, and serving his sentence football fans began forgive him and accept his apology. However to this day Michael Vick is still one of the top most disliked NFL football players, according to E-Poll Survey. On June 28, 1997 Mike Tyson and Evander Holyfield tougnt in Las Vegas at a championship boxing match. Holyfield was defending his title as World Champ which he was entitled to 11 months earlier in a fight against Tyson.
Tyson showed no mercy. As soon as the fght had started, Tyson took a couple Jabs at Holyfield. Holyfield retaliated Jabs, punches to the ribcage, and intricate combinations. Evander head butted Mike and was flagged but did not have any points taken away from him. Holyfield had won the first two rounds, and was leading into the third. With only 40 seconds left in the third round, Tyson put Holyfield into a clinch, rolled his ahead above his shoulder, spit out his mouth piece, and horrifyingly bite a piece of Holyfield’s ear off.
The fght continued, and Tyson bite another piece of Holyfield’s ear. The crowd was shocked at this gruesome behavior. The referee disqualified Tyson for his conduct. The story was all over the media. Tyson went on countless interviews. Interviewers and the public wanted to know why he bite Holyfield’s ear. Tyson was not incarcerated but was permanently suspended and got his boxing licensed taken. Michael Vicks apology had a more positive and acceptable effect because he appealed to the audience pathos.
In his first lines when he stated “For most of my life, I’ve been a football player, not a public speaker” he played the role of the victim so the audience can sympathize with him. He was illustrating a sense of weakness and vulnerability. He established his credibility in the lines “l take this opportunity just to speak from the heart” and “l take full responsibility for my actions. Taking ownership of his actions and speaking from the heart displayed honesty which evoked trust back to the audience and fans. It repaired his image as deceitful to trustworthy. He “…. sk[s] for forgiveness and understanding as [he] move[s] forward to bettering Michael Vick the person, not the football player”; this statement epitomizes the fact that Michael Vick the football player is different from Michael Vick the person. The public only saw Michael Vick the football player. He wanted the people to see him as a person, that he is human. Everyone makes mistakes and so oes he. Only his mistake was brought to light in front of millions of people. He dabbled on the subject of religion when revealing he “… found Jesus and asked him for forgiveness and turned [his] life over to God. Appealing to religion allowed him to win over the audience because the Christian religion is about forgiveness and how Christ forgave us of our sins so we can start fresh and new, which suggests that Michael Vick should be given a second chance. Michael Vick carried off a sorrowful and remorseful tone in his speech unlike Mike Tyson who was arrogant and prideful. Tyson’s speech had a few similarities with Vicks speech by mentioning Christ, and taking ownership and responsibility, but his arrogant tone over powered making the speech less of an apology.
In an interview with Oprah, Tyson stated that his speech had no sincerity and was not an apology. He started his speech by stating “Saturday night was the worst night of my professional career as a boxer” he seemed to be more concerned about himself and his career than the actual apology. He later created a fallacy when comparing riots in baseball and basketball to his physical altercation in the ring; these examples cannot compare because they are not elatable. Although they are both physical altercations, having a fght on the court and hospitalizing another opponent is not the same.
He contradicted himselt by making his apology less trustworthy and uncredited when he stated “l expect to pay the price like a man. I expect the Nevada State Athletic Commission to hand down a severe penalty, and I am here today to say I will not fght it… I only ask that I not be penalized for life for this mistake. ” If he was honestly willing to accept all consequences knowing the severity of the terms, he would not have asked or questioned his penalty terms. Not only did Tyson contradict himself, Tyson also went on to be prideful and narcissistic when he stated “Evander, I am sorry.
You are a champion and I respect that. I am only saddened that this fight did not go further so that the boxing fans of the world might see for themselves who would come out on top. ” Tyson displayed an egoistic attitude and implied that he would have won and become champion if this incident had not occurred; Holyfield only won because he was disqualified. Michael Vick showed more sincerity in his apology than Mike Tyson. Although both incidents are horrifically violent. Vicks apology was more acceptable to the public than Tyson’s.
Although both still are facing public scrutiny till this day, Michael Vick has repaired his image and has gained back plenty of new endorsement deals, including a former endorser Nike, and now is playing for the Eagles. Mike Tyson, however, is still seen as ignorant and has never boxed after the incident. The aftermath of these two athletes reflect on their apology: Vick enabled trust into his audience and stated that he would change, and now he has a successful football career. On the other hand, Tyson’s carried off an arrogant and prideful attitude, and ow his boxing career has ended.
Did TV change American Families? admission essay help: admission essay help
White, suburban, breadwinning father, homemaking mother and their kids also known as, Family. Today “traditional” families have drastically changed and in accordance, so have television families. TV changed in order to stay current and gain/ maintain audience(s). In todays society we have more working mothers, Gay parents and divorced couples than ever before and the ercentages are rising every day.
In the popular TV show Happily Divorced (which is about a woman married for 18 years then becoming a best friend to her husband who she Just found out was gay), audiences see people living happily and not as rare and dysfunctional as that household would have seemed back then. How did America change so drastically? When did it become “0K” to be gay or divorced? America became modernized and consequently so did TV shows in order to stay current and maintain or even gain audience’s attention.
In todays world being gay, divorced or a orking mother is viewed as normal but back in the 1950’s stereotypes were influential therefore such acts were viewed as abominable. Even today Judgments are still being passed by the majority on how society should be run. In todays modern world the media has a great effect on not only how people live their lives but how they communicate, react, feel and think about things and each other. For example in the movie Secondhand Lions, Walter asked to go watch TV and Garth’s response was “Ain’t got none”(lMDB. om), so in a case like this Walter had no choice but to adapt o the new society; and without television he had to resort to what was natural; what he knew prior and what he thought was right. Just by that example we can tell TV has a great impact on an individual’s viewpoint and if 1 million people watch the same show most of them are going to act on what they see and if there were one million people without televisions they would all have to write their own script. So imagine a world without TV; would it be dull or creative?
I must admit it would mean a less colorful life but less color doesn’t mean gray, it means you have a chance to paint our own color; Think your own thoughts and act on your own words, it would mean more individuality. TV has a huge impingement on individuals therefore it has an immense effect on society. “Rome wasn’t built in a day’ (Unknown) accordingly so was televisions impact on the world. It did not take one day for TV to take over, it started with simple individuals then it expanded to a family. Family has one of the greatest influences over an individual.
In the book What’s eating Gilbert Grape’, Gilbert’s father hangs himself nd it plays a huge role in his mother’s life. Bonnie Grape starts eating herself to death Just like her husband; committing suicide. But not only did she eat, she watched TV t provided ner witn some sort ot added comtort I . t there wasn’t a the Grapes house the results would be much different, she would still eat but she would also probably die of boredom, the chances of her getting up and picking herself up would be much greater since there wouldn’t be 2417 entertainment.
Before TV children were more focused in school, acts of violence and bad behavior asn’t as evident and more families actually ate dinner together around a table; these changes may seem minuscule but they exhibit the extensive changes in our generations and generations to come. In order for TV to start showing certain things they have to have the “approval” of society. Before TV could go against the Pleasantville values of sleeping in the same bed they had to be certain that majority of their audiences found it 0k.
In order for a show to remain on TV it has to meet the expectations of a Nielsen family and roducers of movies and TV shows have that in mind. Before depicting something as extensive as family, directors and producers must first be aware of the various family types in order not to offend. With that being said we can conclude that America also has a say in what is broadcasted through that moving box. It is now safe to state that television has a great impact on the lives of Americans as do Americans on television. Did TV change America or did America change TV? Was the change good or bad?
TV brought entertainment into our homes and also with this came the media. Technology brought more entertainment through Television and slowly (around the 60s) things began to change a little each year. Movies were more blood and guts and at first it was rather entertaining, but, it also changed our culture as we know it. Also, too much media and therefore we were far more aware of what was not only going on in our own country, but countries around the world. Sometimes ignorance is bliss. Control is a good thing and we can mix entertainment on the Television, but limiting our use of it.
We’ve become a fat society in Canada and the U. S. and it’s simply the lack of exercise and Junk food eating. It’s fragmented many families. Dad wants to watch his program (usually sports) while mom wants to watch a movie, and then the kids want their DVD games or movie. Many families have ceased to communicate with each other as it’s easier to watch TV. The change television caused in America and for families was enormous. From generation to generation change is still being portrayed through family and society; the change is ambiguous, it could be perceived as good to some yet bad to others.
But the facts still remains, TV had a huge impact on the world. Television is also impacted by society, we the people (Famous quote) determine what is shown on television and what is viewed by our families. But which plays a greater role, TV on family or family on TV? Personally, I think TV has a greater influence on families, we watch the TV the TV doesn’t necessarily watch us, so we act on what we see and we model the behaviors we see, how much we model is up to us but some way, somehow television not only impacted a family, it impacted a nation and a generation.
Multiculturalism in Canada narrative essay help: narrative essay help
The topic ot “multiculturalism,” nas been a hotly debated issue since the end ot the colonizing era. In their endeavor to find the best policy for multiculturalism, different countries opted for different options. States that chose to integrate cultural minorities into their mainstream society had to find the solution that would provide the most equality among citizens; a solution that would later translate into national solidarity and social cohesion.
While some countries have strived to assimilate cultural minorities, others have attempted to “turn a blind eye” and tolerate them. Multiculturalism for me means to aid the integration of minorities into the mainstream society by granting them group-specific cultural rights. Providing group- specific rights would mean providing equality for all citizens by making up for the minority’s reduced status they succumbed when integrating into society.
This paper will contrast and compare the different forms of multiculturalism policies and will ultimately prove that creating citizen equality by granting group-specific rights to deserving cultural groups is the fairest and most rewarding approach to dealing with ulticulturalism. During colonialism, conquering powers made many mistakes in their attempts to deal with the aboriginals of their conquered lands. As Kymlicka (2002) declares, the colonialists’ first instinct was to either banish the indigenous people into isolated reserves or force them to abandon their culture and be assimilated into the new Western culture.
The colonialists’ rationale was that if the aboriginals became citizens, they would incorporate themselves into the Western culture by gaining equal rights and would assume a common identity with all citizens. Although this ounds like a well Justified argument, when explored in depth, it is easily realized that solely granting citizenship to the aboriginals wouldn’t necessarily lead to integration. This can be determined by the assumption that colonialist state citizens wouldn’t automatically welcome these new ‘different’ citizens with open arms. Kymlicka, 2002) In addition, the First Nations, along with most other cultures, would predictably not want to shun their own culture and adopt a new one. This is especially true when the cultures in the process of being assimilated are subject to violence and forced compliance to the colonizers. Historically, the negative results associated with assimilation prove that assimilation will not work as a form of integration and a new solution based around groups being able to maintain their previous cultural ties would have to be utilized.
After failing to succeed with assimilation attempts, the British colonizers of Canada opted for the option of banishment of natives; an option that would prove to have even more negative implications. Through a series of treaties that First Nation leaders were coerced to sign, the aboriginals of Canada were steadily removed of their rights and their territories. Eventually, these aboriginals were confined to reserves where they could no longer practice their previous lifestyles and their society was essentially ruined.
Present day aboriginal peoples of Canada still suffer the consequences of their ancestor’s rights being violated during the colonizing era. Furthermore, due to the actions ot the English colonizers centuries ago, the Canadian government today still faces the plight of the First Nations’ ruined society. The problems in First Nation reserves range from unemployment, to alcoholism, to high suicide rates; making it clear that the aboriginal peoples have not had success dapting to modern society effectively.
Thus, I feel it is now the government’s duty to support the Canadian aboriginal groups by not only providing them with financial assistance, but also by granting them with group-specific rights to subsidize their misfortunes and at least attempt to give them social and economic equality with the national majority. Overall, neither assimilation nor isolation have worked in history as means of dealing with culture groups. Another solution based on integration to society, while being able to maintain one’s culture, needs to be explored.
Such a solution exists in the present day United States. Here, the government acts under the principle of ‘benign neglect’. (Walzer 1992, in Kymlicka, 2002) Such a principle revolves around the state being indifferent to the ethnocultural groups in its country by allowing them to maintain their desired culture as long as they don’t violate the American constitution. (Kymlicka, 2002) The neutrality under which the American government functions allows all cultural groups to integrate as much as they see fit into the mainstream society.
Consequently, the American government argues that there is no necessity for minority rights in their country since no one, not ven the majority, are favored to any extent and everyone’s culture is tolerated. However, there are faults with the American policy of ‘benign neglect’. Kymlicka (2002) disputes that although the United States declare that they have no recognized official language, the American government has historically ensured that Anglophones become a majority in all of the fifty states. Additionally, the United States still maintains policies today to guarantee that new citizens of the United States are able to speak English.
These policies reveal that the Anglophone majority in the United States does indeed benefit by speaking English and there are no minority rights that subsidize the effects of these policies on the minorities. Furthermore, the fact that cultures are tolerated’ for moral reasons in the United States can be seen as disrespectful. Culture groups want to be accepted, understood, and appreciated for what they are, not simply tolerated. Toleration, according to MookherJee (2008), is something that must be based on self-interest and not sheer desire for moral growth.
In summary, the aforementioned faults with the multiculturalism policy of benign neglect’ therefore deem the American policy invalid as it fails to provide actual equality for its citizens. Thus a need for an additional approach to multiculturalism is required. The American benign neglect leaves something to be desired and thus forces national minorities to seek either isolation from mainstream society or integration under fairer terms; hence the debate for group-specific rights. (Kymlicka, 2002) As shown in the example of the First Nations in Canada, isolationism is not very appealing.
Therefore, most minority groups choose to integrate into society. However, hey need to find a means to protect their culture from the government’s ‘nation- building process once they integrate. Nation-building is a fundamentally acceptable idea since it woul d, in theory, provide a common identity among citizens and equal opportunity to access social institutions. (Kymlicka, 2002) However, nation-building acts too much in the likes of assimilation by promoting one culture and one language that all citizens would have to conform to.
The response from minorities would then be to limit the effects of nation-building on their culture by requesting group-specific ights. The minorities’ Justification for these rights would be that since the national majority is being benefited by their culture being dispersed among the nation, the benefits have to be balanced. Essentially, group-specific rights are based on the state being convinced that life is fundamentally unequal for minorities in society and thus there is a need to balance out inequalities by providing minorities with special privileges.
This is consistent with ‘multicultural theory as outlined by MookherJee (2008), which states that it is, “unjust if the law of the land demands much greater acrifices of minorities than it does the majority. ” Group-specific rights are however, a very controversial proposal. MookherJee (2008) argues that “uniform citizenship is not enough for members of minority cultures in a liberal society. ” Therefore, minorities need ‘differentiated citizenship’ in order to acknowledge that some groups have different needs and goals.
This seems like a reasonable request, but there are many potential implications to granting special rights. The two main questions associated with group-specific rights are: who gets them? And what rights do they get? The government has to make sure that the pecial group-rights they grant do not result in the rights of the members in the culture group being violated in any way. According to Kymlicka (2002), there are two possible types of rights that minorities might claim. One of them would be for “external protections,” this would protect the minority from the external pressures of society.
The latter one would allow groups to suppress their members to prevent dissent against the ideals and beliefs of the culture group. The government would understandably have to be extremely cautious about which groups receive group-specific rights. Most groups will use these rights for the protection of their culture and to supplement the individual rights of their members. (Raz in Kymlicka, 2002) However, there will be some groups that will utilize minority rights to perform illiberal actions that violate member’s rights.
According to Okin (1999), most times, these violations would be targeted towards women. While some groups violate women openly by not allowing them to be educated or to vote, what about those groups that only mistreat women behind closed doors? Okin (1999) warns that most violations against women are informal and happen within the household. These may include but are not limited to: forcing women to work only in the home, and subjecting women to sexual violence.
Okin (1999) argues that most traditional groups, especially religious groups, tend to hold the belief that women should be dominated by men and this is the primary reason why the state should not even consider the idea of granting group-specific rights. However, I believe Kymlicka’s (2002) limitations on which groups can receive minority rights are a very efficient buffer to prevent these violations from occurring. Kymlicka 2) understands that there is a need to ditterentiate between what ne alls “good” and “bad” minority rights; the former supplement individual rights, while the latter restrict individual rights.
I support Kymlicka’s criteria for granting cultural rights, which includes: allowing free association and the right to exit (MookherJee, 2008), and that the group demanding special rights be subject to a constitution that defines all the rights of group members. These three main benchmarks would need to be present in order for groups to receive cultural rights and they would also be essential in ensuring that the benefits that group-specific rights are meant to provide re provided. I am aware of Okin’s (1999) argument that only a very limited of cultural groups will be able to meet this criteria.
However, I strongly believe that if a culture group fails to ensure the safety and well-being of its members, it is not consistent with a liberal state and should by no means receive the privileges to carry out their illiberal actions inside a liberal state. However, if liberal-democratic cultural groups are awarded special rights, they can use these for positive endeavors. Examples include: to protect their cultures from external societal pressures, which will in turn rovide group members with a sense of membership in a community.
In addition, the society in which the group is demanding rights will benefit from having different cultures enriching its own. Ideally, the larger society will accept the cultural group and its members will receive positive recognition, which as Taylor (1992, in MookherJee, 2008) states, is a Vital human need. ‘ In the end, both the cultural groups and society as a whole should benefit from the existence and success of these groups. However it is my belief that this harmonious ideal can only be achieved through the granting of group-specific rights.
In conclusion, I believe that minority cultural rights are Justified. Throughout this paper, I have explored other possible realistic and even current policies for dealing with multiculturalism. However, each alternative has a fault or something that I feel can be improved using Kymlicka’s (2002) example. Firstly, neither assimilation nor isolation policies were successful in the past. Secondly, benign neglect in the United States has shown its inefficiency by the fact that the government doesn’t trust its own policy and opts to covertly favor the majority.
Furthermore, toleration is not the most nclusive policy of multiculturalism as it doesn’t necessarily create cohesion between cultures and a desired unified nation. And finally, Okin’s (1999) feminist perspective against cultural rights is well defended. However, most right violations of women can be easily prevented by following Kymlicka’s (2002) criteria for the granting of group- specific rights. In general, group-specific rights are merely a way in which the government acknowledges the difficulties that minorities face in maintaining their cultural autonomy.
To fix this fundamental inequality, it is necessary that the overnment grants group-specific cultural rights which would then fix this unbalance of equality and put many groups on as Kymlicka (2002) calls it, a more ‘equal footing,’ with the rest of society. Thus creating harmony.
Being a Team Player essay help services: essay help services
With this topic that I pick is team player. In this paper I will be discussing and arguing my point of view of what a team player is. How a team player is valuable to a company or in school. I will also go into a debate of the dislikes and likes of a team player. When is the best time to be a team player? So hopefully after reading this paper you will be able to understand my point of view on the team player. Team Player When you go to Dictionary. om and look up the definition team player you will ind that there are several definitions to a team player. You can say that a team player is someone that carries his or her own weight. A worker or a student that always goes above and beyond of what is expected of him or her. A person that can function on a Job and complete all tasks that are given. Or you can have your own definition of what a team player means to you. TEAM PLAYER In any company or any aspect of life you will need team players it maybe in the workplace or in school.
Team players can be very valuable in the workplace when rying to get assignments done so you can leave on time or before the scheduled shift. A team player can also get promotions or other recognitions for being a team player. Likes and Dislikes You may find that in most cases that 90% of the time that people love a team player. But then you will always have those that don’t like a team player. The likes of a team player are that they are dependable. They are always willing to take on more work than others.
They are able to complete assignment on or before the due dates. In the classroom team players are liked due to the fact that they will help other students that have not quite grasped the concept that the teacher has taught the teacher will use the team player to help in the classroom. The team player in a classroom setting in most cases is labeled as a teacher’s pet. Most of the times the assignments are done with perfection. Then on the other hand you will have those people that don’t like a team player due to the fact that they will always get recognitions.
They are lways called out on the good work that they have accomplished or how that team player has helped on a project in the classroom or in the workplace. Doing more work than the average worker. Some workers see this as a threat to their Job. The worker may also feel as though there Job is at Jeopardy. If the work is in a high position they can be demoted due to the team player that is doing more than what is expected. Valuable In many ways I will say that a team player is valuable. They are valuable to a company because in most cases the team player keeps the company afloat.
In many companies the President, CEO, or supervisors always want to keep their team players. Some companies will not let their valuable player go due to competition. Being a valuable asset is very important because it looks good a resume that you are part of a team and that you can work well with others. In most companies you have to be a team player to help the company succeed. So by the potential employer already seeing this on a resume is a plus.
Winners never quit argumentative essay help online: argumentative essay help online
“A quitter never wins and a winner never quits” Vince Lombardi, a famous American football coach, once said, “A quitter never wins and a winner never quits”. We have heard of this saying at least once in our lives. And we all have had the opportunity to apply the saying to a part of our lives, be it in a sports team, in academics, at work or even at relationships. A winner is someone who is determined to reach his goals, no matter how arduous the Journey may be. A winner is ready to face challenges and obstacles that may come in between him and his goals.
On the other hand, a quitter gets perturbed by hallenges, and in the midst, gives up. Because he is not determined to face the difficulties, he never reaches his goal and is declared a quitter. Most of us are not born with talent and skills. We develop them over time. Pandit Ravi Shankar was a world renowned composer and musician who played the sitar. He was so passionate about music that he did not stop learning the sitar. Although he faced difficulties initially, he did not lose hope. He was determined to succeed, and he practised day and night to attain a high position in the international music industry.
Similarly, scientists like Issac Newton and Albert Einstein never gave up pursuing their dreams and interests Just because some of their experiments failed. They strived hard to reach their goals and only rested when success touched their feet. To give up midway is easy but to continue despite challenges is difficult. That is why only winners are remembered for a long time. They are our role models, who teach us that it pays to never quit. Success only knocks on the doors of winners because they are determined in life. On the other hand, a quitter lives most of his life in regret because of his lack of motivation and dedication.
Tragedy of Oedipus Rex and Antigone college essay help online free: college essay help online free
In the tragedy of Oedipus Rex and Antigone, Oedipus and Creon do foolish actions. In a way they had eyes yet were blind to the actions they created. The story of Oedipus was well known to Sophocles’ audience. In Oedipus Rex, Oedipus was born from Jocasta and the king as a prince, but a prophet foretold that he would kill the king and “lay” with his mother. So the king and Jocasta let him bleed out on a mountain. Afterward he was then raised by the people who found him. hen he grew up he then killed a unknown man (the king) on the streets from andom pleasure and then forgets about it later on. So Oedipus arrives at Thebes a stranger and finds the town under the curse of the Sphinx, who will not free the city unless her riddle is answered. Oedipus solves the riddle and, since the king has recently been murdered, becomes the king and marries the queen. In time, he comes to learn that he is actually a Theban, the kings son, cast out of Thebes as a baby.
He has killed his father and married his mother. Horrified, he blinds himself and leaves Thebes forever. This story portrays countless forms of blindness. in the first act of blindness, his parents decided to kill their son Just because a prophet said he would be their end. For some reason the Just followed this fortune cookie thus leading to it happening. secondly, Oedipus and his random murder. for some reason unknown he decides to kill a random man off the street not even knowing who it was. nother form was Jocasta marring oedpus who clearly shows signs from her staking him in the ankles ut somehow not ever even knowing they’re there. Antigone and Ismene, the daughters of Oedipus, discuss the disaster that has Just befallen them. Their brothers Polynices and Eteocles have killed one another in a battle for control over Thebes. Creon now rules the city, and he has ordered that Polynices, who brought a foreign army against Thebes, not be allowed proper burial rites. Creon threatens to kill anyone who tries to bury Polynices and stations sentries over his body.
Antigone, in spite of Creon’s edict and without the help of her sister Ismene, resolves to give their brother a proper burial. Soon, a nervous sentry arrives at the palace to tell Creon that, while the sentries slept, someone gave Polynices burial rites. Creon says that he thinks some of the dissidents of the city bribed the sentry to perform the rites, and he vows to execute the sentry if no other suspect is found. Essay summary on the tragedy of Oedipus Rex and Antigone By Trevor-Micheal
Churches role in a puritain marriage medical school essay help: medical school essay help
In the play The Crucible by Arthur Miller, the church’s role in a Puritan marriage is very accurately described. Marriage is when a man and a woman come together and form a holy bond under God. The Puritan church had a very important role in a marriage during the 1700s; People lived their lives and based their marriages off of what the church was teaching. A very good example shown in the play is the marriage of John Proctor and Elizabeth Proctor.
The church’s influence is perfectly xemplified in this fictional marriage because every decision that John or Elizabeth makes pertaining to their marriage has the church’s teachings included in it. They aren’t the only ones, every marriage depicted in the play shows two people who value the church over the wellbeing of their loved ones. One example of a character that chooses the church over their spouse is when Giles Corey tells reverend Hale about his wife Martha.
When Reverend Hale arrives from Beverly, he immediately wants to go see Parris’ Daughter Betty, and on the way o see her, Giles Corey tells Reverend Hale about this book that his wife has that he thinks prevents him from completing his prayers. He asks Hale, “Mister Hale… I have always wanted to ask a learned man”What signifies the readin’ of strange books?….. I cannot tell; she hides them. Martha, my wife. I have waked at night many times and found her in a corner, readin’ ofa book. Now what do you make of that?….
It discomforts me! Last night”mark this”I tried and tried and could not say my prayers. And then she close her book and walks out of the house, and suddenly” ark this”I could pray again! ” (Miller 190). In not so many words, Giles Corey accused his own wife of consulting with the devil, according to reverend Hale the stoppage of prayer could signify the devils workings. “the crime of witchcraft was a felony. Of the 100 people accused before the 1690s, at least twelve were executed” (Moss and Wilson).
When Giles Corey told Reverend Hale about his wife’s book, he knowingly sentenced his own wife to the fate of execution. Another Example shown in the play is in the relationship between Abigail Williams nd John Proctor, this is not a marriage but it gets the point across quite clearly. Abigail is head over heels in love with John Proctor to the point where it is obsessive, “l know how you clutched my back behind your house and sweated like a stallion whenever I come near!
I saw your face when she put me out and you loved me then and you do now! You loved me, John Proctor, and whatever sin it is you love me yet! ” (Miller 189) when Abigail starts accusing Elizabeth and John defends her, Abigail betrays her love and accuses him of consulting with the devil too. One example is the Proctors marriage. In the proctors marriage it is obvious that John Proctor has committed the sin of Adultery with Abigail Williams and it is also obvious at tn Elizabeth is very aware ot the tact that Jonn nas done this.
Instead ot deciding to make the John’s transgression public to the community, Elizabeth and John remain cordial toward each other. When John and Elizabeth are talking to each other in the prison, Elizabeth admits to John that it is mostly her fault that he committed adultery because she didn’t show John the affection that a good wife hould, “Sexuality was regarded as an important part of marriage” (The Puritan Family).
It is easy for one to see how much the Puritan church affected life in the 1700s. People would betray their loved ones if they suspected them of consulting with the devil. “For the puritans, marriage was a contract that should be performed in front of a civil, not a religious, authority, and both parties had the right to divorce if the terms of the marriage covenant were violated” people were willing to violate that, because of religion and the Church.
Jury in court popular mba argumentative essay help: popular mba argumentative essay help
It must be recognise that the early function of Jury is very different form what it is today. The very first Jury had acted as witness and provides information to the court. Later, Henry II changed the function of Jury to one who deliberates on evidence. Slowly, the Jury system mold into the system we have today.  The system by which we are familiar with today, i. e. Juries giving verdicts on the basis of what is related to them by witnesses at the court hearing was coming into prominence in trials of serious offences as early as the fifteenth centur The main act that governs the Jury ystem is the Jury Act 1974, which were largely amended by the Criminal Justice Act 2003.  A Jury is a group of men and women who sit in court, listen to evidence and decide whether the court had establish beyond reasonable doubt for criminal cases or on the balance of probability for civil cases, that the defendant had commit the offence charged. A Jury is defined as a body of persons convened by process of law to represent the public at a trial or inquest and to discharge upon oath or affirmation defined public duties.  The Jury’s duty is to return verdicts upon issues Joined in courts of civil nd criminal Jurisdiction or findings of fact at coroners’ courts. The role of the Jury is four-fold: – to weigh up the evidence and decide what the true facts of the case are, to listen to the directions of the Judge as to the relevant law and then apply the law to the facts before reaching a verdict. Juries are used in both Criminal and Civil cases although the use of Juries is very small. Juries are used in the Crown Court for criminal trials of indictment, High Court – Queen’s Bench Division, County Court and in some cases the Coroners’ Courts. Less han 1% of criminal cases are decided on by a Jury this is because 97% of cases are dealt by the Magistrates’ Court and from the cases that go to the Crown Court, about two out of three defendants plead guilty. Juries in criminal cases are used to decide the guilt or innocence of the defendant. Juries are used in civil cases to decide the liability and on the damages for the following cases; deformation, malicious prosecution, fraud and false imprisonment. In very exceptional cases a Jury can be used in personal injury cases. In these cases a Judge of character isn’t necessary so here is no need for a trail. Person injury cases should normally be tried by a Judge to assess compensation award on a fixed scale. The case on Ward v James (1966) established that Juries will only be used in “exceptional circumstances,” the case of H v Ministry of Defence (1991) further reinforced this rule. The use of a Jury is viewed as making the legal system more open. Justice is seen to be done as members of the public are involved in a key role and the whole process is public. There are several advantages of the system of trial by Jury. Firstly, the general public cceptance of the way the Jury system works. As I have already stated, the Jury system has been around for many years, almost 800 years now; the fact that the Jury has stood the test of time has given society a feeling of acceptance that this is the best way to decide on the outcome ot indicta ble ottences. Secondly, the Jury system gives the public a chance to participate in the legal process. Selection for Jury service is basically a lottery. If the three conditions required for Jury service are met; the persons name appears on the electoral register; they are aged between 18 and 70; and have lived in the U. K for at least 5 years since their 13th birthday, then there is every chance that any person could be selected for Jury service. Most members of the public find this an exciting insight into the legal system; however some people find the experience extremely costly as it means that they cannot work while the trial is in progress. A third advantage is that the Jurors are totally impartial and the decision is made purely on opinion. Obviously this opinion must be heard in a majority vote of at least 10 out of 11 or 9 out of 10 Jurors. The Jurors vary rarely know much about the legal rocedure and are therefore not case-hardened as Judges would be should they be introduced, as in alternative suggestions to the Jury system. Fourthly, the public of England and abroad have great confidence that the cases have been tried fairly and that the system is effective. With the public having great confidence in the system, it is very difficult politically to alter the system. For example, when Diplock Courts were introduced into Northern Ireland, these were greeted with displeasure as it tampered with the Jury system. These courts are used in terrorist cases and are Judge only courts with no Jury. A simple yet very significant reason as to why the Jury system is advantageous is the fact that 12 heads are better than 1. With 12 Jurors, a wide variety of opinions and input is culminated together in the final decision; a single Judge has only one viewpoint and this is purely of the legal perspective. Finally, decisions can be made on what seems right and not whether the offence is illegal or not. By this I mean that, if the defended acted in good heart and can convince the Jury that his/hers action was reasonable in the circumstances, then the jury are able to acquit the defendant. A Judge can only administer a verdict based on the facts laid before whereas a Jury can decide based on opinion. This point has been evident in numerous recent cases such as R v Ponting (1985) – In this case official secrets were disclosed however Ponting successfully argued that the secrets were disclosed in the interest of the nation and was acquitted by the Jury. A further example was R v Kronlid and Others (1996)- In this case Kronlid and others caused El . 5 million worth of damage to a fghter aircraft that was to be sold to the Indonesian Government. Kronlid successfully argued that the plane would be used to yrannize the people of East Timor and was acquitted by the Jury. All of the above are reasons as to why the Jury system is advantageous. I will now explore disadvantages of the system. Firstly, as the selection for Jury service (governed by section 1 of the Juries Act 1974 as amended by the Criminal Justice Act 1988) is totally down to chance, there is the realistic possibility that incompetent people, who are unable to deal with the court atmosphere, may be selected for Jury service. This occurred in R v Chapman (1974) when a deat Juror sat through the trial without nearing a word ot the trial . The Court f Appeal also decided that the Juror had not prejudiced the trial and therefore the decision stood. After this case, Lord Denning caused for a suitability test to be introduced to decide on whether the Juror is adequate to perform, however this could result in huge financial cost. Secondly retrials are very expensive. The Jury do not have to agree, and should they disagree, a retrial would have to be arranged. The introduction of a single Judge or a panel of Judges to decide would abolish this problem, as the Judge would decide one way or the other. As well as retrials being expensive, the trial by Jury itself costs lots ore than what it would to employ a single Judge to sit on the trial. This is a considerable amount and is comparatively much more expensive to the taxpayer than what a single Judge would be. Thirdly, Jurors may not fully understand the trial and may be enticed to vote for the best barrister and not the best case. A realistic problem is that Jurors can be corrupted by outside influences. As Jurors are not paid, only compensated for loss of earnings, then some may be tempted to accept a bribe to vote to acquit the defendant. There is the growing feeling that certain Jurors are more dominant than others and herefore dominate the Jury room. Jurors can be effectively bullied into agreeing with the dominant Juror. As Jurors are laymen, if the evidence points to one defendant being guilty and the other not, Jurors can often be led into thinking that if one should be convicted, so should the other; in other words: guilt by association. A seemingly obvious problem with the use of laymen in the administration of Justice is that mistakes must inexorably occur. A study done over around 370 trials at Birmingham Crown Court in the late 1970’s showed three startling results: that 25% f all acquittals were questionable; that 5% of all convictions were questionable; and that there was comprehensible evidence that some trials were racially biased. A further reason as to the disadvantages of the Jury system is that some trials can be very harrowing to the Jurors. This was evident in the James Bulger trial where some jurors had to receive counselling after the trial. There are many alternatives to a Jury one being that of a single Judge. This method is used in civil cases and some criminal trials in N. Ireland (Diplock courts). This process is the least expensive and probably the most proficient way of running a trial. Because it eradicates public involvement there has been strong opposition to this method. However by discarding the Jury they also discard any violence and intimidation to Jurors and also any possible bias. Another alternative is that of a panel of Judges. This system is used in some continental countries. This method again abolishes public participation. Having a panel of Judges would mean that more Judges would have to be trained making it more expensive not only to get them qualified but also to pay their wages. A Judge and 2 lay assessors can also be used. This technique is used in most Scandinavian countries. This keeps some public contribution, yet loses the time and cost of using a Jury: because of this, this method is thought of as the most adequate alternative. The verdict would be reached by both the Judge and lay assessors. The lay assessors would be selected the same way as Jurors; however the amount of public participation would dramatically decrease. The final alternative is having a Judge and a miny Jury. By reducing the amount of jurors they would save some cost; conversely most of the disadvantages would still remain. Despite all of the disadvantages with the Jury system, it is still utilized today which uggests that it is an advantage to society more than it is a disadvantage. The system of trial by Jury has been successfully used in society for hundreds of years. Anything that has remained in such constant use over such a long period of time must be deemed to be worthwhile keeping. Although various alternatives have been suggested to the Jury system, no one has been able to fathom a superior way to decide on the defendant’s fate. It has to be said that the system of trial by Jury is used to the advantage of the public and, until any other superior alternative is introduced, it will continue to be an asset to society.
Lying to find the “truth” persuasive essay help: persuasive essay help
The Thin Blue Line Rough Draft 4 November 2013 Lying to find the “truth” The Thin Blue Line documentary by Errol Morris provides reenactments and investigation interviews of a late November homicide of a Dallas, Texas police officer, Robert Wood. This murder was at the hands of a troubled 16 year old, David Harris, who shot a man from inside a stolen Mercury Comet with a stolen . 22 pistol. Randall Adams, innocent, and wrongly accused of being in the passenger seat of Harris’ stolen car, was blamed as the killer of police officer Robert Wood on the late
November evening in Dallas, Texas. Young and afraid, David Harris claims Randall Adams is the gunman who shot down Robert Wood in Dallas, consequently many of the case’s investigators accept such a conviction due to the need for a “wrap up” of the case; furthermore the DA, in effort to keep his perfect win record by convicting Adams, and his desire for the death penalty compliments well to the lie that Randall Adams was the murderer because Randall Adams, age twenty-eight, made him the perfect scapegoat for the death penalty. David Harris has a criminal background when meeting Randall Adams.
Harris says to screenplay writer Errol Morris, “Criminal always lie”, being the reason David Harris blames the murder on innocent Randall Adams. Throughout the film David Harris is correctly portrayed as being a troubled kid throughout his life. David Harris lands himself in and out of Jail and even ends up attacking his superior officers in the military. His troubled, criminal life plainly relates to his immaturity. An immature 16 year old likes to blame others for their mistakes and get out of trouble, being exactly what David Harris did. Harris even did it to a friend of his, Randall Adams.
Errol Morris and David Harris have the following conversation: Errol Morris: Were you surprised when the police blamed [Randall Adams]? David Harris: They didnt blame [Randall Adams]. I did. A scared sixteen year old kid. He would sure like to get out of it if he can. This only goes to show that David Harris blamed and admitted to blaming Randall Adams, being one of the reasons Randall Adams was pinned for the murder of police officer Robert Wood. The investigators easily accepted David Harris’ conviction that Randall Adams killed Wood due to the longevity of the investigation.
As Gus Rose puts it, “We’d never really gone that long in Dallas without clearing the murder of a police officer… the case had gone a month, or nearly a month and we still hadn’t cleared it. ” Due to the investigators urgency for the case to be wrapped up they all fell to the hands of groupthink. Stephanie Ericsson in “The Ways We Lie” explains groupthink, “as a psychological phenomenon within decision-making groups in which loyalty to the group has become more important than any other value, with the result that dissent nd the appraisal of alternatives are suppressed” (164).
An example of this happening in the investigation is when the investigators incorrectly label Adams’ statement of what happened the night of Robert Woods’ murder. Adams’ explains, “l tell them what happened this Saturday… ‘ read through it, and when it was basically what I liked, yes, I signed it… The Morning News in Dallas County stated that… ‘ confessed to the killing of Robert Wood… that they had their killer and they were ready to go with it. The statement that I signed for Dallas County was never… a confession’ quote, but yet, they labeled is as such”.
The investigators group thinking to finish the investigation caused them to be loyal to themselves (rushing the case), instead of being moral and understanding the case. They took Adams’ simple statement of what happened Saturday night and posed it as a homicide confession. This is a dramatic change, which brought down Adams’ potential to go home without Jail time and ride off of serious convictions. The investigators all wanted to push through the insufficient information that they had and they went by any means to do it.
Again, as Stephanie Ericsson states ” alternatives are suppressed” in groupthink, it is obvious that the investigators suppressed the alternative that David Harris was the person who killed the police officer and not Randall Adams. On another point, Doug Mulder, the district attorney in the case had a perfect win record throughout his career and was not about to resign with a tarnished reputation. Mulder strongly believed that Randall Adams was the murderer because all the evidence given in the case falsely pointed to Randall Adams as the murderer.
Defense attorney for Randall Adams, Edith Adams says, “… Mulder [always said… ] how wonderful it was that he was getting all these convictions. ” Mulder had too much pride over the span of his career to let this one case make him look bad. In an effort to secure himself as the district attorney, Doug Mulder trash talked Edith Adams’ partner, Dennis White. Dennis White goes on to say, “Well, I immediately began to suspect from the time I was close to Vidor that I was being followed and observed. Doug Mulder… had told the people of Vidor that I was a… astern educated civil iberties attorney, and that I was down there to discredit David Harris”. Mulder gave every effort to attack Randall Adams and those who defended him, only in an effort to secure himself in order to have a flawless looking career record. Along with favoring a perfect win record, Mulder also favored the death penalty. Doug Mulder, being a district attorney in Texas tavored the death penalty and gave it to anyone that he could give it to. The major fact that David Harris was a 16 year old presented the idea that Randall Adams was the murderer because Adams was 28 nd could be sentenced to death.
This played a major role in why Randall Adams was convicted for the murder and was thrown on death row. Edith James explains, “They had a twenty-eight year old man. The only alternative was to be prosecuting a sixteen year old that could not be given the death penalty under Texas Law, where our twenty-eight year old man could. That’s always been the predominant motive… for having a death penalty case against Randall Adams… he was a convenient age”. Edith James, being Adams’ defense attorney, had no problem pointing out the eceitful actions of Doug Mulder throughout the case.
As James says, Adams was at a very convenient age which made it easy for Mulder to prosecute Randall Adams, placing him on death row. All things considered, Randall Adams was placed on death row by the Texas law enforcement for a multitude of bad luck. David Harris was a perfidious liar, the investigators were running out of time and needed to end the case, and Doug Mulder’s lack of integrity in order to maintain that perfect record of his and conveniently pin Randall Adams as the murderer all brought Randall Adams to a evel that was inescapable.
Colonial women essay help from professional writers: essay help from professional writers
Colonial women faced many challenges during their lives. They had limited rights and were treated unfairly. They faced obstacles everyday of their lives. Women would experience changes in many aspects including social, political, and cultural. Women fought for what they believed in and eventually would make progress towards gaining their rights. However, all of this would come over a long period of time. Women made advances and tried to get access to their rights, but were denied most of the time. This constant battle made progress difficult and seem almost impossible at times.
However, women strived to make changes and achieve their ultimate goals. Women weren’t allowed to have any formal political participation. Their opinions didn’t matter and they didn’t have a say in almost anything. Women had no legal standing and no right to vote. William Blackstone was an English Jurist, Judge, and politician of the 18th century. He wrote Commentaries on the Laws of England in 1765. His work is divided into four volumes: on the right of persons, the rights of things, of private wrongs, and of public wrongs. In this work, he stated that husband and wife are as one and that one is the husband.
This is a part from the rights of persons. He demonstrates the way that women were treated and how they were looked upon and the way they were viewed. Men had absolute control and power over their wives during these times. Abigail Adams wrote a letter to her husband John Adams on May 7, 1776. In her letter she told him that she felt like he wasn’t very generous to the ladies. He was proclaiming peace and goodwill to men but insisted on men retaining an absolute power over their wives. She warned him not to put so much power into the hands of the husbands because they would all be tyrants if they could.
Abigail told her husband that women would organize a rebellion if there’s no attention or care paid to them. They wouldn’t be bound by any laws where they don’t have any voice or representation. She wrote about her life and time in letters. She was also politically influential towards her husband. Women had to obey and follow the laws, yet they had no say in anything and their voices were unheard and silenced. It was difficult for women to even speak up on issues because nobody would care to listen. Social participation is another thing that women were lacking.
They were limited on what they could do. A woman’s Job was to stay home and raise a family and take care of her husband. Women were assigned traditional roles such as taking care of the children and raising them, preparing food, taking care of the house, gardening, and educating the children. In season, they had to take care of the animals and livestock as well. The social roles for women were “true womanhood”. Women were expected to stay home and raise a family; this was the domesticity role. Young women were dependent on fathers and then their husbands after they were married.
They couldn’t work because work was supposedly about muscle power and en were stronger than women. The husband was supposed to provide for the family, and women shouldn’t compete with men. There was to be no competition amongst the man and woman. Women were expected to be the perfect wife. This meant getting married and having children and being a mother. The mother was bound to the nome and that was considered ner nest. Women were supposed to be sexually innocent. Duty was valued over passion and independence. They were expected to wear a corset and non-revealing clothing.
They were to be innocent and not sexually promiscuous. Women were seen as weak. They were physically inferior o men, as the social ideal goes. The muscle masses between men and women were different. In the world of work present at the time, the men were better for work because it was mainly muscle work. Women were excluded. However, women were culturally and socially superior to men. They created civilization and without women, there would be no civilization. They were there to educate and tame the wild men. Women taught them and showed them the finer things in life.
Women were greatly respected, which is difficult to understand based on all of their limitations and the way they were treated. They worked Just as hard as men, but weren’t allowed to receive payment for their work. They could only work if it was for free, like for charities, religion, or other organizations. As time went on, women began to participate in other Jobs. They eventually got into farming and working in the fields, and other labor as there was an increasing demand for labor. Some women began to work in household manufacturer in the cottage industry.
Clementina Rind, believed to be a native of Maryland, was Virginia’s first female printer. She was a printer for Thomas Jefferson and also the editor of the Virginia Gazette. She printed Thomas Jefferson’s A Summary View of the Rights of British America. Clementina took over her husband William Rind’s editorship and business management of the press after his death in 1773. She expressed her own voice in the gazette by writing articles about her patriotic ideals, which supported rights of American colonies and criticized British society. She was interested in scientific developments and educational opportunities.
Many women were valued readers of her paper because the she had poetic tributes to ladies and was feminine in her paper. She was independent, had good sense, and was literary skilled. She had great standards and literary Judgments. In New Jersey in 1776, women petitioned for the right to suffrage as persons not men. They were later denied in 1807. At this time free blacks were now able to vote in New Jersey, Pennsylvania, and Connecticut, yet women were still denied any right. Mary Wollstonecraft, an 18th century British writer and philosopher, was an advocate of women’s rights.
She is well known for A Vindication of the Rights of Women. It was one of the earliest works of feminist philosophy. Wollstonecraft argues that women aren’t naturally inferior to men. They only appear that way because of the lack of ducation. She believes that men and women should be treated equally as rational beings and wants social order based on reason. Women were treated unfairly for no apparent reason and were restricted to education so that they appeared inferior to men. She argues that women should have an education equal with their position in society.
She redefines the position, claiming that women are essential to the world because they educate the children. She thinks that women should be companions to their husbands, rather than Just wives. That is something new because women were never considered companions or equal to men. They were looked at as lesser beings than men and inferior. They were simply wives and nothing more. By the 1820s, there were two broad currents. Women were campaigning for legal and political participation. Women also wanted a new definition of cultural and social responsibilities This was a response to the changing economy and society.
Jobs were becoming more available and at a higher demand, and women wanted to participate instead of being bound to the home. Everything around them was progressing, yet they were at a standstill. The Boston Female Anti-Slavery Society was created in 1833. It was an abolitionist movement and organization in Boston, Massachusetts. It resulted in three national women’s conventions and organized a multistate petition campaign. The organization sued southerners who brought slaves into Boston, and it sponsored fundraisers. Some of the leaders of the group were Lucy M. Ball, Martha Violet Ball, Mary G.
Chapman, and Caroline Weston. The group lasted until 1840. Even though it dissolved within seven years, it was a step in the right direction. Women were becoming important figures in organizations and groups. The World Anti- Slavery Convention took place in London in June of 1840. Women were excluded from the convention and had to sit outside. Elizabeth Cady Stanton was a women’s rights activist, abolitionist, and leader of an early women’s rights movement. She presented her Declaration of Sentiments at the first women’s rights convention, based on the Declaration of Independence.
It was held in Seneca Falls, New York in 1848. It was held at the Wesleyan Chapel on July 19-20. The Declaration of Sentiments was asking for an equality of esteem. Stanton was committed to women’s suffrage and declined to support the 14th and 1 5th amendments. She opposed added legal protection and oting rights for African American men because women were denied all of those rights whether they were black or white. This was a great step in the right direction for women in obtaining civil, social, political, and religious rights. The pursuit of happiness was another issue for women.
They were bound to their husbands and weren’t able to live their lives the way they desired.. There was a debate over the New York Divorce Law. In 1860, New York amended its laws to allow women to keep their own property and earnings. John Milton, a Puritan poet, believed that women should be redeemed from unsupportable disturbances to honest peace and ontentment. Women were finally beginning to see minor changes in their abilities and rights. They could now keep what they earned and their property couldn’t be taken away from them.
They were slowly becoming their own individual selves The Revolution was a weekly newspaper that was published between 1868 and 1872. It was a women’s rights newspaper and the official publication of the National Women Suffrage Association, which was created by Elizabeth Cady Stanton and her friend Susan B. Anthony, a campaigner for gender equality and abolitionist. The newspaper’s motto was: men, their rights and nothing more; women, their rights and othing less. This newspaper was the official voice of the NWSA. It discussed controversial issues such as divorce, prostitution, and reproductive rights.
Working class women were attracted to the newspaper because of the columns in the newspaper that spoke of unionization and discrimination against female workers. Stanton and Anthony inspired a nationwide suffrage movement. Women were becoming more aware of the issues surrounding them and the gender issues and inequalities. They were finally gathering together and trying to make changes. In the second half of the 1800s, women began to finally get professions and careers. In 849, Elizabeth Blackwell graduated from Geneva Medical College in New York. She was the head of her class and became the first female doctor in America.
Along with ner sister Emily and their colleague Marie Zakrzews ka, they tounded the New York Infirmary for Women and Children. It was the first American hospital run by women. Also, it’s the first that was especially dedicated to serving women and children. Lucy Hobbs Taylor was the first American woman to graduate from dental school and receive a dentistry degree. She graduated from the Ohio College of Dental Surgery in 1866. After her husband’s death, she stopped being an active dentist. However, she became more involved in politics and campaigned for greater women’s rights.
Women finally began making their mark in the world of Jobs and careers. They were slowly getting in where they wanted and belonged. Book publishing became a separate, professionalized business for women. It was a big business at the time. Women invented popular fiction novels, not men. By the 1840s and 1850s women were dominating popular fiction as authors and consumers as well. Women loved to write and read books. In 1853, Nathaniel Hawthorne’s royalties were $144 and Susan Warner’s were $35,000. Women were clearly dominating the industry without any question. They were outselling the male authors.
This caused an expanding middle class and literacy was on the rise. There were subscription libraries and door-to-door sales. In 1860 there were 575 magazines, 372 daily newspapers, and 291 weekly newspapers. By 1860, there were about 10 million dollars worth of books sold. Many women finally found a secure place for themselves now that they were able to read and write books. They gained knowledge and excitement through reading novels. It was something new theyVe never seen before. There were three of the most popular enres: romantic comedy, domestic novels, and gothic.
The most popular genre was romantic comedy which was invented by the English novelist Jane Austen, who lived through the Napoleonic wars. Some of her novels include Lady Susan, Sense and Sensibility, and Pride and Prejudice. The next most popular genre was domestic novels, or sentimental romances. These were women writing to other women and telling them how to deal with their husbands. Catherine Sedgwick began this genre with New-England Tale in 1822. Gothic, the third most popular, was a genre dedicated to warewolves, Frankenstein, and vampires. Mary Shelly wrote Frankenstein, the first science fiction novel written in 1818.
She wrote this novel as an imagination to bring her dead mother back. Willkie Collins, one of the popular men authors at the time, wrote Woman in White in 1860 and Moonstone in 1868. His novels were considered as sensation novels, otherwise known as suspense and detective fiction. Women’s culture and behaviors began to change with the new changes occurring. They began to pay more attention to physical appearance and health and beauty. The first women’s magazine ever published was Godeys Ladys Handbook written by Sarah J. Hale. She was the most popular person in publishing at he time.
These women’s magazines are exactly like now a day, except less revealing and with different fashions and trends. Harper’s Bazaar was published in 1867. It was a women’s fashion magazine that gave an inside look into the world of beauty, fashion, and popular culture on a monthly basis. Women were updating their looks and beginning to follow trends. Many more changes would soon come as well. Women always played a role in the prosperity and growth of a community. These roles vary based on time periods and locations. Even though women came from different races or backgrounds, they played major roles in their families and ommunities.
Colonial women were an essential and important part ot history. They all faced struggles during their lives and had to overcome the challenges that faced them politically, socially, and emotionally and they succeeded in the end.
Death penalty academic essay help: academic essay help
The death penalty, also known as capital punishment, is an execution used as a punishment on someone convicted of a capital crime. There are several ways in which these executions have been or are being made. The most common is the lethal injection, others being electrocution, hanging, lethal gas, gas chamber, and/ or the firing squad under limited circumstances. The death penalty was first used in the U. S. in colonial times therefore leading to more than 900 executions since the year of 1976 in the U. S. with the state of Texas leading the nation (“At Issue”). There are many pros and cons that are discussed about this topic that are Justifiable depending on the different points of view. Some people believe that the death penalty serves as a deterrent for crime and that the offender deserves the punishment for the brutal crime he/she has committed. On the other hand, some say that it is an immoral practice, innocent people have died, and that it has not been proven to deter crime. There are 33 states that accept capital punishment, leaving 17 states that abolish this act.
Capital punishment is embedded on an offender in case or a murder, drug rafficking, rape of a minor, treason, espionage, and few others. There are many questions that can be asked concerning this issue. Some are: Does it affect your religion? Do you believe it deters crime? Is the cost of the death penalty worth it? Is it humane? Noted in interviewing on these questions, most of the people say that the death penalty does not deter crime, that it is against their religion, it is a humane way to kill people, and that the cost is not worth it.
For the most part the people whom were interviewed believe that the offenders who have committed capital crimes hould Just be put in Jail for life instead of being put on the death row. Proponents believe that the death penalty is appropriate because it gives closure to families of victims, it’s a way for the offender to pay for a brutal crime that was committed, and because to some extent it is believed that it deters crime. It has been said that they count between three to eighteen lives that would be saved by the execution of each convicted killer (Tanner).
Speeding executions would strengthen the deterrent effect (Tanner). When a loved one has been a victim of a murder or a rutal crime, all you want is for the person to pay for what has been done to them, which in most families gives an ending to the suffering. As stated in the following quote , “A lot of these other arguments will not matter when someone is faced with the murder of a loved one” (Williams 55-56). Opponents to the death penalty think it is an immortal practice that does not stop crime and that has lead to the execution of innocent people.
Supreme Court Justice Sandra Day O’Connor said in a speech in 2001 toa group of women lawyers in Minnesota “t he system may well be allowing some innocent detendants to be xecuted” (“Innocence”). It has been said that if capital punishment disappears in the United States it won’t be because voters and politicians no longer want to execute the guilty (Douthat 7). It will be because they’re afraid of executing the innocent (Douthat 7). A government that cannot guarantee the absolute accuracy of its proceedings should not take to itself the power of taking a human life,” said Senator Martin Looney, referring to the Tillman case (Williams 55-56). While interviewing certain people about this issue there was a statement made by a person that really caught my attention she said “… The death penalty should not be a closure to a family because another person is being killed, when God should be the one making that decision. Remember, two wrongs don’t make a right! Survey Questions 1 . Lethal injection executions have a total of parts to complete the process. a. 1 2. Alaska & Hawaii have abolished the death penalty. a. True b. False 3. What is the most common execution in the U. S.? a. Hanging b. Lethal injection c. Gas chamber 4. How many states participate in capital punishment? a. 24 b. 33 c. 25 5. Connecticut is the most recent state to abolish the death penalty. a. True 6. Since the year of 1976 there have been 11 gas chamber executions. a. True 7.
Executions are more expensive than keeping a prisoner in Jail for life. a. True 8. What has been the youngest execution? a. 20 b. 35 c. 24 According to the results on this survey many people don’t know the amount of states that are part of capital punishment and how expensive it is to practice an execution which are very important factors that should be looked into. The cost of capital punishment is extremely high. Many states have found administering capital punishment is more expensive than housing prisoners for life without parole Williams 55-56).
Due to a study released in the months of Jul/Aug of 2011 it has been stated that “last month found California has spent more than $4 billion on capital punishment since 1978, executing 13 criminals, “That’s about S million more a year than life sentences would have cost”, “New Jersey abolished its death penalty in 2007 in large part because the state had spent $254 million over 21 years administering it without executing a single person” (Williams 55-56). Concepts like these are what people take in consideration on whether capital punishment should be abolished or not.
In conclusion, capital punishment is a topic that can be argued in many different forms all depending on the viewpoints of people. Both pros and cons can be analyzed when trying to fgure out if you are for or against it. This topic has been out there since before the 80’s. Even with the most painless method available, it is seen to be cruel in our society. The death penalty has been carried out throughout the years from Egyptians to Romans to the Middle Ages until today. Back in the earlier days murder was not committed as much as it is now a days because citizens would ear the consequences of being put to death, it being the only option.
This is why in our generation people commit so much crime and murdering because most of them just get imprisoned for life where they are being taken care of with food, watching TV, and so forth instead of having to think of being put to death for the murdering of someone. For the most part the fear of punishment is what protects society. .
Strategic Management essay help 123: essay help 123
Purpose of Strategy Strategic management consists of the nalyses, decisions, and actions an organization undertakes in order to create and sustain competitive advantages 1-11 QI . Purpose of Strategy, cont. Key Attributes of strategic management: Directs the organization toward overall goals and objectives Includes multiple stakeholders in decision making Needs to incorporate short-term and long-term perspectives Recognizes trade-offs between efficiency and effectiveness 1-12 Q 2.
Strategic Problems Profit squeeze Revenue is down and costs are rising Cracks in the culture of the organization Ђ Issues How to avoid detection of the growing organization? What to do about the growing strength of the Sheriffs forces? Accept the Barons offer to Join in freeing King Richard? Impose a fixed transit tax? 1-13 Q 2. Strategic Problems, cont Expand operations away from Sherwood Forest? – Organizational communications and leadership? Kill Sheriff? – Mission linkage, replacement? Accept Barons offer? Amnesty issues, loyalty of stakeholders? Fixed transit tax? – Mission linkage? 1-14 Q3. Leadership’s Strategic Role Robin Hood needs to: Ђ Define the Organizational Mission – it may have changed. Rebellion has been routinized into banditry. Identify Stakeholders – focus may need to be broadened beyond Robin’s private grudge to include the needs of the district, the region, or the nation Establish Goals – depending on the stakeholders, these may include replacing the Sheriff or changing the political order 1-15 Q 4.
Analyze External Environment Assess Resources – the forest has finite resources – inputs into the organization (travelers to rob) have dwindled, especially since the rich ravelers have started avoiding it – trained manpower is scarce Assess Physical Environment – current growth has created a large encampment that can be seen for miles, now a target for attack 1-16 Q5.
Analyze Internal Organization Current Structure – functional with each lieutenant a specialist – communication is informal, Robin has no direct link to first line recruits Possible New Structure – decentralized regional operations, sub-bands with small headquarters to coordinate movements – increases flexibility, reduces chance of attack, liminates food distribution problems 1-17 Q6.
Culture and Values Founding Values – originally a missionary organization, if Robin pursues profit maximization now, the group will become thieves – original purpose created unity and spirit of daring Group Culture – group members will probably resist stealing from their brothers and fathers – members have a need for order and purpose, need to feel that their participation is quasi-voluntary 1-18 Q7.
Strategic Implementation Have a meeting with the Merrymen – explain the strategic dilemma and long term issues Ђ Increase organizational discipline Avoid contact with Sheriff Prepare for the possibility of ceasing operations by providing outplacement training 1-19 Q7. Strategic Implementation, cont. Ђ Recruit qualified leaders for new decentralized structure – involve lieutenants in the solution Recognize that mistakes will occur – anticipate costs of implementation, especially the problems of extended communication Pursue alliances beyond the current band of Merrymen – negotiate a possible change in the political order, negotiating amnesty, returning the band to legality
Animal imagery in of mice and men argumentative essay help online: argumentative essay help online
The title of John Steinbeck’s novel comes from a Robert Burns poem about the struggle for survival of a field-mouse: ‘The best laid plans o’ mice and men Gang aft agley which suggests from the outset that the lives of men and animals are closely linked in this novel. At the beginning of the novel not only do we learn about Lennie’s love of petting small creatures but we also learn about the hopes and dreams of the two characters.
The fact that the poem then goes on to say: ‘An’ lea’e us nought but grief and pain For promised Joy is also highly relevant to the themes of the novel since the connotations of the title nd the link to the Burns’ poem suggest that their dreams are doomed from the start. In the opening paragraphs of the novel, Steinbeck creates a picture of the natural world as a beautiful place which is disturbed by humans. To begin with the rabbits ‘sat as quietly as little, gray sculptured stones’ but as Lennie and George approach the tranquillity is disturbed as the rabbits ‘run for cover’.
The rabbits are presented as innocent and cute in their natural setting but the tranquillity of the setting is deceptive, an illusion, representing the calm before the storm whilst the grotesque maginary rabbit in the last section is not only a distortion of nature but a recognition that the natural world order has been overturned. Lennie’s dream is bound up with animals; his great desire is to tend the rabbits’ and when he gets George to repeat the mantra of the dream to him over and over again, it is this aspect that Lennie really focuses on rather than the ownership of the land.
However, animals represent not only Lennie’s dream but also his downfall. In the first section, Lennie’s child-like love of petting small creatures, particularly mice, is shown in some detail. Moreover, Lennie does not Just pet small animals, he ets them to death. When George takes the dead mouse away from Lennie it is obviously not the first time that this has happened. George recalls that Lennie’s Aunt Clara stopped giving him mice because You always killed ’em’.
We are alerted to the fact that Lennie kills the things that he pets very early on in the novel, therefore. The fate of the puppy given to Lennie by Slim seems sealed from the start. When Lennie tries to bring it back into the bunkhouse, George tells Lennie You’ll kill him the first thing you know. It is not only with small animals that Lennie is inclined to be rough. We learn that the roblems in Weed started because Lennie ‘Jus’ wanted to feel that girl’s dress – Jus’ wanted to pet it like it was a mouse’.
Steinbeck uses the deaths of the small animals to show that despite loving to stroke nice things, he inevitably kills them; once Lennie starts to stroke Curleys wife’s hair, theretore, it is only a matter ot time betore a similar tate betalls her. One of the most obvious uses of animal imagery is in the descriptions of Lennie which abound with comparisons with creatures. The first description of Lennie tells of how he Walked heavily… the way a bear drags his paws’.
When Lennie drinks eeply of the water at the beginning of this first scene, the noise he makes is likened toa horse. It is not only the sounds that Steinbeck suggests make Lennie animal-like but also the simple way he addresses his thirst by plunging his whole head in the water. Later, Lennie is said to have ‘dabbled his big paw in the water’. The use of the bear metaphor is significant with the implicit suggestion of the legendary strength of the bear and the over-enthusiastic petting of things, the ‘bear hug which is a precursor to the death of Curlers wife later in the novel.
The use of animal comparisons helps the reader to understand Lennie’s character nd gives clues about what he will be like in different situations. When George is trying to get the mouse away from Lennie in the opening section, Steinbeck uses the simile ‘like a terrier’ to suggest that Lennie will not let something go. This has further implications later in the novel when Lennie has the fight with Curley and will not let go of his hand. Lennie’s reverence of George has a dog-like quality and when George ‘snapped his fingers sharply at Lennie there is the suggestion that it is like a dog obeying its master.
However there is a sense ofa power in Lennie that cannot always be controlled. One of the most obvious uses of animal imagery is the episode with Candys dog which Steinbeck uses symbolically to hint at what is to come. The way the old dog follows Carlson so trustingly mirrors the way Lennie obeys George at the end. When he tells him to remove his hat, Lennie does so ‘dutifully and when George tells him to look across the river ‘Lennie obeyed him’.
The death of Candys dog foreshadows Lennie’s death; Lennie is shot in exactly the same way as the old dog, in the back of the head, and for the same reason – to protect him from future misery. The last section of the novel ends where it began – in the clearing – but the ranquillity of the scene in which the snake glides smoothly through the pool is disturbed by the heron which: ‘plucked it out by the head and the beak swallowed the little snake while its tail waved frantically. It is shortly after this that George finds Lennie and shoots him.
Throughout the novel, Steinbeck weaves animal imagery into the fabric of the novel, often as a precursor to what will happen in the human world. Lennie dies dreaming of the rabbits he wishes to tend. It seems to be a fitting end. characters. The tact that the poem then goes on to say: therefore, it is only a matter of time before a similar fate befalls her. he bear and the over-enthusiastic petting ot things, the ‘bear hug’ which is a precursor to the death of Curleys wife later in the novel. mplications later in the novel when Lennie has the fght with Curley and will not let goof his hand. Lennie’s reverence of George has a dog-like quality and when George obeying its master. However there is a sense of a power in Lennie that cannot always as innocent and cute in their natural setting but the tranquillity ot the setting is nice things, he inevitably kills them; once Lennie starts to stroke Curlers wife’s hair, be controlled
Unitarian Universalism college essay help online free: college essay help online free
Unitarian Universalism “What is a Unitarian Universalist? ” This is a question that many people have asked and will continue to ask in the future. There are many ways you can choose to answer this question and perhaps none of them will be able to tell the whole story. One way to answer the question is to go back to the start and show the history of the group and how it merged from two similar yet different liberal Christian denominations, into what it is today.
From this we can find that Unitarianism, Universalism, and Unitarian Universalism represent a diverse and distinct liberal eligious background, which can be seen through the group’s history, theology, and the beliefs of individual members of each congregation. Unitarian Christianity began as a countermovement of sorts to the growing influence of Orthodox Christianity during the First Great Awakening in the 1730’s and 1740’s. The first organized members of the group formed from a liberal wing of the Congregational Church in Eastern Massachusetts. In 1784, the first Unitarian Church was formed at the former Episcopal King’s Chapel in Boston.
At its earliest form, Unitarian theology nd practice was very unorganized and its congregants often disagreed about what principles the group should adhere to as a whole. The issue that defined most Unitarian belief was the nature of the Trinity and divinity of Jesus Christ. Most early Unitarians argued that the concept of the Trinity, or the idea that God was three separate entities, had no biblical warrant and was instead Just a manmade metaphysical abstraction. Historically, American Unitarians were not the first Christians to believe in the oneness of God.
Since the death of Jesus, many early Christians held the belief that Jesus was fully himself God. Even after the Nicene Creed officially adopted the idea of the Trinity in Christianity in the year 325 AD, many Christians challenged this idea and offered various other views on God and Jesus. Many of these groups were considered to be a heresy among traditional European Christian groups and were often persecuted for their beliefs. The non- Trinitarian beliefs of the American Unitarians were shown to have little influence by these groups, but in many cases they adhered to similar ideology.
Perhaps the most debated issue among American Unitarians was the idea that if Jesus was not fully God, what did this make him. One argument suggested that while Jesus was not equal to God, he was still divine and perhaps even deserved the label as the Son of God. Using this argument, it is commonly believed that Jesus can be seen from the same standpoint as most Trinitarian thought in the sense that he was born from a virgin birth, could perform miracles, rose from the dead after being crucified, etc.
The biggest issue was more or less simply the label of Jesus as being equal to God. An opposing Unitarian view held that Jesus was not divine in any sense f the word, but rather a moral teacher, who followed the word of God. This view rejected all ideas that Jesus was a supernatural being completely. Instead this idea focused on the teachings of Jesus as a model of purity, sinlessness, and perfect humanity. Many Unitarians who believed this thought the idea of the Trinity denied Jesus his tull stature as a person.
Many other alternative explanations and ideas continued to form as Unitarian theology progressed through the years. Unitarian belief continued in the United States in very unstructured, loosely related congregations until Just before the 1820’s. It was during this time period that William Ellery Channing (1780-1842) became the first major theologian and spokesperson for the American Unitarian movement. Channing was a Harvard graduate and had been pastor at the Federal Street Church in Boston since 1803.
In 1819, Channing delivered “The Baltimore Sermon,” which laid the framework for a central Unitarian theology. Channing stated that the Bible should be interpreted as any other book, believing that the Bible was not written by God, but by people inspired from history and experience, seeking to better understand the meaning of life and death. He believed that God was one, morally perfect being, that existed in no bodily form and was purely a spiritual essence. Channing said the Trinity, “Divided one infinite person into three objects of the mind (Fox, 2004). Channing did believe that Jesus was divine, but not equal to God and that Christianity had diminished devotion to following what most people knew as God the Father. Channing argued that these non-Trinitarian beliefs were actually more in context with the Bible than the ideas other Orthodox Christian denominations believed, believing that these groups had distanced Christianity from its original roots. But for Channing, Christianity wasn’t Just about having correct orthodoxic beliefs, but also realizing that Christianity is the moral perfection of the human soul and the center of virtue in Christian life.
Channing taught that Christians should have a respect for reason using the application of one’s moral insights and aspirations to daily living and social existence. He preached that grace, not fear, should be the main outlook on worshiping God. Because of Channings influence, specifically at turning Unitarian belief into a set of self-ethical standards, the American Unitarian belief was able to take a more rganized structure and the American Unitarian Association was formed in 1825.
The organization outlined its main principles as: Diffuse the knowledge and promote the interests of religion that Jesus taught as love to God and love to man Strengthen the churches and fellowships that unite in the association for more and better work for the kingdom of God Organize new churches and fellowships for the extension of Unitarianism in our own countries and in other lands Encourage sympathy and cooperation among religious liberals home and abroad Even at its peak, the Unitarian movement was not a dominant denomination within American Christianity in terms of its congregants.
But where it lacked in members, it made up in the intellectual influence of its followers. Perhaps the most influential of all these supporters was Founding Father and third President of the United States, Thomas Jefferson (1743-1826). Jefferson, even at an early age, had rejected the ideas presented in Orthodox Christianity at the time. He was against blind faith and more in favor of a faith based off of reason. From his studies he believed that Jesus had never made the claim to be God and should instead be seen as a moral teacher. He lso considered most of the New Testament to be false, or filled with inaccuracies.
Because of this belief he created his own version of the Bible by cutting and pasting passages trom the Gospels ot the New Testament into a chronological order ot the life of Jesus. He removed all references to Jesus being a supernatural being and instead focused on the central figure of Jesus, cutting loose from him the main soteriological doctrines of historical Christianity. While Jefferson did express his agreement with Unitarian principles, he never officially Joined a Unitarian church, but commonly attended Unitarian services while iving in Philadelphia.
Some have tried to classify Jefferson as a deist, though Jefferson never identified himself as such. Throughout his life he continued to speak out against Orthodox Christianity, specifically Calvinism, which he intensely opposed. In a letter to John Adams, written three years before he died, he stated, “Calvin was indeed an Atheist, which I can never be, or rather his religion was Demonism. If ever man worshipped a false god, he did (Prothero, 2003). ” In his final days Jefferson believed that he was in a sect by himself, following his own individualized form of
Christianity, but he expressed the overall importance to the Unitarian movement, saying, “l rejoice that in this blessed country of free inquiry and belief, which has surrendered its conscience to neither kings or priests, the genuine doctrine of only one God is reviving and I trust that there is not a young man now living in the United States who will not die a Unitarian Oefferson, 1822). ” Unitarian Christianity wasn’t the only independent form of Christianity to be formed in the mid-18th century. Another new liberal movement that was starting to spread was the idea of Christian Universalism.
Like Unitarian belief, Universalism evolved as an opposition to Orthodox Christian values, specifically Calvinism. Universalists believed that the biggest issue with Calvinism was the idea of the Unconditional Elect, or that God has already chosen who will go to Heaven and Hell. Universalists believed in “universal salvation”, the idea that everyone will get to go to Heaven for eternal salvation by the grace of God. Universalists argued that Calvinist theology was unbiblical and that God would never predetermine that any person would go to Hell for eternity.
This idea of Universal salvation was not a new concept, as it had roots in pre- Christian and traditional world faiths such as the Gnostics, 17th and 18th century German mystics, and also in early Christian theology. American Christian Universalists simply reintroduced the idea into a more contemporary Christian theology. The exact nature of when the Universalist movement began in America is hard to accurately determine. Among the leaders of the early American Universalist movement was Minister John Murray (1741-1815), who would come to be known as the “Father of American Universalism.
Murray was born in England where both his parents followed strict Calvinism. It was by 1770 that he rejected Calvinist theology completely and was excommunicated from his congregation in England and decided to come to America to teach the ideals ofa universal salvation. Murray established the Independent Christian Church of Gloucester in 1779, making him one of the first people to have an organized Universalist denomination in the United States. In 1793, he was named as the first Minister at the First Universalist Church in Boston, where he served until 1809. Among Murrays teachings was his distinct view of the afterlife.
He believed that non-sinners and believers would pass immediately to glory, known as the “first resurrection. ” Nonbelievers and the sintul remain atter death in an intermediate state, where some would be delivered from the intermediate state, while others would remain until the Day of Judgment, where they would undergo “second resurrection” and see that it was right for them to accept the condemnation of their sinful nature (Holifleld, 2003). He used the Bible in both a literal and a figurative manner, in order to express the idea that sinners would suffer protracted, but not verlasting, punishment for their sins.
While Murray was developing a conservative Universal theology, another developing form of more liberal Universalism called for a different approach. This movement was led by Pastor Hosea Ballou (1771-1852). Like Murray, he was born into a family of Calvinistic belief. Ballou was denied education as a child, but learned of Universalism through reading the Bible and the teachings of other Universalist scholars. This led to him converting to Universalism in 1789. After an early career as a schoolteacher, he switched to being a pastor at various churches in Vermont, New
Hampshire, and Massachusetts, before leading the congregation at the Second Universalist Church in Boston in 1817, until his death 35 years later. Ballou rejected all Calvinistic principles like Total Depravity and the belief in an endless punishment in Hell. But unlike Murray, he was one of the first Universalists to also oppose legalism (following the law of God) and Trinitarian views in Christianity as well. Ballou believed all humans were potentially good and capable of perfectibility and that all sin was finite to this world. Because of this he rejected the idea of Hell altogether.
He also rejected the miracles of Jesus and believed that Jesus was the son ofa universal God, who wanted to reveal God’s love. Ballou’s form of Universalism came to be known as “Ultra Universalism. ” Ballou was very instrumental in 1790, when Universalists of various backgrounds met in Philadelphia to draft their first declaration of faith and plan of government, known as the Articles of Faith. The five points in this document stated: Of the Holy Scriptures – We believe the Scriptures of the Old and New Testament to contain a revelation of the perfections and will of God, and the rule of faith and practice. Of the Supreme Being – We believe in one God, infinite in all his perfections, and that these perfections are all modifications of infinite, adorable, incomprehensible, and unchangeable love. Of the Mediator – We believe that there is one Mediator between God and men, the man Christ Jesus, in whom dwelleth all the fullness of the Godhead bodily, who by giving himself a ransom for all, hath redeemed them to God by his blood; and who, by the merit of his death, and the efficacy of his spirit, will finally restore the whole human race to happiness. Ђ Of the Holy Ghost- We believe n the Holy Ghost, whose office is to make known to sinners the truth of this salvation, through the medium of the Holy Scriptures, and to reconcile the hearts of the children of men to God, and thereby to dispose them to genuine holiness. Of Good Works – We believe in the obligation of the moral law as to the rule of life; and we hold, that the love of God manifested to man in a redeemer, is the best means of producing obedience to that law, and promoting a holy, active, and useful life.
When this document was ratified in 1793, it provided the first form of organized structure to the Universalist movement. The last principle, “Of Good Works,” was of particular importance to the Universalist social Justice movement that began in the early 19th century. Universalists strived to abolish slavery and educate black persons, oppose any type of war and physical conflict, and were active in reform movements for prison inmates and working women. Universalists also founded a number of educational institutions promoting these ideals, including Tufts, St.
Lawrence, Goddard, and Akron. Even with these new formed guidelines and social practices; Universalist congregations tended to be more independent in nature. While Unitarian belief appealed to the wealthy and more socially affluent, Universalism appealed to the lower and middle social class. Universalism affirmed the authority of the common people and their ability to read the scriptures of the Bible and make their own theological decisions. In a sense, Universalism represented a movement rather than a singular denomination.
Unitarians in essence believed that humans were too good to be damned, while Universalists believed that God was too good to damn them. Because of these differences, Universalism did not often compete against Unitarian elief during the 19th century, but rather against other Orthodox Christian churches that also tried to gain interest in working class citizens. Methodists in particular argued that Universalism encouraged sin and threatened “to disposes religion of most of its motive influence with which it addresses itself to the better interests of mankind (Holifleld, 2003). Hosea Ballou’s response to this idea can be heard in a story in which he was told by a Baptist minister, “If I were a Universalist and feared not the fires of hell, I could hit you over the head, steal your horse and saddle, and ride away, and I’d still go to heaven. To which Ballou replied, “If you were a Universalist, the idea would never occur to you. ” Universalism continued to grow and by the 1830’s it was arguably the ninth largest denomination in the United States.
Following in the footsteps of the Unitarians, the Universalists formed the Universalist General Convention in 1866 to create a singular governing body for all Universalist congregations. The group was later renamed the Universalist Church of America in 1942. In May of 1961, the American Unitarian Association and the Universalist Church of America merged to create the Unitarian Universalist Association, an idea that the two enominations had discussed for over a century.
The groups were bound together by their liberal doctrine, but social, rather than theological, differences had previously caused difficulties communicating with each other. After much deliberation, the first official objective of the group was written as “To cherish and spread the universal truths taught by the great prophets and teachers of humanity in every age and tradition, immemorially summarized in our Judeo-Christian heritage as love to God and love to man. The new congregation established headquarters on historic Beacon Street, in Boston, Massachusetts. From its first days, Unitarian Universalism was a faith of enormous diversity of theological opinion, with a style of pluralistic liberalism with a belief in worldly concerns, strong ethical responsibility, deep commitment to democracy, and the idea that true community is religion based. In a survey taken in 1967 of 12,146 members of the IJUA, only 10. percent of respondents identified themselves as being born as either a Unitarian or a Universalist, with 56. 9 percent claiming to be from a religious background other than Christianity (Robinson, 1 A large reason tor this low umber of Unitarians and Universalists may have been attributed to some original members of both groups rejecting the merger and continuing to worship in independent congregations.
At the 1986 general assembly the I-JUA enacted a revised statement of principles and purposes promoting: The inherent worth and dignity of every person Justice, equity and compassion in human relations Acceptance of one another and encouragement to spiritual growth in our congregations A free and responsible search for truth and meaning The right of conscience and the use of the democratic process within our ongregations and in society at large The goal of world community with peace, liberty, and Justice for all Respect for the interdependent web of all existence of which we are a part Since its conception, Unitarian Universalism has been a creedless faith, in that it does not adhere to any specific religious text, but finds inspiration from many different historical religious sources, often used in a syncretistic fashion. No members are required to adhere to any specific theological beliefs, but rather Unitarian Universalism promotes the search of an individual’s own theological beliefs through a eligious community. This creates a dual notion that Unitarian Universalism is both a religion of direct experiences and the experiences of others.
Members of Unitarian Universalism may still describe themselves as atheist, agnostic, monotheist, polytheist, or assume no label at all. Based on geographical location, some beliefs will be more prevalent at some congregations than in others. All congregations in the I-JUA are connected in organization and general principle, but there is no hierarchy of overall leadership and all congregations are allowed to make decisions independently on matters of their own affairs. As of 2009, the I-JUA was comprised of 1,041 congregations with 164,656 certified members and 61 ,795 church school enrollees. In a 2001 American Religious Identification Survey, 629,000 adults identified themselves as Unitarian Universalists; this represented about . percent of the United States population. In 1995 the International Council of Unitarians and Universalists was founded as an umbrella organization to represent Unitarian, Universalist, and Unitarian Universalist organizations across the world. This includes congregations in Australia, Canada, the United Kingdom, Germany, India, South Africa, Brazil, etc. While Unitarian Universalism tries to offer a different type of message than most world religions, they do not try to evangelize or convert people into their congregations, or their way of thinking. Members of Unitarian Universalism are free to come and go as they please as part of their own spiritual Journey.
Unitarian Universalists often promote the idea of interfaith dialogue and learning from people of backgrounds that are different than their own. Unitarian Universalism accepts congregants of all ethnic, social, and sexual orientations and is often very active in romoting the rights of people of different backgrounds to the public. Worship service at a Unitarian Universalist congregation can take on a variety of forms depending on the location and nature of the group. Most congregations are held in traditional style churches, though depending on the size ot the congregation, less formal meeting locations may also be used. Services are usually held on Sunday morning. Often the service will begin with the lighting of a chalice, which is the symbol of the Unitarian Universalist faith.
Music plays an important role in most services and the congregation will often sing together with a choir accompaniment ut of a Unitarian Universalist hymnal, which features songs from many different sources, and may even allow performances of solo based singing or instrumental music. Often there will be a time at the beginning of the service for board and committee members to discuss recent affairs or community involvement. A designated Unitarian Universalist minister will often lead the service, though some congregations are lay-led. A sermon given by a minister, guest speaker, or lay leader is common, with topics ranging from a variety of themes.
Traditional cultural and religious holidays are often celebrated, in addition to some that might be considered nique. Someone who has experience with the Unitarian Universalist worship service and its message is the Lifespan Minister at the Eau Claire Unitarian Universalist congregation, Julianne Lepp. Julianne was raised as an Episcopal Christian. She had her first Unitarian Universalist experience at 13, when her best friend took her to a service. She left the Episcopal Church in her early 20’s when her spiritual questions got bigger than the church could answer for her. She remembered back to her experience as a child and sought out her local Unitarian Universalist congregation in Florida.
Here she was given the opportunity to experience her own spiritual Journey while still being offered a spiritual community and support. She attended this congregation on and off, before finding a new spiritual home in Roswell, GA. While attending service there, she heard of a shortage of interim ministers and knew she had found her calling. She graduated from the Candler School of Theology in 2010 and in 2011 was appointed the full-time Lifespan Minister to the Unitarian Universalist Congregation of Eau Claire, Wisconsin. At her congregation she says her universal message is, “Love is a spirit that binds us all. Faith without action is meaningless. Interconnectedness, the seventh Unitarian Universalist principle, is a strong theme she says she sees from many of her congregants. She tries to use a “populist” preaching style so that people of every level of religious background and education can find an easy to access message in her sermons. She wants to be less of a lecturer and more focused on finding ways for people to take with them a message from their church experience. Julie does not consider herself to be a theist or a humanist minister, a label that many Unitarian Universalist ministers will either fall to one side or the other. Regardless of belief, she says, “Unitarian Universalism can provide fellowship and community.
You get to be with people of different experiences and different things to offer. ” Julie says that Buddhism has played a large part in her spiritual Journey and the model she uses at the congregation. Zen Buddhism and meditation has helped her deal with spiritual pain in her life. Using other religions to influence her own life has helped her realize that people need different tools to meet their own spiritual needs may that be psalms, meditation, or singing and she strives to offer all of these at her ongregation. She believes that Unitarian Universalism is around to fill the void of people that consider themselves spiritual, but not religious .
She welcomes the idea of lay leadership which was one of the reasons she chose the congregation here at Eau Claire, along with their focus on Justice. She believes it is important to not Just have one voice of spiritual authority. She is proud of the fact that over 60 percent of Unitarian Universalist ministers are currently female, the highest of any major religious denomination, but says there is still disparity in pay between men and women at these positions. She personally believes we can learn more from Jesus by focusing on his moral teachings like the Unitarians and the Universalists. She finds most important the parables of Jesus as a person and how we can emulate him as a moral teacher. But she thinks it’s dangerous to ignore entire passages from the Bible.
Speaking on the role of Jesus in Unitarian Universalism she says, “There are some humanist congregations, but I think the role of Jesus in Unitarian Universalism is changing, people are coming with less baggage from a Christian background and more people are saying Jesus is a cool guy, let’s talk about him. Unitarian Universalism is becoming less about what we’re not and more about what we are. ” Julie acknowledges that because Unitarian Universalism is an open faith, some people may try to degrade it as an “a la carte” religion or that they don’t really fit standard definitions ofa religion. She responds to this by saying, “Just because we don’t have one answer doesn’t mean we aren’t spiritual and religious. We look and smell like a church, but the only difference is our theology is open.
Just like any other minister I sit with the dying and help people with their spiritual crises, I Just don’t tell hem what the specific answer is. ” Because Julie is a Lifespan Minister, she maintains a strong focus that she is ministering to people of all ages, in an attempt to create a more multigenerational ministry. In regards to religious education she says, “In the world that we live in, it is just as important for us to understand that there are different languages and ethnicities, it is important for us to understand that there are different beliefs. Something we’ve moved away from though, is Just throwing a bunch of religious ideas at kids and say pick one. We’ve focused on their faith development much more trongly and what it means to be a Unitarian Universalist. Another person who understands the importance of a diverse religious education is Sarah Ramlow, the Religious Education Coordinator at the Unitarian Universalist congregation in Eau Claire. Sarah was drawn to Unitarian Universalism because it is open and accepting of everybody. She became involved with the religious education program right away when Joining the Eau Claire congregation. Being that she had two young kids it was a great experience her to learn what they learned and about Unitarian Universalism as a whole. As the Religious Education Coordinator, she assists the minister with day to day tasks in keeping a thriving religious education program. Whether that be getting to know the kids or helping the teachers pick their curriculum.
She believes when Unitarian Universalism tries to be more open to other experiences compared to a typical religious education saying, “It’s openness to knowing there isn’t Just one right path, there are many. Children growing up in that learn to be accepting of a whole diverse group of other people and experiences. ” Sarah also believes the learning process is not limited to Just children saying, Learning to be accepting of other people regardless of what their faith or background can be an ongoing process. The main goal is to keep learning and being open to those experiences. ” Sarah articulates that by Just by going to church we can reinforce the idea that we can have different beliefs and still be part ofa larger community, even if there are things we disagree on.
At the present moment, there really isn’t any religious denomination, group, or sect that can really claim to offer everything that Unitarian Universalism does. In fact, there aren’t many teachings that Unitarian Universalism doesn’t try to incorporate rom any other religious group. This makes it difficult to accurately summarize the question, “What is a Unitarian Universalist?
Busieness english essay help: english essay help
Personal profile I am enthusiastic individual who is hardworking and loyal with the ability to work well in a team and use own initiative. Also I am reliable, trust worthy and who can adapt well in an ever changing environment. I am looking for a Job where I can put my skills to use. Key skills A patient manner and responsible attitude Good communication and time management skills Can follow instructions and directions quickly Ability to work carefully and pay attentions to detail Good at working in a team to meet required targets Career history
Gurudwara guru Amar das Ji Position: temple securities (part time) 2012 Patrolling the car parks Patrolling delegating area Client and vehicles identification checks Working as a part of team Monitoring CCTV and office administrations Checking staff id Farmer, Punjabi duties 2009 – Looking after animals – feeding, mucking out, caring for sick animals, using milking machine to milk cows Ploughing field, sowing , looking after and harvesting crops, spreading fertiliser Maintaining farm building Lying and trimming hedges Putting up and mending fences
Educations/training Government collage with 12th standard completed Intrusts and hobbies In my spare time I enjoy reading variety of books and magazine watching the news and documentaries, listning to music. I also enjoy walking, socialising and spending time with friends and family Reference Putting up and mending tences Can tollow instructions and directions quickly machine to milk cows Ploughing meld, sowing , looking atter and harvesting crops, Checking statt i I am enthusiastic individual who is hardworking and loyal wit ty to work well
Political Landscape of China essay help writer: essay help writer
Political landscape of the Chinese The People’s Republic of China, along with Cuba, Laos, and Vietnam, is one of the world’s four remaining socialist states espousing communism. The Chinese government has been variously described as communist and socialist, but also as authoritarian and corporatist, with heavy restrictions remaining in many areas, most notably on the Internet, the press, freedom of assembly, reproductive rights, social organizations and freedom of religion. Its current political/economic system has been termed by its leaders as “socialism with Chinese characteristics”.
The country is ruled by the Communist Party of China (CPC), whose power is enshrined in China’s constitution. The Chinese electoral system is hierarchical, whereby local People’s Congresses are directly elected, and all higher levels of People’s Congresses up to the National People’s Congress (NPC) are indirectly elected by the People’s Congress of the level immediately below. The political system is partly decentralized, with limited democratic processes internal to the party and at local village levels, although these experiments have been marred by corruption. There are other political parties in
China, referred to in China as democratic parties, which participate in the National People’s Congress and the Chinese People’s Political Consultative Conference (CPPCC). Compared to its closed-door policies until the mid-1970s, the liberalization of China has resulted in the administrative climate being less restrictive than before. China supports the Leninist principle of “democratic centralism”, but the elected National People’s Congress has been described as a “rubber stamp” body. The incumbent President is Xi Jinping, who is also the General Secretary of the
Communist Party of China and the Chairman of the Central Military Commission. The current Premier is Li Keqiang, who is also a senior member of the CPC Politburo Standing Committee. There have been some moves toward political liberalization, in that open contested elections are now held at the village and town levels. However, the Party retains effective control over government appointments: in the absence of meaningful opposition, the CPC wins by default most of the time. Political concerns in China include lessening the growing gap between rich and poor and fighting corruption within the government leadership.
Economic landscape of india India’s coalition government Just celebrated the third anniversary of its tenure with a self-congratulatory banquet that could not have been more poorly timed: India’s currency, the rupee, is falling; investment is down; inflation is rising; and deficits are eating away at government coffers. While short-term growth has slowed but not ground to a halt, India’s problems have dampened hopes that it, along with China and other non-western economies, might help revive the global economy, as happened after the 2008 financial crisis.
Instead, India is now facing a political eckoning, as the countrys elected leaders must address difficult, politically unpopular decisions ” or risk even deeper problems. “When India was being run comparatively well in 2008, they seemed to cope with these external shocks, at least from a financial perspective,” said Glenn Levine, a senior economist at Moodys Analytics in Sydney, Australia. “l think people are starting to question the long-term Indian story. That is the difference now. ” India’s difficulties come as the global economy is wobbling once again.
Europe is grappling with a sovereign debt crisis that could shatter the continent’s economic and political union. The United States is still not producing enough new Jobs. China’s growth has weakened, with a real estate downturn and stalling exports, while important emerging economies like Brazil are slowing down, adding to pessimism about the world economy at a critical time. India is often viewed as a rising global powerhouse and, not too long ago, Indian officials were predicting growth rates of 9 percent or higher.
The Obama administration, eager to tap into such a booming market and envisioning India as a regional counterweight to China, trumpeted the United States-India partnership. Some analysts even saw the global downturn as an opportunity for India, making it more attractive for foreign investors wary of putting money into declining advanced industrial countries. Today, India’s economy is still expanding, with growth projected between 6 percent and 7 percent this year. And analysts say India’s long-term strengths remain significant.
It has one of the world’s youngest populations, and polls consistently show they are overwhelmingly optimistic about their future. Meanwhile, India’s businesses are competing more aggressively on the global stage. But the lowdown has punctured the once bubbly mood in the business and political classes and brought sharp criticism of the government. Indian business leaders, foreign investors and analysts say India’s strengths are being undermined by growing political dysfunction: the populist tendencies of Indian politicians, a lack of action by top leaders and allegations of corruption that have undermined the authority of policy makers.
India is desperate for investment in mining, roads, ports, urban housing and other areas, but Indian businesses and foreign investors are starting to shy away. Indian corporations, unable to obtain governmental licenses or permissions for projects, are investing overseas instead. Foreigners are also pulling back; their investment in Indian stocks and bonds totaled only $16 billion in the last fiscal year, compared with $30 billion the year before. The trend accelerated in recent months after the Finance Ministry, trying to stem a rising budget deficit, proposed a raft of new taxes on foreign institutions doing business in India. A quiet crisis of confidence is building up,” said Pratap Bhanu Mehta, president of the Center for Policy Research in New Delhi. “There is no certainty over the regulatory regime. There is no certainty over the tax regime. ” Indians have long thrived amid adversity, often by creatively ” at times, illegally ” subverting onerous regulations with a workaround ethos that has spurred economic activity. Even today, industries like pharmaceuticals, information technology and consumer goods, which do not need many licenses and official approvals, are prospering.
But those sectors tied to the government, including mining, construction and manufacturing, are struggling. At the ore of the political uncertainties is the weakened status of the Indian National Congress Party, which leads the coalition government, known as the United Progressive Alliance. Since 2004, the government has operated under an unorthodox partnership between Sonia Gandhi, president ot the Congress Party and t governing coalition, and Manmohan Singh, her handpicked prime minister. The division of duties worked during the government’s first term. Mrs.
Gandhi managed the coalition partners, rode herd on the Congress Party, championed safety net programs for the poor and oversaw election strategy; Mr. Singh, a quiet economist considered a father of India’s reform era, moved India closer to the United States and oversaw a booming economy where growth topped 9 percent. In 2009, voters returned the U. P. A. to power amid expectations that India, having shrugged off the 2008 global recession, was on an inevitably upward growth track. But analysts say the contradictions in the Singh-Gandhi partnership have since been exposed. Mr.
Singh holds the most politically powerful Job in the country, yet is seemingly reluctant to wield power and often must seek approval on policy questions from Mrs. Gandhi. She oversees an advisory panel largely consisting of social activists that her critics regard as a shadow government. The result has been a lack of a clear political agenda emanating from the top, analysts and business leaders say, allowing the bureaucracy to fall back into its traditional resistance to making decisions. When officials do act, they often change course after encountering political opposition. The last year was wasted,” said Sanjaya Baru, a former spokesman for the prime minister who is now at a research institute. “We’ve had a crisis of leadership on the economic side. Moreover, the government has been on the defensive since a series of corruption scandals, dormant for several years, exploded into public view. Attempts by technocrats to push through a so-called “second generation” of deeper economic changes were undermined by the inability of the Congress Party to corral its coalition partners. In December, Mr.
Singh’s cabinet announced that foreign retailers like Walmart would be allowed for the first time to open stores in the country with local partners. But Mr. Singh was forced to reverse course after an ally, Mamata Banerjee, he chief minister of the state of West Bengal, balked and threatened to bring down the government. Then in March, facing pressures to raise revenues and stem the rising fiscal deficit, Pranab Mukherjee, the finance minister, released a budget that proposed new taxes on foreign entities in India, including levies on past deals that the Indian Supreme Court had ruled were not taxable in the country.
Foreign investors were stunned, and analysts say the outflow of capital is one reason the rupee has tumbled13 percent since the end of February. Political landscape of india India is the world’s most populous democracy. A parliamentary republic with a multi- party system, it has six recognised national parties, including the Indian National Congress and the Bharatiya Janata Party (BJP), and more than 40 regional parties. The Congress is considered centre-left or “liberal” in Indian political culture, and the BJP centre-right or “conservative”.
For most of the period between 1950”when India first became a republic”and the late 1980s, the Congress held a majority in the parliament. Since then, however, it has increasingly shared the political stage with the BJP, as well as with powerful regional parties which have often forced the reation of multi-party coalitions at the centre. In the Republic of India’s first three general elections, in 1951, 1957, and 1962, the Jawaharlal Nehru-led Congress won easy victories.
On Nehru’s death in 1 , Lal Banadur Shastri brietly became prime minister; he was succeeded, after his own unexpected death in 1966, by Indira Gandhi, who went on to lead the Congress to election victories in 1967 and 1971. Following public discontent with the state of emergency she declared in 1975, the Congress was voted out of power in 1977; the then-new Janata Party, which had opposed the emergency, was voted in. Its government lasted Just over three years.
Voted back into power in 1980, the Congress saw a change in leadership in 1984, when Indira Gandhi was assassinated; she was succeeded by her son Rajiv Gandhi, who won an easy victory in the general elections later that year. The Congress was voted out again in 1989 when a National Frontcoalition, led by the newly formed Janata Dal in alliance with the Left Front, won the elections; that government too proved relatively short-lived: it lasted Just under two years. Elections were held again in 1991; no party won an absolute majority.
But the Congress, as the largest single party, was able to form a minority government led by P. V. Narasimha Rao. A two- year period of political turmoil followed the general election of 1996. Several short- lived alliances shared power at the centre. The BJP formed a government briefly in 1996; it was followed by two comparatively long-lasting United Front coalitions, which depended on external support. In 1998, the BJP was able to form a successful coalition, the National Democratic Alliance (NDA). Led by Atal Bihari Vajpayee, the NDA became the first non-Congress, coalition government to complete a five-year erm.
In the 2004 Indian general elections, again no party won an absolute majority, but the Congress emerged as the largest single party, forming another successful coalition: the United Progressive Alliance (UPA). It had the support of left-leaning parties and MPs who opposed the BJP. The UPA returned to power in the 2009 general election with increased numbers, and it no longer required external support from India’s communist parties. That year,Manmohan Singh became the first prime minister since Jawaharlal Nehru in 1957 and 1962 to be re-elected to a consecutive five-year term.
The life and teachings of Moses and Jesus mba essay help: mba essay help
Compare and Contrast the life and teachings of Moses and Jesus Jesus and Moses are two influential figures in the teachings of Christianity. They each were chosen by God to lead His people. Moses led the Israelites into the promised land and Jesus showed His people the way of eternal life through salvation. Each of their lives were filled with miracles that helped give the message of God that they were trying to portray. Jesus preached to the people of God using parables and miraculous events.
Unlike Moses, who wrote the laws of God down on the Ten Commandments, Jesus spoke to the people orally. It was not until after his death on the cross when his teachings were documented. Although the men never met, there are many similarities and differences in their lives and teachings. One similarity was that they both experienced a miracle involving food. As the story goes, Jesus went out on a boat on the Sea of Galilee for some rest and prayers. When he landed at a remote place, a crowd came to meet him.
Jesus felt compassion for this large group and wanted to feed them. He inquired how to do so and no one could help, the group rose to over 5000. “A small boy gave Jesus five small barley loaves and two small fish nd Jesus fed five thousand men. Jesus is Mighty to save and Strong to Provide. No matter how meager are your resources; God will provide (http:// christianity. about. com/od/biblestorysummaries/a/Jesus-Feeds-5000. htm). ” Moses has a similar story where he and the Israelites crossed the Red Sea and lived in the wilderness for 1 h months.
The men soon got hungry and Moses prayed to God for food. God spoke to Moses and told him that he heard his prayers and would provide for them. The men received the food in the way of meat and Manna, unleavened bread. They continued to receive food throughout their service. Both Jesus and Moses showed compassion for human existence and suffering and turned to God to provide for mans’ spiritual and secular needs. One distinct difference between these great teachers was the length of time that they were able to preach.
Moses, known as God’s servant, lived a long life. He communicated directly with God and followed God’s demands. He is known for miracles and for communicating the Ten Commandments. For forty years, Moses led the Israelites through the desert, searching for the Promised Land. Moses finally died at the age of 120. Jesus on the other hand started his teachings at the age of 30. During the following three years, e too spoke to God who asked him to relay information that the Kingdom of God has come to earth and that God loves you and you should love one another.
Unfortunately, Jesus’ life was cut short by murder. He was executed at the age of 33 in Israel, alongside two convicted felons. Two amazing teachers and preachers who influenced the religion of Christianity, Jesus and Moses, although there are diversities and similarities among their teachings and lifestyles, both were united on one common ground: God’s Will and the leading of His people. From their teachings, Christianity has developed into the religion as we know it today.
Electronic business management college application essay help: college application essay help
Describe, and illustrate using examples, how information systems have changed the way businesses operate and their products and services. What is the contribution of information systems to globalisation? 25 points ANSWER a. i) Wireless communications, including computers and mobile hand-held computing devices, are keeping managers, employees, customers, suppliers, and business partners connected in every way possible. Examples: smartphones used by sales representatives; notebook computers used by financial advisers.
Email, online conferencing, the Web, and the Internet, are providing new and diverse lines of ommunication for all businesses, large and small. a. ii) Through increased communication channels and decreased costs of the communications, customers are demanding more of businesses in terms of service and product, at lower costs. E- commerce is changing the way businesses must attract and respond to customers, some of them in other countries. Example: online sales – e. g. Amazon. E-supply chain management makes global supply chains possible and effective.
Question 5 (25 points) Value chain and value web models can be used to help businesses identify opportunities for strategic information system applications. ) Define and describe the value chain model. Explain how the value chain model can be used to identify opportunities for information systems. 15 Points a. i) The value chain model highlights specific activities in the business where competitive strategies can best be applied and where information systems will most likely have a strategic impact.
The model identifies specific, critical leverage points where a firm can use information technology most effectively to enhance its competitive position. The value chain model views the firm as a series of basic activities that add a margin of value to a firm’s products or services. The activities are categorized as either primary or support activities. Primary activities are most directly related to production and distribution of the firm’s products and services, which create value for the customer. Support activities make the delivery of primary activities possible and consist of organization infrastructure.
A firm’s value chain can be linked to the value chains of its suppliers, distributors, and customers. b) Describe now the Internet nas changed competitive torces and competitive advantage. 10 Points a. i) The Internet has nearly destroyed some industries (e. g. ecorded music) and severely threatened others (e. g. printed press). The Internet has also created entirely new markets and formed the basis of thousands of new businesses. The Internet has enabled new products and services, new business models, and new industries to rapidly develop. Because of the Internet, competitive rivalry has become much more intense.
Internet technology is based on universal standards that any company can use, making it easier for rivals to compete on price alone and for new competitors to enter the market. Because information is available to everyone, the Internet raises he bargaining power of customers, who can quickly find the lowest-cost provider on the Web. Question 6 (25 points) What are the advantages and disadvantages of cloud computing? Describe examples of the use and usefulness of cloud computing; you should describe at least one of Google Apps and Google Drive, Microsoft Office 365 and Saleforce. om 25 Points a. i) Cloud computing is the idea of making computing resources available based on what a user really needs instead of what they might need. The advantages include:
Question 7 (25 points) This question asks you to discuss how the Internet and Internet technology work and how they support communication and e-business. a) Define the Internet, describe how it works and explain how it provides business value. ANSWER a. i) The Internet is a vast network of computers that connects millions of people all over the world. The Internet uses the client/server model of computing and the TCP/ IP network reference model. Every computer on the Internet is assigned a unique numeric IP address.
No one owns the Internet, and it has no formal management rganization. However, worldwide Internet policies are established by organizations and government bodies, such as the Internet Architecture Board and the World Wide Web Consortium. The Internet must also conform to the laws of the sovereign nation- states in which it operates, as well as the technical infrastructure that exist within the nation-state. The Internet enables employees to gain remote access to the company’s internal systems through its Web site.
They are able to better service customers and suppliers, improve operational efficiency, increase productivity, lower operational osts, have a broader market base, and reach more individual customers on a global scale by establishing a Web presence. The cost of e-mail and other Internet services tend to be far lower than equivalent voice, postal, or overnight delivery costs, making the Internet a very inexpensive communication medium. It is also a very fast method of communication, with messages arriving anywhere in the world in a matter of seconds or minutes. 0 Points b) Explain how the Domain Name System (DNS) and IP addressing system work. b. i) The Internet is based on the TCP/IP networking protocol suite. Every computer on the Internet is assigned a unique Internet Protocol (‘P) address, which currently is a 32- bit number represented by four strings of numbers ranging from O to 255 separated by periods. (IPv6 introduces 128-bit IP addresses. ) A domain name is the English-like name that corresponds to the unique 32-bit numeric IP address for each computer connected to the Internet.
The Domain Name System (DNS) converts IP addresses to domain names so that users only need to specify a domain name to access a computer on the Internet instead of typing the numeric IP address. DNS servers aintain a database containing IP addresses mapped to their corresponding domain names. 8 Points c) Copy the following table of Internet services into your answer book and complete it by adding a short (one or two sentence) description to each item: Service Short description E-mail Electronic mail, commonly referred to as email or e-mail, is a method of exchanging digital messages from an author to one or more recipients.
Modern email operates across the Internet or other computer networks. It is based on a store-and-forward model. Email servers accept, forward, deliver and store messages. Chatting and instant messaging Instant messaging (IM) is a form of communication over the Internet that offers quick transmission of text-based messages from sender to receiver. In push mode between two or more people using personal computers or other devices, along with shared clients, instant messaging basically offers real-time direct written language-based online chat.
Newsgroups A newsgroup is a repository usually within the Usenet system (but now more often Google Groups) for messages posted from many users in different locations. It is in fact a discussion group. Newsgroups are much like the public message boards on old bulletin board systems: envision an electronic version of the corkboard in the entrance to a local grocery store. File Transfer Protocol (FTP) File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a standard network protocol used to transfer files from one host or to another host over a TCP-based network, such as the Internet.
World The World Wide Web (abbreviated as WWW or W3C; commonly known as the Web), is a system of interlinked hypertext documents accessed via the Internet. With a web browser, one can view web pages that may contain text, images, videos, and other ultimedia, and navigate between them via hyperlinks. VoIP Voice over internet protocol (voice over IP or VoIP) commonly refers to the communication protocols, technologies, methodologies, and transmission techniques involved in the delivery of voice communications and multimedia sessions over Internet Protocol (‘P) networks, such as the Internet.
Other terms commonly associated with VoIP are IP telephony, Internet telephony, voice over broadband (VoBB), broadband telephony, IP communications, and broadband phone Virtual private network (VPN) A virtual private network (VPN) extends a private network and the resources ontained in the network across public networks like the Internet. It enables a host computer to send and receive data across shared or public networks as if it were a private network with all the functionality, security and management policies of the private network.
This is done by establishing a virtual point-to-point connection through the use of dedicated connections, encryption, or a combination of the two. 7 points Question 8 (25 points) What is an Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) system and what business processes can it assist? What advantages do ERP systems (sometimes) bring to the enterprises hat implement them? You should discuss both Customer Relationship Management(CRM) and Supply Chain Management (SCM) aspects. 25 Points a. i) Enterprise software consists of a set of interdependent software modules that support basic internal business processes.
The software allows data to be used by multiple functions and business processes for precise organizational coordination and control. Enterprise systems feature a set of integrated software modules and a central database that enables data to be shared by many different business processes and functional areas throughout the enterprise. Organizations implementing this software would have to first select the functions of the system they wish to use and then map their business processes to the predefined business processes in the software.
A particular firm would use confguration tables provided by the software to tailor a particular aspect of the system to the way it does business. Some of the major business processes supported by enterprise software include financial and accounting processes, human resources processes, manufacturing and production processes, and sales and marketing processes. Enterprise systems provide value both by increasing operational efficiency nd by providing firm-wide intormation to help managers make better decisions.
Large companies with many operating units in different locations have used enterprise systems to enforce standard practices and data so that everyone does business the same way. Enterprise systems helps firms respond rapidly to customer requests for information or products. Manufacturing is better informed about producing only what customers have ordered, procuring exactly the right amount of components or raw materials to fill actual orders, staging production, and minimizing the time that components or finished products are in inventory.
Enterprise software includes analytical tools for using data captured by the system to evaluate overall organizational performance. Enterprise system data has common standardized definitions and formats that are accepted by the entire organization. Enterprise systems allow senior management to easily find out at any moment how a particular organizational unit is performing or to determine which products are most or least profitable.
Companies can use enterprise systems to support organizational structures that were not previously possible or to create a more disciplined organizational culture. They can also improve management reporting and decision making. Furthermore, enterprise systems promise to provide firms with a single, unified, and all-encompassing information system technology platform and environment. Lastly, enterprise systems can help create the foundation for a customer-driven organization a. i) Supply chain planning systems enable the firm to generate demand forecasts for a product and to develop sourcing and manufacturing plans for that product. They help companies make better operating decisions such as determining how much of a specific product to manufacture in a iven time period; establishing inventory levels for raw materials, intermediate products, and finished goods; determining where to store finished goods; and identifying the transportation mode to use for product delivery.
One of the most important functions is demand planning, which determines how much product a business needs to make to satisfy all of its customers’ demands. These functions are referred to as order planning, advanced scheduling, demand planning, distribution planning, and transportation planning. a. iii) Supply chain execution systems manage the flow of products through distribution centres and warehouses to ensure that roducts are delivered to the right locations in the most efficient manner.
They track the physical status of goods, the management of materials, warehouse and transportation operations, and financial information involving all parties. These functions are referred to as order commitments, final production, replenishment, distribution management, and reverse distribution. a. iv) Customer relationships arguably represent the firm’s most valuable asset. CRM systems capture and integrate customer data from all over the organization, consolidate the data, analyse the data, and then distribute the results to various systems and customer touch oints across the enterprise.
Companies can use this customer knowledge when they interact with customers to provide them with better service or to sell new products and services. CRM systems integrate and automate many customer-facing processes in sales, marketing, and customer service, providing an enterprise-wide view of customers. These systems track all of the ways in which a company interacts with its customers and analyse these interactions to maximize customer lifetime value for the tlrm. CRM extends toa tlrm’s customer.
Dream: Basketball and Big Play Ground melbourne essay help: melbourne essay help
Dream Essay I have dreams that I want it to come true. I want my house to be on the beach. My dream house will have around forty rooms that will be in circle. In the middle there will be a big play ground. My house will have about five garages. All the rooms of the house will have a balcony. My house will have four helipads. House will have indoor swimming pool, gym, and basketball court. I want my house to have playground because I can play cricket because it’s my favorite sport.
I want helicopter too so I kept helipads on the roof. So I can go around and fly over the city and beach. I want to design a car that doesn’t have wheels. It will be a flying car. It will have three propellers attached to the car. Two on the side and one on the front. Car can run on the water, it can fly and it can also run on the road. Car can also turn in toa boat or a mini submarine. My dream car can reach the speed of 300 mph. My dream vacation will be going to a beach because I love swimming and Jet kiing.
I want go on a beach where it has so many trees, clean water, and really good food. I also want a tree house so I can live there with my family. I would also like to spend my vacation on islands. Because I like natural views like sunrise, sunset and rainbow. I like to play sports on a beach with friends. I want to be an electrical engineer and work at some good place. I want to be an engineer because they get g holidays paid and the work isn’t too nard to do.
I also like and if I make good money then I can go back to India and live there with my family and friends. I will also have more responsibility about my work and family. If I make good money then I will be also helping orphan kids and old age home. Everyone has dreams that they want it to come true. But to make your dream come true you have to work after it. I also have dreams and I will also try my best to make it come true. And If they come true then I will be very happy.
Sufferig free essay help: free essay help
The story “Water for Elephants” takes place back in the day in a circus, everything was a lot harsher then compared to how it is now. It was said that in order for a spectacular show to stay in business there needed to be a copious amount of suffering and sacrifices made. What stood out most in this story was the theme suffering. Suffering is an experience of unpleasantness and aversion associated with the perception of harm or threat of harm in an individual. In the novel we watch all he characters suffer as a group as well as on their own.
The first time we see any suffering in this story is near the beginning when Jacob goes to write his final exam for veterinary school and is interrupted by the Dean who tells him his parents had Just passed away. “This morning, I had parents. This morning, they ate breakfast. I fall to my knees, right there on the back stoop, howling into splayed hands. ” (2. 42-43) After Jacobs parents died he experienced a lot of uffering and grief, his emotional trauma made it impossible for him to finish the exam.
Later on in the story one of Marlena’s star horses Silver Star gets irrevocably ill so theyre forced to put him down because they don’t want him to suffer anymore. “No. I’m afraid there’s no chance the horse will get better at all. “00She lays a hand on his neck, holding it there. “In that case, promise me it will be quick. I don’t want him to suffer. ” (7. 128-129) The only way Marlena can handle it is if the death is “quick” – she quates a longer death with “suffering. Marlena also experiences a lot of psychological and physical suffering throughout this novel. August is an extremely abusive husband and he physically abuses her multiple times during Jacobs’s time with the circus, along with the animals. He is constantly playing mind games with her and the ambiguity of his mood is extremely taxing on her psyche. miou whore! ” August screams. mfou slut. You mangy bitch! ” (18. pg. 246) August is constantly berating her and making her feel terrible about herself.
At the circus, everything on the surface seems to be beautiful, exciting and dramatic, but underneath there’s a lot of pain. Jacob suffers the entire story while he tries to defend those he loves or suffers even more when he’s prevented from doing so. To get Rosie to walk on cue, August beats her as well as Marlena to get her to do what he wants. It seems like circus life is all about suffering to create a good show especially in the story “Water for Elephants”. sufferig By tierranoble
America, the free? essay help app: essay help app
Our country, founded on the premise that we are all created equal, endowed by our creator, with certain unalienable rights isn’t holding true to its declaration. In a recent study conducted by The University of Virginia, almost one in four Americans polled do not believe that all men are created equal. Equality in this country has been an issue long debated and dates back to the beginning of our founding, starting with women’s rights. Recently, the virus of inequality has spread to the gay community.
Discrimination against homosexuals is wrong. As quoted by Harvey Milk It takes no compromise to give people freedom. It takes no survey to remove repression. ” As the land of the free, majority of us have the right to marry and reproduce without Judgment. Unfortunately 1. 7 million Americans are not granted that right due to the inequality and discrimination against them. Macklemore’s “Same Love” and “Marriage = Biology’ addresses inequality, discrimination and gay rights differently.
Though “Marriage = Biology’ presents its argument for assimilation in an effective, strategic and structured manner, “Same Love” utilizes ethos, style and athos to establish the idea to influence the reader’s viewpoints on gay rights. By definition, ethos is a Greek word meaning “character” that is used to express the guiding beliefs that characterize an ideology. The Greeks also used this word to refer to the power of music to influence its hearer’s emotions, behaviors, and morals. “Marriage = Biology’ presents information on gay rights differently than “Same Love”.
The National Organization for Marriage wrote and published “Marriage = Biology’ to its website’s blog on October 15, 2012. The National Organization for Marriage (NOM) is an American non-profit political organization established in 2007 with the goal of preventing the legalization of same-sex marriage in the United States. It was formed in 2007 specifically to pass California Proposition 8 prohibiting same-sex marriage in California. The group has opposed civil union legislation and opposes gay adoption. The video “Marriage = Biology’ reflects the viewpoints of NOM, presented in straight opinion.
One of NOM’S core beliefs is stated in the video saying, “The law treats all eople the same but not all behaviors are the same. ” In other words, we believe that law treats every man and woman equally, but not every behavior they may desire equally. Psychologists believe that behaviorism is what makes a person. Same sex marriage and natural marriage are different behaviors with different outcomes, so the law treats them differently. The government has only three options in addressing human behavior. The government can prohibit a behavior, permit a behavior or promote a behavior.
The ethos used in this video sets the tone for the entire rgument against gay rights since the opinions given are from a particular organization devoted to opposition of homosexuality. There was not much of a representation for a counter argument, nor balance for those who support gay marriage. “Marriage = Biology’ is styled in a simplistic fashion. It spews out opinions and information and has a monotonous narrator. Of the information given not much was memorable. There were not many puns, metaphors or fluffy rhetorical devices.
However, there was an example ot ad hominem or appealing to teelings or prejudices ather than intellect. The video says that natural marriage is better than gay marriage because it “creates children, best raises children, protects women, civilizes men and lowers crime, poverty, and welfare which reduce government spending and deficits. ” The previous statement is NOM’S political belief which has no research or statistics presented in the video to back it up. A minute later another bold statement was made inquiring same sex marriage hurts us and natural marriage raises kids to be civilized people.
As stated earlier, behaviors are what make a person. Does growing up in a two female parent household make one less of a civilized individual? In Zach Wahls’s speech about family he tells the details of being raised by gay parents. His upbringings did not shape his civilization or credibility as an example to prove the Washington legislature wrong about the influences of gay marriages on children. The style of this video was easy to follow because of its power point format, but boring because of its impersonal narrator and dull slide shows.
The strongest element in “Marriage = Biology’ is pathos or an appeal to emotion. Though ironically narrated in a dull tone, the piece evokes emotion. The entire video was extremely opinionated and made strong assumptions but appealed to emotions by evoking anger or sadness for those who support gay rights and passion for those who oppose. By saying statements like, “Same sex marriage merely validates sex partners” NOM was bound to geta response, be it positive or negative. The purpose of the video was to get others to support the opposition of gay marriage.
Rapper Macklemore uses ethos to his advantage through his platinum selling song “Same Love”. Same Love” featuring Mary Lambert is a song that is also known as “The Gay Song”. The song was written in support of legalizing same-sex marriage particularly in reference to Washington Referendum 74 , a Washington referendum to approve or reject the February 2012 bill that would legalize same-sex marriage in the state. Macklemore explained that the song also came from his own frustration with hip hop’s positions on homosexuality. Misogyny and homophobia are the two acceptable means of oppression in hip hop culture. It’s 2012. There needs to be some accountability. I think that as a society we’re evolving and I think that hip hop has always been a representation of what’s going on in the world right now. ” Macklemore uses his celebrity status to make an effective appeal to not only the hip hop community, but to the music universe in general. Music is relatable so people can be reached. The trust people have in Macklemore allows them to re-think their thoughts on gay marriage and equal rights for everyone.
The style of “Same Love” is expressive, yet thought provoking. The lyrics and background images all tie into the effectiveness f the song to influence the reader’s viewpoints on gay rights. The use of puns, rhyming and metaphors make the style of the piece more interesting to listen to. Macklemore spits hard hitter lyrics like “The right-wing conservatives think it’s a decision/And you can be cured with some treatment and religion/Man-made, rewiring of a pre-disposition, playing God/Ahh, nah, here we go/America the brave still fears what we don’t know. In translation, the Republicans are metaphorically spoken of as the “right wing conservatives”, who believe that God and counseling can top you from being gay. In actuality it seems that they are playing God and America, as brave as we claim to be, is afraid of accepting change. The style of the song is rea ble to todays youth, who are the biggest consumers ot music. “Same Love” oozes pathos. The examples of pathos draw the audience into the scene of the music video, evoking emotion. One of the images used in the video is at 3:26, in which the main character, walking with his lover and getting uncomfortable looks and mean slurs.
This image is one that happens daily, gay couples get stared at as if they have ebra stripes. The emotion evoked is one of self realization, noticing that these things are common to those who are discriminated against. The lyrics “A world so hateful someone rather die than be who they are” make viewers think twice about making fun of or criticizing gay people for being who they are. The chorus says “And I cant change even if I tried” which lets viewers know that being gay is not always a choice, it is something that is brought upon someone and they sometimes have no control over it.
Knowing that some people have to either choose to be gay or choose to not be appy, is unfair and heart wrenching. At the end of the video, there are several scenes of the main character getting married to the man he loves. This brings Joy to viewers knowing that he is finally happy and that he gets to spend the rest of his life with someone he loves. It also allows viewers to realize being gay no different from being straight and all marriage is the same, which is why the video is called “Same Love. ” Macklemore is a lyricist, bound to be more effective in appeals than the National Organization for Marriage.
He does not bore the viewer half to death with unimaginative slides, nor insult the reader’s intelligence by not adding an element of featuring a rhetorical device. Macklemore provides the viewer with puns, metaphors, similes, emotionally charged language and scenes that make one wonder if America is as free as advertised. Are we all created equal? Are we truly the land of the free? Though “Marriage = Biology’ has strong opinions and is very well structured, “Same Love” takes the upper hand because of its better usage of ethos, style and pathos.
Swisher Mower essay help: essay help
Swisher Mower and Machine Company must decide whether to maintain its current distribution practices or enter into a private-brand distribution arrangement for the riding mower line. 4 Ps and 3 Cs: Product: SMC high quality riding mowers Price: moderate to high Promotion: Push -TV, radio, newspaper Place: Push – Regional Distribution through wholesalers and direct dealers Company: Swisher Mower and Machine Company – small company image Competition: Competitive – ten manufacturers using varied distribution strategies
Alternative 1 – Reject Proposal: Advantages: Keep brand identity – Increase advertising – Predictability in financial statements Disadvantages: Opportunity costs distribution deal may offer Quantitative: Alternative 2 – Take Proposal As Is: Expanded production. New market opportunities given location of chain stores (Metro areas) – Increased sales of parts Increased sales of complimentary product – Trail mower Disadvantages: – Greater risk for product liability – Risk of cannibalizing sales in overlapping areas – Jeopardize brand identity – Increase of costs: one-time costs, overtime labor, overhead, etc.
Quantitative: Increase in manufacturer price: 7. 5% One-time costs: $10K – $12K – Projected cannibalized sales: 300 units of Ride King Alternative 3 – Negotiate Proposal: Title transfer and payment dates – SMC product quality offers some bargaining potential Unit Price will probably be fixed Cosmetic changes not negotiable Recommendation: I would recommend Alternative 2 to Larry Brownlow for the following reasons: – This option would allow Mr.
Brownlow to remain on budget, and actually save $6,000 As a distributor he should be more concerned with the retailers’ insights into he consumer and the retailers’ intentions to actually carry his product. – The consumer questionnaire disadvantage would not worry me as much because the sample size is relatively too small. Giving up information regarding the consumer questionnaire would allow Brownlow to purchase the rest of the data. Without knowledge about the retailer, it would be pointless talking about the consumer. Implementation: It might very well be that Larry Brownlow will not find the distributorship financially feasible. I believe he will be able to make a good decision by implementing this data into his forecasting.
Hale is to Blame essay help service: essay help service
Who is to Blame In late August 1692, nineteen people (and two dogs) hanged for witchcraft and one was pressed to death. The Crucible by Arthur Miller is a play about how innocent people were killed by false accusations. This play takes place in Salem during 1692. Reverend John Hale arrives from another city n MA to solve the problem about witches in Salem. Reverend John Hale is very intellectual and a naive witch-hunter.
Hale is to blame for the killings in Salem because he made many false accusations, had power but did not want to ruin his reputation, and he did not speak up. Hale made many accusations and that lead to people dying Just for no reason. Its true Hale did make accusations but so did everyone else, Abigail Williams and the girls blame Tituba of witch crafting. However, Hale signed for people’s deaths and Hale accuses Proctor and questions his religion and his Christianity. Hale accuses
John Proctor, “Twenty-six time in seventeen months, sir I must call that rare”(Miller 167:487-488). Hale accused Proctor for being bad Christian because has not been to the church for a long time. Hale is responsible for the murder of John Proctor because Hale’s accusation led to Proctor going to Jail and left John Proctor hanging and Hale could not do anything to stop it. After Tituba was also accused, “you have sent your spirit out upon this child, have you not? Are you gathering souls for the evil? (Miller 156: 918-919). Hale alleged Tituba for getting Betty sick with her witch crafting skills. Therefore, Hale is responsible because Tituba did not want to get hung so, she confessed and went to Jail. After Tituab’s confession Abigail and the girls started blaming people. That’s why Hale is to blame because he made accusations and that led to people dying. Rev. John Hale misused his power and he lied to protect his reputation. Although that is true, Danforth and Reverend Parris
Juvenile delinquency case essay help free: essay help free
Juvenile crimes are the various offenses that children under the age of eight-teen commit. The acts involved in these crimes are called Juvenile delinquency. The issue of Juvenile delinquency has been a rising issue in the American society for decades. As we take a look into the factors behind this problem we will also look into what changes have been made to the Juvenile Justice system to combat this. Factors behind Juvenile delinquency is said to be mental illness and substance abuse which are the main contributors.
It is said to be that roughly thirty to ninety percent of etained and incarcerated Juveniles have been found to have some sort of mental illness. In the past, there were times when these crimes would escalate or get more violent. This necessitated changes in the policies by law enforcement officers to meet the growing problem. Among these changes were the impositions of Juvenile transfer laws, prosecutorial discretion and even capital punishment for these Juveniles.
In the case of Jordan Brown, it is one of the rare cases in which he does not fall into the thirty-ninety percent quartile range of mental problems. He also does not fall under he category of a substance abuser. Jordan Brown is an eleven year old boy who allegedly killed his stepmother to be. In February of 2009, a four year old daughter of Kenzie Houk came running out of her house screaming her mother was dead. A local tree cutting service heard the cries from the child and immediately got the address of the home to call 911.
State police found the body of a pregnant twenty-six year old, Kenzie Houk, lying in her bed dead from a shotgun blast to the back of the head in the small town of Wampum, Pennsylvania. The search for her killer ended quickly in utter despair. The murderer was eleven year old Jordan Brown, son of the victim’s fianc©. Local weather reports had roughly one inch of snow on the ground since the night before and there were no traces of footprints near the house except ones made by the father who left for work that night before the autopsy proved she was dead.
The shooting occurred sometime after the father had left for work, approximately 3:30a. m, leaving only Jordan Brown and Houks two daughters at the ages of four and seven at the home. Police investigators found a shotgun shell dropped along a path in which Jordan alked along with Houks oldest daughter to catch the school bus after the shooting. The shotgun belonged to Jordan; it was a gift he had received on Christmas a year prior to the shooting. The father, Chris Brown, bought him the gun because the two of them would go hunting together.
The gun was locked away and only taken out when the two of them would go out on their hunting trips. They also found the shotgun witn residue trom the bullet, in Jordan’s room along wi tn that same residue on his shirt and pants. Before the shooting occurred a few days prior, Houks nephew reportedly heard Jordan commenting on murdering the Houk family. Reports claim Jordan stated “if I had I gun I would pop Kenzie and her two girls. ” When asked about the remark Jordan responded with a simple “no I never said that. Also a testimony from Houks oldest daughter had said that she saw Jordan earlier in the day and he was holding a gun. A possible motive for the homicide or probable behavior has also been provided by the prosecutor in the case. It was a blended family, and the alleged juvenile was said to be Jealous of the fianc© getting married to his father and all the attention she was receiving for the baby that was due in two weeks. He felt as if he as being mistreated by the fianc© who reportedly favorited her own daughters more than him.
She would allegedly not give him any attention and only pay mind or take interest in her own two kids. Lastly, the parents decided to move him out of his room so that they could make more room for the new baby. As an eleven year old boy it is hard to cope with all of these new changes at home and this was essentially the last straw for Jordan. This case is an unusual one because the murder occurred in Pennsylvania and the law states that any homicide will be conducted in an adult court room, regardless of the age of the offender.
The offender is one of the countrys youngest suspects to be charged with homicide. Jordan spent the next three years in a Juvenile detention center in Erie, Pennsylvania in hopes that his lawyer would move the case to a Juvenile hearing instead of an adult hearing. John Bongivengo of the Lawrence County District Attorneys Office states: “In the case of homicide, my choice is either to charge Jordan as an adult, or don’t charge him at all. Not charging him at all? That would not be feasible. (Bongivengo, 2010) In Bongivengds perspective, he has to charge Jordan; he has no other options due to state law. But many people are arguing saying that twelve is much too young to have a life sentence. Pennsylvania has the most Juveniles sentenced to life in parole than any other state in the U. S. Lawrence Steinberg of Temple University had some comments on the possible sentencing stating: “l think the Judge’s decision in this case is both disappointing, and I think, misinformed.
The Judge is saying in order to be tried as a Juvenile you need to admit that youVe done the crime. That doesn’t seem quite right to me. A child’s brain isn’t fully developed especially in area that controls decision making, risk taking and mpulsive control. ” (Steinberg, 2010) Eventually, Browns lawyer successfully argued to move the court hearing to a Juvenile court room. If the trial had not been moved to the Juvenile court system and it stayed at the adult court room, Brown would have faced the charges of a life sentence without parole.
Instead, he was found to be an adjudicated delinquent, which means he was found responsible for the deaths of Kenzie and her unborn child. Jordan will receive treatment and his progress will be reviewed in six month intervals. “Lawrence County Judge John Hodge found the ow-14-year-old Jordan Brown delinquent, the Juvenile court equivalent of a guilty verdict, in the deaths of 26-year-old Kenzie Houk and her unborn child. The Judge closed the trial, held about 45 miles northwest of Pittsburgh, to the media and all but close family members because of the boy’s age during the killings. (Mandak, 2012) The defendant’s lawyer, Stephen Colafella stated that “it is much too early to say if he would appeal the Judge’s ruling on the official verdict of first degree murder and criminal homicide charges. ” (Colatella, 2012) Also, Prosecutor Anthony Krastek nad ome words to say and commented on the verdict exclaiming “it was important because it would now allow the child to receive the medical attention he needs such as counseling and other treatments the child did not receive prior to the court’s verdict because the family would not accept the boys guilt. (Krastek, 2012) Brown’s sentence will have him in an undisclosed treatment center until the age of twenty- one where he will be released based on progress of the therapeutic treatments he will receive. The father of Jordan still felt that his son was not guilty and made it appoint to see his son found set free. He travels a four hour round trip drive every day to visit his son in the detention center and trusts that his son is not responsible. He states “l know my son. I’ve talked to him numerous times in depth about what happened and … f he knew anything about it, if he was involved, he would have told me by now,” Brown said. “Not only that, but keep in mind, [he was] 11 years old when this happened, now 14. In the environment that he’s in, a child like that is going to break down and his story has not changed from day one. “(Brown, 2013) On May 9, 2013 the delinquency finding was appealed by the defense, and the Pennsylvania Superior Court issued a decision that overturned the finding. The boys lawyer said he was pleased but not shocked due to the insufficient evidence against the young boy and that there may have been other people involved in the execution.
He states “he had always felt that the state had insufficient evidence against Brown and that other people may have been involved in the shooting. ” (Colafella, 2013) He was pleased but not shocked at the overturned verdict. The Attorney General’s office asked the Superior Court to reopen the arguments, but they declined to do so in July, leaving the prosecution to appeal to the state Supreme Court. However, the defense team appealed the guilty verdict on the arguments that key evidence was unsupported by facts.
According to the Superior Court decision issued in May 2013, a key piece of evidence was that there were no unaccounted-for footprints in the snow around the home in Wampum that the Browns shared with Houk and her two daughters. Leaving the initial ruling that Brown would stay in the Juvenile detention center until August of 2018. After a full analysis of the case, I believe that the only possible theory that incorporates in Jordan Brown’s case is strain theory. Strain theory applies because Jordan was under the impression he was being detached from the family or he was not given the attention he needed to receive.
At the age of eleven, a young child is going through emotions and needs parental figures to provide unconditional love and affection towards which provides structure. Jordan, being in a blended family obviously felt he was not given the same affection that his future step mother had been giving to her own children which caused him to react the way that he did. He felt he was being neglected which caused him to become stressed. Stressed to a point where the only way things would ever go back to being the same was if he killed Kenzie and the baby.
Being in a blended family caused Jordan to feel unappreciated of Kenzie Houk and it was a difficult time for him to cope with the changes at home. This was a particularly hard time for Jordan, who not only had to deal with his new step mom and step sisters, but also had to deal with another new born child which would eventually make him feel unimportant and out of the family. And ot course chi Idren are extremely sensitive when it comes to any changes at ome, and changes in family structure can take their toll.
If it is not handled in a proper fashion, this can cause tremendous negative impacts on their personality. I believe that the end result of the death of Kenzie and her baby was because of the unstable structure at home and it caused Jordan to snap. At the initial hearing in which the case presented itself, I felt as if the courts were way too strict to hold the case in an adult court room. Jordan was eleven years old at the time of the crime, how can a Judge rule the defendant guilty with a sentence of life without parole? At ge eleven?
How young is too young to be convicted of murder? I believe that Jordan should be kept in a psychiatric mental institution and get mental evaluations until treatment and medication proves that he is no longer a danger to himself or society and base his release time off of that. After the trial had been successfully moved into the Juvenile court room, I feel as if the Judges final verdict was more than reasonable. Jordan will now face up to ten years in a Juvenile detention center where he will receive all the treatment and medication he needs to get better.
The person I am write my essay help: write my essay help
The most crucial question may one ask by self in loneliness is “WHO AM l? ” Of course, it’s not an easy task to answer. That’s so why many intellectuals devoted their whole life to find out who really human beings are. Is the identity revealed only by one’s physical appearance or some more valuable character are involved ? Professor Richard Gunde (2002) posits that a person’s physical appearance is the foundation on which other people Judge them by (p. 71).
I myself as a banker who works for a well-known state-run bank deals with plenty of people face to face every ay believe that it’s important to be well dressed and well educated and well communicated i. e. to have nice window, BUT more importantly my clients want me to be a professional banker with sufficient skills who fulfills their needs and to do my job best. I always use to wear official cloths i. e. suits in black and chocolate brown with polished shoes using men’s brand perfume wearing eye glasses shaved face every other day short cut hair style look so serious at work .
But those who get familiar with me closer knew me as a friendly , sociable with good sense of humor who loves o be at the service of his clients. So , let me say, personality is the gateway into knowing whom people truly are. You as member of our society have surely visited those who achieved great successions but don’t care about their physical appearances. I knew someone who is the student of post PhD in Nano electronic in Denmark who has a very simple life abroad , but whoever visits him at first look cant believe him as if he is an ordinary people unless they keep in touch with him or read his resume’.
In contrast, there are lots of people around us who think nothing but heir physical appearances. They pay a lot for keeping their prestiges and drive their expensive luxurious cars in the streets and don’t care about others . In case of an accident their other side would be revealed. During the history of human beings there were great scientists and intellectuals who never been fully accepted in public because of their appearance. But today every one admires and appreciates them for their works , inventions, masterpieces. Have you ever been abroad? IVe traveled to few countries like IJAE, Armenia,Georgia , Turkey .
Earlier I thought I had to learn heir languages then visit there . So I started learning English for thirty years and got my BA. In translation English (1999-2002) and my diploma in Russian as well in Consul General of Russian Federation in Rasht (2007-2008) . But I was totally wrong. Regardless of who you are they understand you and keep in touch with you easily and help you . Because they speak with a unique universal language what was language of humanity either verbal or nonverbal. So no matter who you are or from where you come, Just be honest and a real human beings , the world would be in your hands
I believe that physical appearance is not the best criteria to Judge who a person really is . My personality , ambitions, thoughts and what I really love doing should be the best parameters and scales for measuring who really I am. we should never be worried of not knowing all about ourselves while we are discovering new aspects of it. In my idea I really satisfied knowing that everyone who knows me, values and sees me as a man ot great ambitions willing to go that extra mile tor them.
Morality in International Law essay help websites: essay help websites
The discussion of whether or not morality belongs in international law has its’ roots in both the definition of morality as a concept, and the ability of an international body to legitimize the adjudication process based on premises of morality. The term ‘moral’ has its’ roots in middle english according to the oxford dictionary: “from Latin moral’s, from mos, mor- ‘custom’, (plural) mores ‘morals’.
As a noun the word was first used to translate Latin Moralia, the title of St Gregory the Great’s moral exposition of the Book of Job, and was subsequently applied to the orks of various classical writers. “l If we are to believe the Oxford analysis of the etymology of the term moral than morality is inescapably linked to religion from the inception of the term originating from a synopsis of a biblical text. Despite the issues that arise with connecting church and state, the creation of law on the premise of morality will not be discussed with specific relation to the etymological foundation of morality as a religious concept.
Rather the propensity of morality based arguments to be reduced to an emotional nature, the ability of regional and micro-scale djudicatory bodies to regulate more specified legality debates being mitigated by international morality related laws, and the nature of morality based arguments to alienate certain sects of society determined by the mutual-exclusivity of morality centered litigation will be analyzed in this document. From a philosophical perspective, one can adopt views on the nature of humanity from a plethora of sources. This paper determines its’ philosophical beliefs from the works of Thomas Hobbes.
Specifically in Hobbes’ arguably most famous of works the leviathan, Hobbes determines his view on the ‘state of nature’ for all humans within his text. In chapter eleven of the leviathan, Hobbes proclaims that mankind has a general “inclination… and restless desire of power after power, that ceaseth only in death. 2” He thinks that in the absence of the State and the formalization of a commonwealth protectorate, man cannot “assure the power and means to live well, which he hath present, without the acquisition of more. “3 Thus, given the absence of a governing body one must continuously “kill, subdue, supplant, or repel the other. ” This means that without the presence of a governing body there is not facility to reate a conceptualization of what is right or wrong. One only has inclination to survive and to obtain more power than all others around him in the perhaps vain attempt to extend his own life, as is only natural given the constant state of war that nature provides. Without the ability to act or even contemplate what is right or wrong the very idea of morality cannot exist, for morality is by definition “propositions asserted as objective truth”5 in relation to an individual or group conceptualization of what is ‘right’ or ‘wrong. If one is to follow this line of reasoning to its’ end then the onclusion is that without the formalization of the state, which is only possible by creating contracts between people giving up certain freedoms allowing for a collective state to provide universal protection6, then the idea of morality cannot even exist, for without security the idea of what is ‘right’ or ‘wrong’ is superfluous – the only thing that is relevant is how to obtain more power thus fortifying ones own existence tor another allotment ot time.
In response to this line of argument one could adopt another position on the definition of morality. Addressed as ‘conventional’ morality in George P. Fletchers ‘Symposium on Kantian Legal Theory,’ this definition claims that morality is a group of “propositions supported by social consensus. 7” The difference in definition here being essential for the conclusion of the former conversation about the creation of morality.
If one is to take the stance that morality is derived from a social agglomeration of stances on what is right or wrong, then the argument could be made that indeed Hobbes State of Nature is moral. The argument being that if everyone agrees to kill everyone else, then an agreement has been reached to escribe morals as consistently doing what is right for oneself. This argument has been considered inconsequential in this article for the reason that laws created on the premise that killing everyone else in the attempt to gain power would be universally agreed as not bringing Justice. Similarly, if this argument were used as a thought experiment to try and disprove the legitimacy of the previous line of reasoning, considering the universal acceptance of this formation of morality being unsuitable for adjudication, universal agreement to adopt a Hobbsian state of nature s being moral would go against the socially agglomerated view of what is right or wrong therefore eliminating a Hobbsian state of nature as being moral by a ‘conventional’ moral definition.
Before moving on to a more empirical case-based study of the effects of moralistic laws, a third approach to moralistic interpretation was brought to light in ‘The State as a Purveyor of Morality’ by Don Welch in the George Washington Law Review. Progressing this article from the realm of theory to a more case-based conversation of moralities impact on the adjudication process, the case of Lawrence v. Texas will now be looked at.
Explain how the Bible shows God as a creator law essay help: law essay help
There are many accounts in the Bible that state God as the creator. Genesis 1 and 2 are both creation stories but slightly differ in their accounts; Genesis 1 is a day by day account of all the things God created in not so much detail whereas Genesis 2 explains the creation story in a way that focuses more on the creation of man and woman than Just the lands. Having two accounts of the creation story means that it is easier to come up with your own conclusion as to how the earth was created.
The first line of Genesis 1 is “In the beginning God created the heavens and the earth” There is no explanation as to where God came from or why He is there, He Just exists and creates the heavens and the earth. This alone is showing God as the creator. Genesis then carries on to state all the things God created all with no scientific or physical proof or evidence as to why and how God is doing so. “So God created man in his own image, in the image of God he created him; male and female he created them” This quote is from line 27 and is on the 6th day.
The repetition of the word ‘created’ is enforcing to the reader that God is the creator of everything and this is done so that there is no doubt in the readers mind whether God is the creator or not. God creating man and woman in his own image is showing that we are superior to other beings such as animals which shows that God is the humans superior. Being made in Gods image is his way of blessing the humans in life as we are made in the ‘Creators’ image. “Rule over the fish of the sea and the birds of the air… This quote is saying that God is passing down his ‘ruler ship’ on to the humans. This means that God is starting to ‘back away from his previous role and now feels that he has created a world that the inhabitants (humans) can look after. Genesis two is another creation story but has a few differences to Genesis 1 . While Genesis 1 speaks a lot more of the specifics of how and when each part of the earth was made, Genesis 2 speaks a whole lot more about the creation of humans rather than the land.
Job 38 trom the k ot Job is a story ot now Satan and nave a disagreement where Satan was saying that Job only worships God because he is prosperous in his life, God then agrees to take away all his possessions and leave him with nothing to show Satan that Job would still worship him even if he was left with nothing. Job’s three friends Eliphaz, Bildad and Zophar try to comfort Job but they end up doing the pposite and tell Job that the reason for all his losses is because he has sinned and now God is making him suffer.
In the end Job has had enough and questions God, this makes God angry and then Job has a better understanding and realises that he should have trusted God all along. God then returns all of Jobs health and possession in better amounts than they previously were. This story is God showing his power and his superiority to humans. “Where were you when I laid the earth’s foundation? ” This is God saying that he is mightier than any human and they do not compare to His power. This is also showing that God is omnipotent and that we know nothing compared to him.
This is all enforcing that God is the creator and better than all the humans. “Have you ever given orders to the morning, or shown the dawn it’s place,” This is saying that God has dominance over everything in the world, humans and nature. After Gods account of all his majestic works (such as the world and humans) and power, Job has to acknowledge God’s right as creator to do as he pleases and to not be questioned. Job is essentially the personification of all humans who do not elieve god as the creator, Job doubted God and his ability so god became angry; this is supposedly what happens every time someone doubts God.
Psalm 8 is a song about the lord God and his creation. miou have set your glory above the heavens” While this quote form the first verse isn’t directly linked to God being the creator it is saying that God has stated his glory in a way that so far in this psalm we do not know yet, we know that God has glory which could mean he has done something great. “When I consider the heavens, the work of your fingers” Now we start to work out hat it is that causes God to have glory, “the work of your fingers” we are literally told that God has made the heavens with his fingers’.
This personification of God shows that people saw him as one of them but also appreciated his greater power, this could possibly relate to humans being made in God’s image. “you made him a little lower than the heavenly beings” This quote is, like Job 38, stating God’s dominance over the humans. God made humans a little lower than heavenly beings so that they knew their place and that they were lesser than himself the creator’.
Income statement melbourne essay help: melbourne essay help
Does the new sales and distribution strategy make sense from an operational standpoint? Consumers have to deal with distributors for contacts, but with B&L for other items – confusion for consumers B&L has more cash and fewer assets in inventory – better for B&L Gives them financing (steady cash flow on promissory notes and profits) for other goods Allows them to engage in other goods Advantages: Marketing resources immediately freed up to focus on the disposable contact lens market Lower SG&A expenses with new distribution plan Less inventory held by B&L for conventional lens, more in receivables
Possibly lower distribution cost due to shipment consolidation (only shipped to distributor (32 of them) instead of shipping to final customer location) Disadvantages: Damage relationship with distributors by forcing them to buy the product at high volumes Additional expenses of new product (unknown) 1. What is the impact of the December 1993 shipments of conventional lenses on the 1993 financial statements? Is it significant? There was a $22 million inventory sold to distributors which provided B&L with positive net sales. Increase revenue by $22 million Reduced inventory by 1. million pair of contacts; based on COGS of 45% this could ean a reduction in inventory of close to $10 million Little impact on SG&A – little spent on sales effort AR increase (promissory notes payable June 1994) Some increase in marketing, promotional and expenses related to discounts in Premier Vision plan SIGNIFICANT: B&L reported a 13% year over year increase in sales revenue, despite a decline in market demand for conventional lenses – increase in both replacement and disposal lenses (which B&L does not produce) Results of decrease in inventory: Increased revenue significantly & reduced excess inventory held by B&L, increased AR significantly; portrays positive outlook on Balance Sheet.
Essay Writing at Profs Only
Review This Service